Sistema Fire and Gas Yokogawa

Sistema de deteccin de fuego y gas para un tanque en
una planta regasificadora

TITULACIN: Ingeniera Tcnica Industrial en Electrnica Industrial

AUTOR: Ricardo Fuentes Gas
DIRECTOR: Pedro Iiguez Galbete
FECHA: Junio del 2011.

Sistema de deteccin de fuego y gas para un tanque en una planta regasificadora
NDICE GENERAL
2

1
Sistema de deteccin de fuego y gas para un tanque en una
planta regasificadora

NDICE GENERAL

Encargado por:
Tutor: Sr. Pedro Jess iguez Galbete
Direccin: Av. Pasos Catalans nm. 5
Poblacin: Tarragona
Provincia: Tarragona
CP: 43002
e-mail: pedrojesus.iniguez@urv.cat

Elaborado por:
Autor: Sr. Ricardo Fuentes Gas
Poblacin: Reus
CP: 43204
e-mail: ricardo.fuentes@estudiants.urv.cat

NDICE GENERAL
3

1 ndice General

II Memoria descriptiva
III Memoria de clculo
IV Memoria de planos
V Presupuesto
VI Pliego de condiciones
VII Anexos


Memoria descriptiva

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
2

2

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA

Encargado por:
Tutor: Sr. Pedro J ess iguez Galbete
Poblacin: Tarragona
CP: 43002

Elaborado por:
Poblacin: Reus
CP: 43204

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
3

Hoja de identificacin
Ttulo del Proyecto:
SISTEMA DE DETECCIN DE FUEGO Y GAS PARA UN TANQUE EN UNA
PLANTA REGASIFICADORA

Encargado por:
Poblacin: Tarragona
CP: 43002

Elaborado por:
Poblacin: Reus
CP: 43204

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
4

1 MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA ..................................................................................................... 6
1.1 OBJETO DEL PROYECTO .......................................................................................................... 6
1.2 ALCANCE DEL PROYECTO ....................................................................................................... 6
1.3 ANTECEDENTES ........................................................................................................................ 7
1.3.1 PLANTA REGASIFICADORA ..................................................................................................... 7
1.3.2 FACTOR HUMANO ................................................................................................................... 8
1.3.3 DISPOSITIVOS DE CAMPO ........................................................................................................ 8
1.4 NORMAS Y REFERENCIAS ........................................................................................................ 8
1.4.1 ELCTRICAS ............................................................................................................................ 8
1.4.2 INSTRUMENTACIN ................................................................................................................ 8
1.4.3 BIBLIOGRAFA ........................................................................................................................ 9
1.4.3.1 Safety System .................................................................................................................... 9
1.4.3.2 Software ............................................................................................................................ 9
1.4.3.3 Hardware ........................................................................................................................... 9
1.4.3.4 Instalacin del software y hardware .................................................................................. 9
1.5 ABREVIATURAS Y ACRNIMOS ............................................................................................. 10
1.6 DEFINICIONES ........................................................................................................................ 11
1.7 DIMENSIONES DEL SISTEMA .................................................................................................. 11
1.8 DISTRIBUCIN ELCTRICA .................................................................................................... 11
1.8.1 ACOMETIDAS ........................................................................................................................ 11
1.8.2 PROTECCIONES ..................................................................................................................... 11
1.9 CONDICIONES AMBIENTALES ............................................................................................... 12
1.10 INTERFACES DE OPERACIN ............................................................................................... 12
1.11 RESERVAS DE EXPANSIN ................................................................................................... 12
1.12 SISTEMA SCS (SAFETY CONTROL STATION) ..................................................................... 12
1.12.1 INTRODUCCIN ................................................................................................................... 12
1.12.2 ARQUITECTURA DEL SISTEMA ............................................................................................ 15
1.12.2.1 La estacin de ingeniera (EWS) ..................................................................................... 16
1.12.3 COMUNICACIONES .............................................................................................................. 16
1.12.3.1 Comunicacin V-Net ....................................................................................................... 16
1.12.3.1.1 Tarjeta de comunicacin v-net con el Sistema de Seguridad ....................................... 17
1.12.3.1.2 Comunicacin con SDC ............................................................................................... 18
1.12.3.1.3 El controlador y nodos ................................................................................................. 18
1.12.4 SEGURIDAD INTRNSECA .................................................................................................... 19
1.12.5 ESTRUCTURA DEL HARDWARE ........................................................................................... 22
1.12.5.1 Seguridad y Disponibilidad ............................................................................................. 22
1.12.5.2 Hardware de la SCS ........................................................................................................ 22
1.12.5.3 Restricciones y precauciones tomadas para el montaje. .................................................. 25
1.12.5.4 Requisitos Ambientales: .................................................................................................. 27
1.12.5.5 Deteccin de Fallo y Reaccin ........................................................................................ 27
1.12.6 SINCRONIZACIN DEL SISTEMA ......................................................................................... 29
1.12.6.1 Tiempo de Reaccin del Sistema .................................................................................... 29
1.12.6.2 Tiempo de Seguridad de Proceso .................................................................................... 30
1.12.7 DISPONIBILIDAD DEL SISTEMA ........................................................................................... 31
1.13 SOFTWARE DE INGENIERA ................................................................................................. 32
1.13.1 INTRODUCCIN AL WORKBENCH ....................................................................................... 32
1.13.2 ESTRUCTURA DE UN PROYECTO EN WORKBENCH.............................................................. 32
1.13.2.1 Localizacin del proyecto ............................................................................................... 32
1.13.2.2 Creacin de un nuevo proyecto ....................................................................................... 33
1.13.2.3 Hardware architecture view............................................................................................. 34
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
5
1.13.2.4 Configuracin de las propiedades ................................................................................... 34
1.13.2.5 Configuracin de redes .................................................................................................... 35
1.13.2.6 Link architecture view ..................................................................................................... 36
1.13.2.7 Declaracin de elementos en la base de datos del sistema .............................................. 37
1.13.2.8 Declaracin de variables E/S en el diccionario ............................................................... 37
1.13.2.9 Asignacin de las seales a los dispositivos ................................................................... 38
1.13.2.10 POU: Unidad de Organizacin de Programa .................................................................. 40
1.13.2.11 Programas ........................................................................................................................ 40
1.13.2.12 Funciones ........................................................................................................................ 40
1.13.2.13 Bloques de funciones ...................................................................................................... 40
1.13.2.14 Editor de mltiples lenguajes .......................................................................................... 41
1.13.2.15 Lenguaje LD: Diagramas de Escalera ............................................................................. 41
1.13.2.16 Lenguaje FBD: Diagrama de Bloques Funcionales ........................................................ 41
1.13.2.17 Libreras .......................................................................................................................... 42
1.13.2.18 Depuracin y simulacin ................................................................................................. 42
1.13.2.19 Version control tool ......................................................................................................... 42
1.13.2.20 SOE Viewer .................................................................................................................... 43
1.13.3 SEGURIDAD PARA EL ACCESO A LA SCS ............................................................................ 44
1.13.3.1 Nivel de seguridad de la SCS .......................................................................................... 44
1.13.3.2 Definicin de cada nivel de seguridad ............................................................................ 44
1.13.3.3 Nivel Online .................................................................................................................... 45
1.13.3.4 Nivel Offline ................................................................................................................... 45
1.13.4 BLOQUES CREADOS PARA EL SISTEMA ............................................................................... 46
1.13.4.1 Bloque DET_GAS para entrada analgica con alarma de alta ........................................ 49
1.13.4.2 Bloque DET_LLAMA para entrada analgica con alarma de alta ................................. 51
1.13.4.3 Bloque DET_DERRAME para entrada analgica con alarma de baja ........................... 53
1.13.4.4 Bloques S_DI_NA/NC para entrada digital con supervisin de linea ............................ 54
1.13.4.5 Bloques DI_NSI_FGS para DI con fallo de Linea ......................................................... 55
1.13.4.6 Bloques DI_bp para entrada digital ................................................................................. 56
1.13.4.7 Bloque b2D5, B2d10, b2d15, b2d21 para disparo por lgica 2 de X .............................. 56
1.13.5 OPERACIN CON EL SISTEMA DE FGS ................................................................................ 58
1.13.5.1 Descripcin del entrorno de las pantallas ........................................................................ 58
1.13.5.1.1 Pantalla general de Planta ............................................................................................ 59
1.13.5.1.2 Pantalla de Zona ........................................................................................................... 60
1.13.5.1.3 Cuadros Resumen ......................................................................................................... 61
1.13.5.2 Acciones .......................................................................................................................... 64
1.13.5.2.1 Acciones disparo al sistema SIS ................................................................................... 65
1.13.5.2.2 Acciones extincin de diluvio ...................................................................................... 65
1.13.5.2.3 Acciones XMCP (Lamparas )y sirena .......................................................................... 66
1.13.5.2.4 Accin Zona en Pruebas ............................................................................................... 66
1.13.5.3 Pantallas del sistema de extincin Diluvio. ..................................................................... 67
1.13.5.4 Pantalla del sistema extincin polvo tanque .................................................................... 68
1.13.5.5 Caraturas de los detectores .............................................................................................. 69
1.13.5.5.1 Detector de GAS (GSD) ............................................................................................... 72
1.13.5.5.2 Detector de derrame (TSD) .......................................................................................... 74
1.13.5.5.3 Detector de llama (FSD) .............................................................................................. 76
1.13.5.5.4 Pulsador de alarma (MCP) ........................................................................................... 78
1.13.5.6 Pantallas de alarmas de sistema, alarmas activas y sumario de alarmas ......................... 80

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
6
1 Memoria Descriptiva
1.1 Objeto del Proyecto
La finalidad de este proyecto es proporcionar a una planta de regasificacin de gas
natural, un sistema de deteccin de fuego y gas o FGS (Fire and Gas System). Este sistema
ser el encargado de la prevencin de incendios y de fugas de gas natural, y en caso de
incendio proceder a activar los sistemas de extincin de incendios.

Figura 1.1 Grafico de la operacin del sistema de seguridad
Tiene adems la funcin de exponer que la instalacin que nos ocupa rene las
condiciones y garantas mnimas exigidas por la reglamentacin vigente, asignando un
nivel de integridad de la seguridad (SIL Safety Integrity Level) determinado por la
criticidad de los lazos de control, como se indica en el apartado de la memoria que le
corresponde.

1.2 Alcance del proyecto
El proyecto cubre el diseo y construccin del sistema de fuego y gas del tanque en
la planta regasificadora de gas natural. Esto implica tanto el diseo de la cabina elctrica
donde se ubicar el hardware de control como el software que residir en dicho hardware y
que gestionar el sistema. Siempre cumpliendo los requisitos necesarios para permanecer
dentro de la normativa que nos afecta.

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
7
1.3 Antecedentes
1.3.1 Planta Regasificadora
El funcionamiento de esta planta regasificadora en concreto es el siguiente.
Recibe el gas natural licuado (GNL) a travs de buques metaneros. Para que este
transporte sea ms efectivo el gas natural debe estar licuado, para conseguir esto el gas
natural debe estar aproximadamente sobre los -160C.
El GNL se descarga de los buques a travs de 3 brazos de descarga y se dirige a los
tanques de almacenamiento. En los tanques el GNL se mantiene a la misma temperatura de
-160C. El aporte de calor al GNL (proceso de bombeo o radiacin solar) provoca que una
fraccin de ste pasa a fase vapor. Este gas (Boil Off) se utiliza para diversas funciones,
compensar el desplazamiento de la carga que se origina en el proceso de descarga del
buque, reinyectar en el proceso gracias al relicuador (tras pasar por unos compresores),
cuando excede la capacidad de los dos anteriores el gas sobrante se quema en la antorcha.
Un sistema de bombeo ubicado en el interior del tanque, bombas primarias, permite
la conduccin del GNL hacia el relicuador, que acta como acumulador de lquido para las
bombas secundarias y permite la recuperacin del Boil Off, incorporndolo a la corriente
de GNL. El GNL procedente del relicuador es bombeado a alta presin por un sistema de
bombeo secundario, de diseo anlogo al primario, que impulsa al GNL hacia los
vaporizadores. El paso de lquido a gas se realiza en los vaporizadores de agua de mar. A
travs de estos, el GNL se transforma en vapor al ser calentado a una temperatura mayor
de 0C con agua de mar.
El gas natural procedente de los vaporizadores se dirige a travs de un colector
comn a unos sistemas de regulacin, medida y odorizacin, finalmente se introduce a la
Red de Gasoductos. La puesta en marcha, funcionamiento normal, parada de emergencia y
sistema de fuego y gas (FGS) se lleva a cabo por PLCs.

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
8

Ante todo tenemos que tener claro los objetivos principales del sistema FGS, es
suministrar medios fiables para la deteccin y extincin de incendios en la planta sin
provocar situaciones de peligro e iniciar las alarmas apropiadas. Por lo tanto, el sistema
FGS detectar automticamente una fuga de gas natural, gas natural licuado o fuego,
reaccionar frente a esta condicin automticamente accionando la instalacin contra
incendios, previniendo de cualquier efecto negativo importante originado por esa causa;
tendr una clasificacin de seguridad para usar el sistema de FGS en un entorno total SIL
3, donde la probabilidad media del error en carga no exceder de 110
-3
.
El ProSafe-RS, controlador usado para este proyecto, ha sido certificado hasta
aplicaciones SIL3 para uso en configuracin simple dual por TV en Alemania.
1.3.2 Factor humano
El factor humano no est incluido en los clculos de fiabilidad. Las consecuencias de
una operacin insegura causada por error y/o mal procedimiento no forman parte de esta
valoracin de seguridad.
1.3.3 Dispositivos de campo
Los dispositivos de campo no forman parte de la evaluacin de seguridad, aunque se
incluyen para su estudio y repercusin en el SIL total del lazo.
1.4 Normas y referencias
El equipamiento debe estar marcado y diseado de acuerdo a:
Directivas EC (97/98/EC PED, 98/37/EC MD, 89/336/EEC EMCD, 73/23/EEC
LVD, 98/92/EC-ATEX), etc.
1.4.1 Elctricas
Calificacin para reas con peligro de explosin: IEC, IP
Equipos e instalaciones elctricas: EN (ATEX), IEC
1.4.2 Instrumentacin
Medicin e Instrumentacin del proceso: API 551
Mediciones de caudal: ISO 5167
Presin: API 520 y 521

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
9
1.4.3 Bibliografa
Manuales consultados escritos por Industrial Safety Systems Dept., Industrial
Automation Systems Business Div. de Yokogawa Electric Corporation. Publicados por
Yokogawa Electric Corporation:
1.4.3.1 Safety System
IM 32S01S10-01E: Safety Manual
IM 32S01C10-01E: Engineering Guide
1.4.3.2 Software
IM 32S03B10-01E: Safety Control Stations
IM 32S04B10-01E: Engineering Reference
IM 32S04B20-01E: Utilities and Maintenance Reference
IM 32S05B10-01E: Open Interfaces
IM 32S02B10-01E: Messages
1.4.3.3 Hardware
IM 32S06C10-01E: Safety Control Stations (Hardware)
IM 32S06H10-01E: Communication Devices
1.4.3.4 Instalacin del software y hardware
IM 32S01C50-01E: Installation

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
10
1.5 Abreviaturas y acrnimos
En las tablas Tabla 2.1 y Tabla 2.2 se expone una relacin de las abreviaturas,
acrnimos y definiciones que aparecen en el proyecto.
Tabla 1.1. Abreviaturas y acrnimos

Abreviatura Descripcin
1oo2 Arquitectura uno de dos
2oo3 Arquitectura dos de tres
Gabinete Cerramiento o cabina que contiene diferentes equipos electrnicos y
material elctrico
SCD (DCS) Sistema de Control Distribuido (Distributed Control System)
FGS Sistema de Fuego y Gas (Fire and Gas System)
EWS (SENG) Estacin de Ingeniera (Engineering Work Station)
ED/SD Entrada digital / Salida Digital
E/S (I/O) Entrada / Salida, se aplica a tarjetas y/o seales (Input / Output)
SCS Controlador de Seguridad (Safety Control Station)
FCS Estacin de Control de Campo, Controlador de Campo (Field Control
Station)
FAT Prueba de Aceptacin en Fbrica (Factory Acceptance Test)
FDS Especificacin de Diseo Funcional (Functional Design Specification)
ISO International Standardisation Organization
MCB Miniature Circuit Breaker (Interruptor elctrico)
MTBF Tiempo Medio entre fallos, Mean Time Between Failures
MTTNF Tiempo medio entre fallos erroneous, Mean Time To Nuisance Failures
MTTR Tiempo medio para reparacin, Mean Time To Repair
MTTUF Tiempo medio entre fallos No Seguros, Mean Time To Unsafe Failures
PE Tierra de Proteccin (Protective Earth)
PLC Controlador de Lgica Programable. Programmable Logic Controller
POU Program Organization Unit
FA (PSU) Fuente de Alimentacin (Power Supply Unit)
SET Herramientas de Ingeniera, System Engineering Tool
SI Seguridad Intrnseca
SIL Nivel de Integridad de Seguridad, Safety Integrity Level
SOE Secuencia de Eventos, Sequence Of Events
SVP Plan de Validacin del SIL (Safety Validation Plan)
TV Technischer berwachungs Verein
SFI (UPS) Sistema de Fuerza Ininterrumpible. Uninterruptable Power Supply
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
11
1.6 Definiciones
Abreviatura Descripcin
V-NET Red local redundante dual entre los mdulos procesador del PLC y la
EWS, corresponde a la misma red del ESD.
ESB-BUS Bus local redundante dual entre un procesador y los mdulos de
Entrada/Salida del PLC
Tabla 1.2. Definiciones
1.7 Dimensiones del Sistema
Se har uso de dos cabinas basadas en el estndar Rittal de cabinas. Las
dimensiones (incluyendo el zcalo) son Ancho x Fondo x Alto: 800x800x2100mm. Una de
las cabinas dispone de un ventilador de refrigeracin (suponiendo una altura adicional de
120 mm).

1.8 Distribucin elctrica
A continuacin se exponen los aspectos a tener en cuenta para la distribucin
elctrica y alimentacin del sistema, los esquemas se encuentran en los Anexos del
proyecto.

1.8.1 Acometidas
Para la alimentacin de los equipos se dispondrn de 3 acometidas de 220 Vac en la
cabina, 2 de alimentacin segura procedentes de 2 SAI distintos y en fase, y una de no
segura procedente de la red de la sala de Racks.
Las acometidas con alimentaciones seguras (230L1 y 230L2) se destinarn para el
controlador, los nodos del sistema de seguridad, las fuentes de alimentacin a 24 Vdc y
alimentacin para bocinas y lmparas. De esta forma tendremos la seguridad de una red
elctrica redundante.
La tercera acometida (230TN) que no proceder de SAI, se va a usar para la
ventilacin y la iluminacin del armario.

1.8.2 Protecciones
La proteccin elctrica de los equipos ser a travs de magnetotrmicos, que para el
consumo caracterstico de las fuentes de alimentacin a 24 Vdc y el del sistema Prosafe-RS
la mejor opcin ser montarlos de 6 A.
El circuito de 24 Vdc se proteger con un magnetotrmico de 20A a la salida de cada
una de las dos fuentes de alimentacin.
Para proteger los mdulos de posibles subidas de tensin se instalarn bornas
fusibles con un elemento fusible de 2 A, slo para el cableado de alimentacin positiva.
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
12
1.9 Condiciones Ambientales
El sistema operar bajo las siguientes condiciones de entorno:
Las temperaturas ambiente que el sistema soportar son:
Mximo: +60 C
La humedad del ambiente en el que el sistema trabajar es una humedad relativa
media que va desde el 5% hasta el 95% (no condensado).
Los mdulos del PLC considerarn la temperatura alta excesiva dentro de los
mdulos del PLC como error de clase 2.
1.10 Interfaces de Operacin
Los interfaces del operador con este sistema constan de lo siguiente:
Indicadores LED en todos los mdulos PLC.
Monitorizacin de la aplicacin en la EWS (visor del estado de la lgica on line).
Aplicacin de secuencia de eventos en la EWS.
1.11 Reservas de Expansin
El sistema contiene un 20% de reservas cableadas en la lgica y terminales
(entrada/salida cableada hasta regleteros) y un 20% de espacio de reserva en Gabinetes y
racks.
1.12 Sistema SCS (Safety Control Station)
1.12.1 Introduccin
El ProSafe-RS es un PLC de Seguridad, es decir, Safety Instrumented System
(SIS), certificado por la Technische eberwachungs-Verein (TV) en conformidad con
el Safety Integrity Level (SIL) 3 y especificado en la norma IEC 61508.
El ProSafe-RS se compone de las Estaciones llamadas Safety Control Station
(SCS), del PC de Ingeniera de Seguridad (EWS) y el bus de control en tiempo real V-Net,
que conecta la SCS y la EWS.
La SCS ejecuta el control seguro y la SENG ejecuta la manutencin e ingeniera para
la SCS.

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
13
El ProSafe-RS es capaz de atender a la clasificacin SIL3 con mdulos simples
(Figura 1.2), los cuales poseen circuitos duplicados.

Figura 1.2. Configuracin con mdulos simples

Para aumentar la disponibilidad del sistema y la tolerancia a fallas en este proyecto
se han duplicado todos los mdulos, conforme se muestra en la Figura 1.3.
Esta flexibilidad permite cualquiera combinacin de dual-redundante, con
entrada/salida simple o entrada/salida redundante del campo, o cualquier otra combinacin.

Figura 1.3. Configuracin con mdulos redundantes

El siguiente punto es una gua de los principales requerimientos funcionales del
sistema. Esto abarca entradas, salidas y controladores lgicos, que estarn incluidos en la
categora funcional requerida de seguridad.

SIL 3
Unid. Process Princ,
Memria
Ci rcuito, Uni d.
Process Princ
Memria
Sada Entrada
Circuito, Unid.
Process Pri nc
Circuito, Unid.
Process Princ
CPU
Circuito, Unid.
Process Princ

SIL 3
Memria
Ci rcuito, Uni d.
Process Princ
Memria
Salida Entrada
Circuito, Unid.
Process Pri nc
Circuito, Unid.
Process Princ
CPU
Circuito, Unid.
Process Princ
Memria
Circuito, Unid.
Process Pri nc
Memria
Salida Entrada
Circui to, Unid.
Process Princ
Ci rcuito, Uni d.
Process Princ
CPU
Circuito, Unid.
Process Princ
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
14
Todos los terminales de E/S y el equipo del PLC estarn contenidos en el gabinete.

Figura 1.4. Ejemplo de configuracin

En la Figura 1.4 vemos un ejemplo de configuracin del sistema. La comunicacin
de seguridad Inter-SCS permite un lazo de seguridad que resuelve el requisito de SIL 3 y
que une diferentes SCSs conectadas va V-Net, aunque en el proyecto que nos incumbe
slo utilizaremos 1 SCS con 4 nodos, quedando una arquitectura del sistema como la que
se mostrar en el apartado Arquitectura del sistema.
El ProSafe-RS se comunicar con el sistema de control distribuido (SCD) CENTUM
CS3000, desde el que se podrn supervisar las seales comunicadas mediante ese
protocolo.

PROSAFE-RS

SCS

SCS

EWS
Comunicacin
segura entre SCS
V-Net 1
Estacin
Ingeniera y
Mantenimiento
CENTUM CS

FCS

EWS HIS
V-Net 2
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
15
1.12.2 Arquitectura del sistema
En la Figura 1.5 podemos observar la arquitectura del sistema, en la que se
diferencian tres partes:
La Estacin de Ingeniera (EWS).
Las comunicaciones va V-Net.
El controlador (SCS251) y los cuatro nodos (SCS252, SCS253, SCS254 y
SCS255).

Figura 1.5. Arquitectura del sistema
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
16
1.12.2.1 La estacin de ingeniera (EWS)
Se trata de un ordenador de sobre mesa de la firma HP modelo Compaq dc con
procesador IntelCore
TM
2 Duo; 2GB de memoria estndar; 500 GB de disco duro;
unidad DVD+/-RW 16x; monitor TFT 20,1 pulgadas (1600x1200) con el sistema operativo
Windows XP Profesional (licencia OEM) y con las funciones de ingeniera (programacin
del sistema de seguridad) instaladas, para editar, configurar y transferir los diferentes
programas que residirn en el controlador. Dicho programa (Workbench) y todas sus
aplicaciones y usos se explican en el apartado de Software de Ingeniera.

1.12.3 Comunicaciones
En el sistema existen dos redes de comunicaciones principales, la V-Net y Ethernet.
1.12.3.1 Comunicacin V-Net
Como se aprecia en la Figura 1.5 la comunicacin entre la Estacin de Ingeniera y
el controlador es por V-Net. Se trata de una red dual redundante basada en el estndar
IEEE 802.4, operando a una velocidad de 10 Mbits/seg. La conexin es multidrop.
Un bus V-Net soporta 64 nodos en un dominio, pudiendo ser ampliado mediante
convertidores de bus hasta un mximo de 256 nodos repartidos en hasta 16 dominios
diferentes.
La distancia de transmisin es de 185m en cable coaxial 10base2 para las IHMs y
500m en cable 10base5 para las Estaciones de Control. Utilizando repetidores coaxiales
podemos extender la red hasta 1.6 km, o 20km con repetidores pticos.
El diagnstico de la red de comunicacin es completo y la integridad de los datos es
exacta en razn de que el sistema dispone de la funcin de chequeo de errores de
transmisin y de auto correccin de datos transmitidos ("Error checking and correction"
ECC). Se basa en un algoritmo ms complejo y se utiliza en computadoras de gama alta,
como servidores de red. El sistema trabaja en conjuncin con el controlador de memoria, y
anexa a los bits de datos, los bits ECC, que son almacenados junto con los de datos. Estos
bits extras, junto con la decodificacin correspondiente, sirven para realizar la
comprobacin en el momento de la lectura.
Su diferencia principal con la paridad es que puede detectar el error de un bit y
corregirlo, con lo que generalmente el usuario no detecta que se ha producido un error. El
sistema ECC tambin puede detectar errores de 2, 3 y 4 bits (sumamente raros), aunque en
este caso no puede corregirlos; en estos casos devuelve un error de paridad. Hay que tener
en cuenta que la verificacin de errores (ECC o paridad) depende ms de la placa base
(tipo de controlador de memoria utilizado) que de la memoria en s. La memoria pone el
almacenamiento, pero es el controlador el que decide como se utilizar.
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
17

Figura 1.6. Cable coaxial V-Net con filtros de abrazadera
La redundancia de la red de comunicacin es realizada por dos cables en las
Estaciones de Control de Seguridad SCSs y dos cables en la Estacin de Ingeniera de
Seguridad EWS.

1.12.3.1.1 Tarjeta de comunicacin v-net con el Sistema de Seguridad
Para la comunicacin entre la EWS y el controlador va V-Net es necesaria una
tarjeta de comunicaciones totalmente independiente de la red de transmisin de datos
Ethernet. Eso es posible gracias a la tarjeta VF-701 de Yokogawa, que puede ser montada
en cualquier de las ranuras PCI del PC de ingeniera, dicha tarjeta se muestra en la Figura
1.7 y Figura 1.8.
Gracias a esta comunicacin, se consigue mxima velocidad de transmisin de datos
con la planta, independencia de la red de comunicaciones de la propia planta y adems
transmisin de datos a travs de una red segura y redundante.

Figura 1.7. Tarjeta VF-701

Para esta tarjeta configuraremos los Dip switches en Dominio 01 y Estacin 35,
coincidiendo con el dominio que hemos dispuesto el controlador, pero con distinta estacin
para no crear conflictos de comunicaciones, ya que al ser una red no se pueden duplicar las
IPs.
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
18
Conector BNC
Indicador datos enviados (SND)
BUS 2 BUS 1
Indicador datos recibidos (RCV)

Figura 1.8. Detalle vista frontal tarjeta VF-701
1.12.3.1.2 Comunicacin con SDC
La comunicacin con los sistemas de control distribuido (SCD), se realiza por la
VNET. As el operador de planta a travs del sistema de control distribuido puede
consultar en cualquier momento el estado de la planta y de cualquier detector, as como el
tanto por ciento de seal que tiene el detector, inhibir un detector que este en fallo,etc.
1.12.3.1.3 El controlador y nodos
En la Figura 1.9 vemos como se deben colocar los switch que hay en la parte
posterior del controlador y nodos, ya que a cada SCS se le debe asignar un dominio y una
estacin. El dominio puede estar entre 1 y 16 y la estacin se puede configurar entre 1 y 64
(En nuestro caso es el Dominio 01 y Estacin 35).

Figura 1.9. Modelo del controlador, nodos y la configuracin de sus direcciones
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
19

Figura 1.10. Imagen de la parte posterior del controlador
Para la comunicacin entre el controlador y los diferentes nodos que dependen de l
se usa la red local redundante llamada ESB Bus (128 Mbits/s), que debe conectar-se a los
mdulos SEC401 en el caso del controlador (SSC10D) y a los SSB401 en los nodos
(SNB10D). La distancia mxima que soporta este bus si se usa cable coaxial es de 700m y
con fibra ptica 20Km.
1.12.4 Seguridad Intrnseca
La Seguridad Intrnseca es un mtodo de proteccin contra explosiones basado en
el criterio de Prevencin. El empleo de este mtodo previene la ignicin del
medio inflamable gracias a que los instrumentos colocados en el rea peligrosa
son incapaces de generar o almacenar suficiente energa, a la vez que se limita,
mediante el empleo de dispositivos conocidos como Barreras de Seguridad Intrnseca, la
energa que le es suministrada al instrumento desde el rea segura.

Las zonas con atmsferas potencialmente explosivas se hallan clasificadas segn la
frecuencia con que un gas o polvo explosivo se halla presente en ellas bajo condiciones
normales de funcionamiento.

En la tabla 1.2 vemos las diferentes clasificaciones para atmsferas de gas.

Tabla 1.2 Clasificaciones de atmsferas de gas

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
20
La figura 1.11 nos muestra un ejemplo de una clasificacin de las zonas peligrosas
teniendo en cuenta la posibilidad de presencia de gases explosivos.
Fig. 2
Figura 1.11. Imagen de la parte posterior del controlador
Para poder explicar ms ampliamente la Seguridad intrnseca, primero debemos
introducir algunos conceptos de la norma ANSI/ISA-RP12.06.01-2003.

Circuito Intrnsecamente Seguro: Es un circuito en el cual cualquier chispa o efecto
trmico que se genere, es incapaz de causar la ignicin de una mezcla de material
combustible o inflamable, presente en el aire bajo ciertas condiciones de ensayo
pre-establecidas.
Aparato Intrnsecamente Seguro: Es cualquier aparato en el cual todos sus
circuitos son intrnsecamente seguros.

Aparato Simple: Es un componente elctrico o combinacin de los mismos, de
construccin simple, con parmetros elctricos bien definidos, que no es capaz de
generar ms de 1,5 voltios, 100 miliamperios y 25 miliwatios. Tambin es un
componente pasivo que no es capaz de disipar ms de 1,3 watios y que es
compatible con la seguridad intrnseca del circuito en el cual est siendo utilizado.

Aparato Asociado: Es cualquier aparato en el cual sus circuitos no son
necesariamente intrnsecamente seguros por s mismos, pero afectan la energa
presente en los circuitos intrnsecamente seguros y son utilizados para mantener
la seguridad intrnseca.

Aterramiento de Seguridad Intrnseca: Segn la norma ANSI/ISA-RP12.06.01-
2003, es un sistema de aterramiento que posee un conductor dedicado, aislado
del sistema de potencia excepto en un punto, de manera de que las corrientes no
fluyan normalmente hacia tierra y que estn confiablemente conectado a un
electrodo de tierra, segn el artculo 250 de la NEC

Tenemos dos tipos de aisladores, las barras zener y los aisladores galvnicos, en
este proyecto usaremos los segundos, ya que no necesitan puesta a tierra, al estar aislados
elctricamente las zonas peligrosa y segura, se pueden poner a tierra perfectamente los
sensores en el lado del campo.

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
21
No existen bucles de tierra por lo que no se producen errores en las mediciones de las
variables procedentes de la zona peligrosa.

Tampoco existen corrientes de prdida a tierra ocasionadas por los diodos zener.

Aisladores galvnicos para seguridad intrnseca
Este dispositivo se basa en la separacin elctrica entre la zona peligrosa y la segura.

El esquema del circuito lo podemos ver en la figura 1.12.

Figura 1.12. Circuito de un aislador galvnico
Los elementos sombreados son los encargados de formar la barrera de seguridad
intrnseca en s misma. La separacin elctrica se logra mediante el uso de un transformador
entre la entrada y la salida y otro para la alimentacin. En cuanto a la confiabilidad respecto de
las fallas soportadas, los aisladores galvnicos emplean componentes de alto rendimiento tales
como transformadores u optoacopladores. Un solo componente de alto rendimiento basta para
poder proporcionar el ndice de confiabilidad requerido por el estndar de seguridad
intrnseca.

Un supuesto de falla se reproduce en la figura 1.13.

Figura 1.13. Reproduccin de una falla
Se puede apreciar que la corriente de falla circula por el primario de los transformadores
por lo que no hace falta una puesta a tierra exigente como para las barreras zener.
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
22
Unidad base
Ranura para
mdulos de
entradas /salidas
Mdulos
procesadores
(CPU)
Mdulos de
alimentacin
redundante
Conectores
redundantes
para red V-Net
1.12.5 Estructura del hardware
1.12.5.1 Seguridad y Disponibilidad
La configuracin simple de un lazo de seguridad consiste en un mdulo de entrada, un
mdulo CPU y un mdulo de salida, usados por la aplicacin y cumpliendo los requisitos de
SIL3.
Para incrementar la disponibilidad, los mdulos de CPU y/o los mdulos de E/S son
duplicados para obtener una configuracin redundante.
Cuando se detecta un fallo en un mdulo de la configuracin redundante, el otro mdulo toma
el control para continuar la operacin.

1.12.5.2 Hardware de la SCS
Componentes bsicos de la SCS:
Los componentes bsicos del hardware de la SCS son:
Unidad de Control de Seguridad Modelo: SSC10D -
o Mdulo CPU (Procesador)
o Mdulo Fuente de Alimentacin (Redundante)
o Mdulo de Comunicacin entre mdulo CPU y mdulo de E/S
(Redundante)
o Equipos para comunicacin V-Net (Redundante)

Figura 1.14. Unidad de control de seguridad/Nodo en un rack
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
23
Unidades en mm
Fusible de
seguridad de
tarjeta
Nodo - SNB10D -
o Mdulo Fuente de Alimentacin (Redundante)
o Mdulo Interface de ESB Bus Esclavo (Redundante)

Mdulos de E/S:
Existen los siguientes mdulos de E/S de seguridad utilizados en este sistema
de ProSafe-RS:
o Entradas Digitales (24 Vcc) Modelo: SDV144
ste mdulo es aislado, permite terminal o conector usado con
bornera de paso. Permite redundancia.

Figura 1.15. Tarjeta SDV144

En la Figura 1.16 vemos el esquema de conexionado de la tarjeta de
entradas digitales.

Figura 1.16. Tarjeta SDV144
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
24
o Bloque terminal de 16 entradas digitales - Modelo: TB-RS-DI16-
AKB-185847
Se usa este bloque de entradas digitales para poder recibir las seales
desde un contacto seco.
o Salidas Digitales (24 Vcc) 16 salidas - Modelo: SDV541
Mdulo aislado, admite terminal o conector usado con bornera de
rels SIL. Permite redundancia.
o Salidas Digitales (24 Vcc) 8 salidas - Modelo: SDV531
Mdulo aislado, admite terminal o conector usado con bornera de
rels SIL. Permite redundancia.
o Bloque terminal de 8 salidas digitales - Modelo: TB-RS-DO8-AKB-
185849
Se usa este bloque de salidas digitales para alimentar equipos que
necesitan un mayor consumo (electrovlvulas,), ya que este bloque
suministra ms corriente por canal que un bloque de 16 salidas
digitales.
o Bloque terminal de 16 salidas digitales - Modelo: TB-RS-DO16-
AKB-204061
Se usa este bloque de salidas digitales para alimentar el resto de
equipos.
o Entradas Analgicas (4-20 mA) - Modelo: SAI143
Mdulo aislado admite cartula tipo terminal. Permite Redundancia.
Hay que tener en cuenta que esta tarjeta debe configurarse antes de su
conexin mediante unos jumpers que encontramos en el lateral de la
misma como muestra la Figura 1.17. Dicha configuracin servir para
tener los canales de entradas analgicas en activa o en pasiva, es decir,
si se suministra alimentacin al transmisor por el mismo canal o bien
se alimenta por otros medios.

Figura 1.17. Situacin de los jumpers en la tarjeta y configuracin

Configuracin a 2 hilos o activa:
Configuracin a 4 hilos o pasiva:
Canales impares
Canales pares
Canales impares
Canales pares
Vista lateral del mdulo o tarjeta SAI143
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
25

o MotherBoard de 16 entradas analgicas - Modelo: MB-RS-AI16-KS-
185838
Se usa este motherboard para la colocacin de aisladores galvnicos
para las seales que necesitan seguridad intrnseca. Concretamente los
detectores de derrame.
o Bloque terminal de 16 entradas analgicas - Modelo: TB-RS-AI16-
KS-186102
Se usa este bloque terminal para la conexin de equipos de deteccin
de gas o fuego que por sus caractersticas no les hace falta la
colocacin de aisladores galvnicos.
1.12.5.3 Restricciones y precauciones tomadas para el montaje.
El nmero mximo de mdulos que pueden ser montados en un nodo (SNB10D) y en
el controlador de seguridad (SSC10D) es de ocho por unidad. Ese nmero est tambin
limitado por la capacidad de energa de cada mdulo.
Se debe consultar la Tabla 1.3 que aparece a continuacin para encontrar el valor
asignado al mdulo y asegurarse de que una de las ecuaciones que se expondrn a
continuacin se satisface.

Modelo tarjeta
Valor asignado A Valor asignado B
Simple
Dual-
Redundante
Simple
Dual-
Redundante
SAI143-H (2-line setting) 3 6 25 29
SAI143-H (4-line setting) 3 6 5 10
SAI533-H 3 6 12 23
SDV541 3 6 5 7
SAI143-S (2-line setting) 3 5 22 25
SAI143-S (4-line setting) 3 5 4 7
SAV144 3 5 2 4
SDV144 2 4 2 4
SDV531 2 4 2 4
Otras (*1) 5 10 0 0

*1: SEC401, SNT401, SNT501, ALR111, ALR121
Tabla 1.3. Capacidades de energa de las tarjetas
La ecuacin (1.1) es aplicable para los nodos de seguridad (SNB10D) cuando se trata
de una aplicacin normal como es el caso que nos ocupa:

(el valor B asignado a los mdulos de E/S) 100 (1.1)

La ecuacin (1.2) para el controlador de seguridad dual-redundante (SSC10D):

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
26
(el valor A asignado a los mdulos de E/S) + (el valor B asignado a los
mdulos de E/S) 97
y (1.2)
(el valor B asignado a los mdulos de E/S) 85

Veamos la configuracin llevada a cabo en la Figura1.18 con los valores de cada
mdulo segn la tabla.

D
o
m
i
n
i
o

S
C
S

N
O
D
O

S
L
O
T
1

S
L
O
T
2

S
L
O
T
3

S
L
O
T
4

S
L
O
T
5

S
L
O
T
6

S
L
O
T
7

S
L
O
T
8

C
P
U

o

M
o
d
u
l
o

E
S
B

C
P
U

o

M
o
d
u
l
o

E
S
B

F
u
e
n
t
e
s

A
l
i
m
e
n
t
a
c
i
n

F
u
e
n
t
e
s

A
l
i
m
e
n
t
a
c
i
n

F
A
C
T
O
R

SSC10D-25.1 01 25 01
S
A
I
1
4
3
H
-
0
3

S
A
I
1
4
3
H
-
0
3
R

S
A
I
1
4
3
H
-
0
3

S
A
I
1
4
3
H
-
0
3
R

S
D
V
1
4
4

S
D
V
1
4
4
-
R

S
E
C
4
0
1

S
E
C
4
0
1
-
R

S
B
4
0
1

S
B
4
0
1

P
W
4
8
1

P
W
4
8
1

Valor A 6 6 4 10 Total A 26
Valor B 10 10 4 0 Total B 24

SNB10D-25.2 01 25 02
S
A
I
1
4
3
H
-
0
3

S
A
I
1
4
3
H
-
0
3
R

S
D
V
1
4
4

S
D
V
1
4
4
-
R

S
D
V
5
3
1

S
D
V
5
3
1
-
R

S
D
V
5
4
1

S
D
V
5
4
1
-
R

S
B
4
0
1

S
B
4
0
1

P
W
4
8
1

P
W
4
8
1


SNB10D-25.3 01 25 03
S
A
I
1
4
3
H
-
0
3

S
A
I
1
4
3
H
-
0
3
R

S
D
V
1
4
4

S
D
V
1
4
4
-
R

S
D
V
5
3
1

S
D
V
5
3
1
-
R

S
D
V
5
4
1

S
D
V
5
4
1
-
R

S
B
4
0
1

S
B
4
0
1

P
W
4
8
1

P
W
4
8
1


SNB10D-25.4 01 25 04
S
A
I
1
4
3
H
-
0
3

S
A
I
1
4
3
H
-
0
3
R

S
D
V
5
4
1

S
D
V
5
4
1
-
R

V
A
C
O

V
A
C
O

V
A
C
O

V
A
C
O

S
B
4
0
1

S
B
4
0
1

P
W
4
8
1

P
W
4
8
1

Valor B 29 7 0 0 0 0 Total B 36
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
27

SNB10D-25.5 01 25 05
S
A
I
1
4
3
H
-
0
3

S
A
I
1
4
3
H
-
0
3
R

V
A
C
O

V
A
C
O

V
A
C
O

V
A
C
O

V
A
C
O

V
A
C
O

S
B
4
0
1

S
B
4
0
1

P
W
4
8
1

P
W
4
8
1

Valor B 29 0 0 0 0 0 0 Total B 29

Figura 1.18. Disposicin de los mdulos en el sistema

Tras disponer los mdulos virtualmente en los racks veamos si se cumplen las
Ecuaciones1.1 y 1.2 a continuacin, usando los valores correspondientes:

Controlador 25.1 Valor A+B 6+10+6+10+4+4+10+0 =50 97
Valor B 10+10+4+0 =24 85
Nodo 25.2 Valor B 10+4+4+7 =25 100
Nodo 25.3 Valor B 10+4+4+7 =25 100
Nodo 25.4 Valor B 29+7 =36 100
Nodo 25.5 Valor B 29 =29 100

Efectivamente se cumplen todos los casos, es decir, se podr montar el hardware de
la forma estudiada sin que tengamos problemas de falta de alimentacin en los mdulos,
errores en la comunicacin interna de los buses ni sobrecarga en el tiempo de scan del
sistema.
1.12.5.4 Requisitos Ambientales:
Se tiene que consultar el ProSafe-RS Installation Guidance (TI 32S01J 10-01E) para
los detalles de las condiciones ambientales del ProSafe-RS y la conexin con dispositivos
externos. (1st Edition: Mar.25, 2005-00).
Los siguientes valores han sido extrados de dicho documento:
Temperatura ambiental de operacin: -20 a +50 C
Humedad relativa: 5 a 95 % (no condensable)
Polvo: <0.3 mg/m3
1.12.5.5 Deteccin de Fallo y Reaccin
Comportamiento bsico:
Los mdulos de la CPU y los mdulos de E/S son diagnosticados por el
hardware y el software peridicamente. Los errores en la comunicacin entre el
mdulo de la CPU y los mdulos de E/S y en la comunicacin de Inter-SCS se
pueden detectar por varias medidas.
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
28
Cuando se detecta un error, el valor de seguridad se utiliza para el valor de
salida y se genera un mensaje informativo de diagnstico. El mensaje informativo de
diagnstico es til para identificar el detalle y la causa del error.
En la configuracin redundante, el otro mdulo que est funcionando toma
normalmente el control para continuar la operacin. El mensaje informativo de
diagnstico que se genera al mismo tiempo ayuda a identificar la localizacin de
error.
El usuario puede definir el comportamiento del sistema cuando se detecta un
fallo en un mdulo de E/S. La seccin siguiente describe los detalles.

Diagnsticos y Reaccin:
Esta seccin explica la deteccin de avera y la reaccin del sistema en la
configuracin simple. En la configuracin redundante, el otro mdulo que est
funcionando toma normalmente el control para continuar la operacin.
Mdulo de CPU
Los componentes principales en el mdulo de CPU estn duplicados, y sus
resultados de operacin se comparan siempre entre los dos de cada par. Esto
permite detectar una avera en un tiempo muy corto. La deteccin de un fallo
causa una parada del mdulo de CPU. Por consiguiente, el mdulo de salida
detecta un paro de la comunicacin del mdulo de CPU y da como salida el valor
de seguridad predefinido para cada canal.
Mdulo de Entrada
Las pruebas de diagnstico de los mdulos de entrada se realizan por el
firmware peridicamente. Cuando una de las averas siguientes se detecta, el
estado del canal de entrada pasa a errneo y el valor predefinido (valor de entrada
en caso de fallo) se transfiere a la aplicacin lgica. Por lo tanto, un fallo en un
mdulo de entrada, tal como en una peticin (cambio en un valor de entrada),
puede ser manejado por la aplicacin lgica.
o Fallo en la parte comn de un mdulo de entrada
o Fallo en un canal de entrada
o Fallo en la comunicacin entre un mdulo de entrada y un mdulo de CPU

Mdulo de Salida
Las pruebas de diagnstico de los mdulos de salida se realizan por el
firmware peridicamente. Cuando una de las averas siguientes se detecta, todos
los canales de salida pasan a OFF (0) forzosamente.
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
29
o Fallo en la parte comn de un mdulo de salida
o Clavado a uno, el caso donde la salida no puede ser pasada a OFF
En el caso de un fallo en la comunicacin entre un mdulo de salida y un
mdulo de CPU o los fallos con excepcin de los anteriores, saldr el valor de
seguridad para cada canal.
Diagnosis del cableado del campo
La funcin de diagnstico se proporciona para detectar una rotura y un
cortocircuito en el cableado entre los dispositivos del campo y los mdulos de
E/S. El comportamiento despus de la deteccin de un fallo es igual que el caso de
una fallo en un canal de un mdulo digital de E/S.
Para este diagnstico con un mdulo de entradas digitales (ED), en campo
conectaremos el adaptador de diagnstico dedicado con el cableado cerca del
dispositivo del campo.
Dicha conexin se realizar de la forma indicada en la Figura 1.19.

Figura 1.19. Conexionado para la deteccin de circuitos abiertos i cortocircuitos.

1.12.6 Sincronizacin del Sistema
1.12.6.1 TIEMPO DE REACCIN DEL SISTEMA
El tiempo de reaccin de la SCS incluye el tiempo de reaccin para la
peticin externa y el tiempo de reaccin cuando se detecta un fallo en la SCS. El
tiempo de reaccin del sistema estar, en principio, dentro del doble de un perodo
de Scan (Ver Figura 1.20). Sin embargo, el tiempo de reaccin del sistema para
los casos siguientes es diferente. Para ms detalles, se ha de ver la gua de
ingeniera de ProSafe-RS (IM 32S01C10-01E).
Es detectado un fallo en la comunicacin entre el mdulo de CPU y los
mdulos de E/S
La ocurrencia de una rotura o de un cortocircuito en el cableado del
dispositivo conectado con el mdulo de entradas/salidas digitales.
Se detecta un fallo en la comunicacin de seguridad de inter-SCS (No
aplicable para el proyecto que nos ocupa)
Interruptor del instrumento de
campo
SDV144: Mdulo de entradas
digitales de 16 canales
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
30

Figura 1.20. Secuencia de Scan.
1. Entrada datos de proceso y autodiagnstico: Lectura de datos de
proceso de los mdulos de entrada y generacin de valores y estados
de variables. Guardado de los datos generados en las variables de
entrada.
2. Recepcin de datos de otras SCS: Recepcin de datos de otras SCSs a
la SCS local y guardado en sus variables.
3. Ejecucin de la lgica: Ejecucin de la lgica de FBD y LD.
4. Transmisin datos a otras SCS: Ejecucin de los datos de transmisin a
otras SCSs.
5. Salidas datos de proceso y autodiagnstico: Lectura de los ajustes de
los datos de variables de salida y escritura a los mdulos de salida.
Ejecucin de autodiagnstico.
El tiempo entre ciclos de Scan se destina a la comunicacin con SENG.

1.12.6.2 TIEMPO DE SEGURIDAD DE PROCESO
El tiempo de seguridad de proceso, que depende de cada proceso, es el
perodo desde la ocurrencia de un fallo en el proceso hasta que el proceso entra en
un estado peligroso. El sistema de seguridad necesita pasar el proceso a un estado
seguro dentro del tiempo de seguridad de proceso despus de que ocurra la
peticin externa.
El tiempo de reaccin del sistema de seguridad, que es el total del tiempo
de reaccin del sensor, del actuador, y del controlador de seguridad, necesita ser
ms corto que el tiempo seguridad de proceso. Considerar el tiempo de reaccin
de la SCS como el tiempo de reaccin del regulador de seguridad.
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
31
1.12.7 Disponibilidad del Sistema
Para las cifras de fiabilidad y seguridad del sistema FGS la disponibilidad
ser por lo menos 99.99 % donde un fallo se define como evento que cause un
falso paro de la planta.
Las cifras de la disponibilidad de sistema para el sistema FGS se basan en
un tiempo medio de reparacin de 8 horas.
Usando la siguiente herramienta de clculo (facilitada por Yokogawa), se
puede estimar el MTBF, obteniendo un valor de 1852,2 aos.

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
32
1.13 Software de ingeniera
1.13.1 Introduccin al Workbench
Workbench es el ambiente en el cual se configuran y desarrollan las aplicaciones
lgicas que residirn en la Estacin de Control de la Seguridad SCS ProSafe-RS. El
proceso de desarrollo consiste en crear un proyecto hecho de una configuracin que
representa una SCS. La configuracin de la misma puede ser programada usando
Diagramas de Bloques de Funciones FBD y Diagramas de Escalera LD.
Se pueden desarrollar proyectos de SCS en el Workbecnh y los lenguajes de edicin.
El Workbench representa y organiza grficamente la configuracin, recursos, POUs y las
redes de un proyecto SCS desde cinco vistas:
Arquitectura de vnculos
Arquitectura de Hardware
Diccionario.
Cableado E/S
Enlaces
Las Libreras creadas para un proyecto permiten definir funciones y bloques de
funciones que se pueden reutilizar en otros proyectos SCS.
1.13.2 Estructura de un proyecto en Workbench
Este captulo explica la estructura de las carpetas y archivos, utilizados en el sistema
visto desde Workbench.
Un proyecto est compuesto de configuraciones. Una configuracin es una
plataforma de hardware compuesta de uno o ms recursos. Un recurso representa un
objetivo de ncleo. Un recurso est dividido en varias unidades programadas llamadas
POUs (Unidad de Organizacin de Programa).
Las POUs de un recurso estn vinculadas junto a una arquitectura de rbol. Las POU
pueden ser descritas usando lenguajes de FBD o LD. Las POU pueden ser programas,
funciones o bloques de funciones.
1.13.2.1 Localizacin del proyecto
Los datos de un proyecto se guardan en una carpeta de proyecto, cuya ubicacin se
tiene que indicar durante la creacin inicial del proyecto. Si no se hace as, el proyecto se
crea por defecto la carpeta: C:\ RS-PROJ ECTS\ MYRSPJ T.
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
33
1.13.2.2 CREACIN DE UN NUEVO PROYECTO
Para crear un nuevo proyecto se debe iniciar la aplicacin Workbench accediendo a
[Inicio / Programas / YOKOGAWA ProSafe / Workbench] en el icono Workbench. Una
vez iniciada la aplicacin, en la pestaa FILE se selecciona la opcin [ New Project
/Library ].

Figura 1.21. Captura de pantalla de la creacin del proyecto

En el campo Name se introduce el nombre de la SCS con la siguiente nomenclatura
[SCS_Dominio_nmero de SCS]. En el campo Comment se introduce algn comentario
respecto al proyecto. En este caso se introduce el nombre del sistema programado. En
Destination Folder, definimos la ubicacin donde se crear el proyecto.
Despus de esto aparece una nueva ventana donde se realiza la configuracin general
del proyecto. En esta ventana se selecciona el tipo de estacin y se asigna el dominio y el
nmero de estacin entre otras opciones (Figura 1.22).
Una vez llevada a cabo la configuracin inicial, en la ventana principal de
Workbench se habilitan todas las herramientas para desarrollar los proyectos.

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
34

Figura 1.22. Propiedades del proyecto

1.13.2.3 HARDWARE ARCHITECTURE VIEW
Esta herramienta muestra grficamente las configuraciones de un proyecto y los
vnculos de red entre otros SCS. Desde esta aplicacin se pueden manejar varios aspectos
de un proyecto:
Creando configuraciones.
Aadir campos para configuraciones.
Insertar recursos.
Mover recursos entre configuraciones.
Crear redes.
Conectar configuraciones y redes.
Definir la configuracin y las propiedades de conexin.
Definir las propiedades de la red de los recursos.
Configuracin de cableado de E/S.
1.13.2.4 CONFIGURACIN DE LAS PROPIEDADES
La configuracin de las propiedades del proyecto se define desde la vista Hardware
Architecture. Se deben especificar dos propiedades para cada configuracin en el proyecto.

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
35
Para acceder a la ventana de las propiedades de la configuracin se debe seleccionar
en el men Edit, la opcin Properties. Ahora, dentro de la seccin General se introduce el
nombre de la configuracin del SCS en el campo Name, y la descripcin del proyecto en el
campo Comment.

Figura 1.23. Propiedades de la configuracin

1.13.2.5 CONFIGURACIN DE REDES
Las redes proveen los medios para la comunicacin entre configuraciones. Las
configuraciones necesitan comunicarse cuando los enlaces han sido definidos entre s y se
conectan a la red. El blanco atacado a la configuracin debe soportar la red a la que est
conectada la configuracin. Se deben definir las propiedades de la red cuando son creadas.
Las redes estn representadas en Hardware Architecture View como una barra
horizontal (Figura 1.24)

Figura 1.24. Network

No hay un lmite para el nmero de redes en un proyecto. La red creada por defecto
es ETCP.

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
36
1.13.2.6 LINK ARCHITECTURE VIEW
Habiendo realizado la configuracin general del proyecto se proceden a asignar los
nombres correspondientes del proyecto a las arquitecturas de vnculos y de hardware. En la
ventana principal se selecciona la opcin Link Architecture, presionando el botn sealado
en la Figura 1.25. La vista Link Architecture muestra grficamente los recursos del
proyecto y los recursos de los vnculos de informacin entre ellos. Esta es la vista por
defecto de Workbench, proveyendo un punto de acceso principal a todos los editores. En
Link Architecture se pueden manejar varias funciones de un proyecto como son:
Creacin de Recursos.
Definicin de grupos de variables.
Creacin y manipulacin de POUs.
Configuracin de E/S.

Figura 1.25. Vista del modo Link architecture

Cada recurso se muestra como una ventana separada de la vista Link Architecture. El
espacio de trabajo de esta ventana muestra un men para acceder a la configuracin de los
componentes de cada recurso.
Estos componentes son:
Parmetros: contiene los elementos I/O Wiring y Defined Words.
Grupos de variables
Programas
Funciones
Bloques de funciones
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
37
En el espacio de trabajo se da un click con el botn derecho del ratn y se
selecciona la opcin Properties, la cual va a mostrar un desplegado de las propiedades del
recurso donde se van a configurar otras propiedades del proyecto. En la seccin General se
introduce el nombre de la SCS y la descripcin del proyecto como se muestra en la figura
anterior.

1.13.2.7 DECLARACIN DE ELEMENTOS EN LA BASE DE DATOS DEL
SISTEMA
Para aadir elementos a la base de datos de un proyecto se accede a la herramienta
Dictionary desde la barra de herramientas principal de Workbench como se indica en las
Figura 1.26. Es una herramienta de edicin utilizada para la declaracin de variables,
funciones y bloques de funciones, tipos de usuario y palabras definidas del proyecto.
Los componentes estn divididos en cuatro tipos:
Variables Tree. Se declaran las variables globales y generales.
Parameters Tree. Se declaran las funciones y los bloques de funciones.
Types Tree. Se visualizan el nivel de las estructuras y las estructuras
individualmente.
Defined Words Tree. Se definen constantes.

1.13.2.8 DECLARACIN DE VARIABLES E/S EN EL DICCIONARIO
Para declarar las variables E/S se accede a la seccin Variables Tree. Las variables se
definen en All Variables. Hay dos modos para definir las variables.
En el primer modo Grid Editing Mode se ingresan los parmetros en cada uno de los
campos que se encuentran en la fila donde se declara la variable. En estos campos se
definen los parmetros para cada variable dando doble click sobre el campo y
seleccionando la opcin deseada. Para este modo de visualizacin se presiona el botn que
se encuentra del lado superior derecho tal como se muestra en la Figura 1.26.
En el otro modo de visualizacin Line Editing Mode, la insercin de parmetros se
hace dando doble click sobre la fila correspondiente a una variable que hace surgir una
ventana que contiene todos los campos de parmetros para asignar.
Las variables pueden ser:
Locales, que son nicas para un programa y pueden usarse con el mismo
nombre en otros programas refirindose a otra variable.
Globales son unicas.
Seales IO, para entradas y salidas fsicas al sistema.
Los nombres de las variables han de satisfacer las siguientes reglas:
1. Los nombres no pueden superar los 16 caracteres.
2. El primer carcter tiene que ser una letra (o _ underscore)
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
38
3. Los siguientes caracteres pueden ser letras, dgitos o caracteres underscore.
4. Las variables globales no pueden estar duplicadas dentro del mismo proyecto.
5. Los nombres de las variables globales:
a. No pueden ser duplicadas dentro de un POU.
b. No pueden tener el mismo nombre que una variable global.

Figura 1.26. Modo Grid editing mode (izquierda) y Line editing mode (derecha)

1.13.2.9 ASIGNACIN DE LAS SEALES A LOS DISPOSITIVOS
Para asignar las seales a las tarjetas E/S, se tiene que acceder desde Link
Architecture View al gestor I/O Wiring View seleccionando el elemento I/O Wiring el cual
se encuentra bajo Parameters, o desde la barra de herramientas.
Para realizar la asignacin de seales se tienen que agregar los dispositivos E/S al
proyecto. Para agregar dispositivos se debe dar click al botn Add Device. Va a surgir una
ventana emergente donde se selecciona el tipo de tarjeta y en Device Index se le da una
numeracin donde el primer nmero se refiere al nodo y el segundo nmero al slot. Por
ejemplo, la tarjeta 21 indica que la tarjeta se encuentra en el nodo 2, slot 1, como se
identifica en la Figura 1.28.
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
39
Despus se configuran los parmetros de la tarjeta, indicando el nodo y slot
asignados y declarando.si se encuentra en modo redundante, como se muestra en la Figura
1.27.

Figura 1.27. Parmetros de tarjeta

Una vez agregado y configurado el dispositivo se procede a enlazar los canales de los
mdulos de E/S con las variables correspondientes definidas en Dictionary View.

Figura 1.28. I/O Wiring view

Para enlazar las variables se debe desplegar el rbol de canales que contiene cada
dispositivo E/S, seleccionar el canal al que se le quiere asignar una variable y
posteriormente hacer doble click sobre la variable que queramos asignar, en la ventana
de la derecha. Es importante tener en cuenta que las variables deben estar previamente
declaradas en la librera Dictionary antes de asignarlas a los dispositivos correspondientes
y han de ser del tipo IO_BOOL o IO_REAL.

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
40
1.13.2.10 POU: UNIDAD DE ORGANIZACIN DE PROGRAMA
Una POU es un conjunto de instrucciones escritas en uno de los siguientes lenguajes:
FBD: Diagrama de Bloques de Funciones.
LD: Diagrama de Escalera.
Los cuales se describen ms adelante.
Los POUs se dividen en tres grupos principales:
Programas
Funciones
Bloques de Funciones
Se pueden mover o copiar programas escritos en lenguaje LD y FBD a la seccin de
funciones, a la seccin de Bloques de Funciones o a la de Programas. Cuando se mueve o
copia un programa a la seccin de Funciones o de Bloque de Funciones, todas las variables
locales definidas en el programa son convertidas a los parmetros de funcin o de bloques
de funcin respectivamente.

1.13.2.11 PROGRAMAS
Un programa es una unidad lgica programable que describe operaciones entre
variables del proceso. Los programas describen operaciones ya sean secuenciales o
cclicas. Los programas cclicos son ejecutados para cada ciclo del sistema de objetivo. La
ejecucin de programas secuenciales tiene un ambiente dinmico.
Los programas estn vinculados juntos en un rbol jerrquico. Los programas se
colocan en la punta de la jerarqua y se activan por el sistema. Un programa puede ser
descrito con cualquiera de los lenguajes FBD y LD y pueden ser combinados en un
diagrama.

1.13.2.12 FUNCIONES
Una funcin es una ejecucin de una accin manejada por un programa. La ejecucin
del programa se suspende hasta que la funcin termina. Cualquier programa de cualquier
seccin puede llamar una o ms funciones. Una funcin puede tener variables locales, pero
no mantendrn su estado en la siguiente ejecucin. Los lenguajes LD y FBD pueden usarse
para describir una funcin.

1.13.2.13 BLOQUES DE FUNCIONES
En los bloques de funciones pueden usar lenguajes LD y FBD. Cuando se llama a un
bloque de funciones en un programa, automticamente se llama la instancia del bloque: el
mismo cdigo es llamado pero la informacin utilizada es aquella que ha sido alojada para
la instancia. Los valores de las variables de la instancia se mantienen desde un ciclo al otro.
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
41
La interfase de un bloque de funciones debe ser explcitamente definida, con un tipo
y nombre nico para cada uno de sus parmetros de llamada (de entrada) o retorno (de
salida). Un bloque de funciones puede tener ms de un parmetro de salida.

1.13.2.14 EDITOR DE MLTIPLES LENGUAJES
El editor multi-lenguaje tiene funciones de edicin para lenguajes grficos y
textuales. Estas funciones de edicin son activadas automticamente cuando un programa
FBD o LD se abre desde el Workbench. El editor solo permite insertar nuevos elementos si
la posicin actual es vlida.
Desde el editor se pueden realizar varias tareas:
Desarrollar el cdigo del programa actual.
Imprimir programas.
Ejecutar el diccionario para insertar, eliminar o modificar nuevas variables,
parmetros y palabras definidas.
Es importante tener en cuenta que antes de crear nuevos programas se debe cerrar el
Diccionario y las variables que se van a utilizar deben estar previamente definidas.

1.13.2.15 LENGUAJE LD: DIAGRAMAS DE ESCALERA
LD es una representacin grfica de ecuaciones Booleanas, combinando entradas de
contacto (argumentos de entrada), con salidas de relevador (resultados de salida). El
lenguaje LD establece la descripcin de pruebas y modificaciones de datos booleanos
colocando smbolos grficos en la tabla de programa. Los smbolos grficos de LD estn
organizados dentro de la tabla exactamente como si estuvieran en un diagrama elctrico de
contactos.

1.13.2.16 LENGUAJE FBD: DIAGRAMA DE BLOQUES FUNCIONALES
El Diagrama de Bloques Funcionales es un lenguaje grfico. Permite al programador
construir procedimientos complejos tomando funciones existentes de libreras estndar o
de la seccin de funciones y de bloques de funciones.
Un diagrama FBD describe una funcin entre variables de entrada y de salida. Una
funcin se describe como un conjunto de bloques elementales. Las variables de entrada y
salida se conectan a los bloques por medio de lneas de conexin. Una salida de un bloque
puede ser conectada tambin a la entrada de otro bloque.
Una funcin entera operada por un programa FBD se construye con bloques
elementales estndar desde una librera estndar o desde la seccin de funciones y de
bloques de funciones. Cada bloque tiene un nmero de puntos de conexin de entrada y de
salida. Un bloque se representa por un rectngulo simple. Un bloque elemental realiza una
sola funcin entre sus entradas y sus salidas. El nombre de la funcin a realizar por el
bloque se escribe en un smbolo rectangular. Cada entrada o salida de un bloque tiene un
tipo bien definido.
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
42

1.13.2.17 LIBRERAS
Durante el desarrollo de nuevos proyectos, se crean varios estndares, como pueden
ser entradas tpicas, salidas tpicas o lgicas de seguridad. Las libreras son proyectos
especiales hechos de las configuraciones y recursos en los cuales se definen funciones y
bloques de funciones para reutilizarlos en los proyectos de ProSafe-RS. Una librera se
asemeja a un proyecto SCS normal, con la diferencia de que no hay conexiones fsicas a
hardware. La ventaja de utilizar libreras es que nicamente se necesita crearlas una vez y
se pueden utilizar varias veces.

1.13.2.18 DEPURACIN Y SIMULACIN
Cuando se ha creado un nuevo proyecto RS o se hace alguna modificacin, en todas
las situaciones se debe realizar una prueba antes de ejecutar en el sistema la nueva
aplicacin. Esta prueba se puede realizar en la SENG realizando una Prueba Virtual. El
otro tipo de prueba debe realizarse en el SCS o en una red de sistemas SCS, esta es la
Prueba Target. ProSafe contiene las herramientas para Depurar (Debug) y Simular
(Simulate).
Cuando se desarrolla una aplicacin, se puede escoger la depuracin para detectar y
remover errores de un proyecto, usando uno de dos mtodos:
Modo de simulacin: En este caso, las entradas y las salidas no son
manejadas por una mquina virtual de objetivo. El resto se ejecuta por una
plataforma estndar de Windows. Cada recurso se va a ejecutar por una
mquina virtual en el PC dnde se ejecuta el Workbench.
Modo en lnea: en este caso, cada recurso es ejecutado por una mquina
virtual en la plataforma real. Se requiere una operacin de descarga para
descargar el cdigo de cada recurso a su plataforma correspondiente.

1.13.2.19 VERSION CONTROL TOOL
El Prosafe RS tiene una utilidad para hacer copias de seguridad del proyecto.
Mediante el programa Version control tool, podemos realizar copias de seguridad del
proyecto, gestionar las versiones y restaurar alguna versin en caso de ser necesario.
Para iniciar el Version Control Tool, seleccionar desde el men de inicio, [Programas
/ YOKOGAWA ProSafe / Version Control Tool].
Antes de empezar a utilizar este programa hay que configurar los directorios donde
se van ha hacer los backups y el directorio del proyecto. Una vez configurado, solo hay que
seleccionar el proyecto del que se va ha hacer la copia de seguridad y pulsar el icono de
checkin.
Acto seguido aparecer una ventana emergente con campos editables. En el campo
Version, se pone la versin que queremos crear, en Engineer el usuario que ha creado la
versin y en Comment un comentario. Tambin se pueden poner comentarios en el campo
Note, pero no aparecen en la ventana principal del Version control tool.
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
43
Para restaurar un proyecto del que se ha hecho un backup, hay que pulsar el icono
checkout. El programa nos pedir la ubicacin donde queremos hacer la restauracin.

Figura 1.29. Version Control Tool

1.13.2.20 SOE VIEWER
El Prosafe RS dispone de una utilidad para guardar eventos llamada Sequence of
Events Recorder. Mediante este programa podemos ver los eventos ocurridos, muy til en
caso de paradas de la planta incontroladas o bien para detectar fallos en seales concretas
ocurridos tiempo atrs y siempre con una resolucin de milisegundos. No es necesario
preparar la Estacin de Ingeniera para que guarde peridicamente los eventos ya que estos
se almacenan en el SCS. El SCS puede almacenar hasta 65535 eventos. Tambin nos
permite filtrar los eventos para localizar ms rpidamente el causante de algn problema.
Cuando se configuran las entradas / salidas, se puede configurar si estas sern
registradas en el SOE Viewer.
Para iniciar el SOE Viewer, se debe seleccionar desde el men de inicio, [Programas
/ YOKOGAWA ProSafe / SOE Viewer]. Se abrir la ventana del programa, una vez
abierto, hay que pulsar el botn de Setup para configurar los recursos que gestionara el
SOE Viewer.
Una vez abierta una instancia del SOE Viewer podemos ver los datos recogidos por
la SCS pulsando en botn Query ( ) y se muestran de la forma que aparece en la Figura
1.30.

Figura 1.30. Aplicacin SOE Viewer
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
44
1.13.3 Seguridad para el acceso a la SCS
Esta seccin describe la seguridad para acceder a la SCS
1.13.3.1 NIVEL DE SEGURIDAD DE LA SCS
El nivel de la SCS indica cmo est de protegida la memoria del controlador de la
entrada de datos desde el exterior. Veamos una visin general del nivel de seguridad:
Una SCS tiene un nivel de seguridad
El nivel de seguridad se puede confirmar desde los LED en el mdulo de la
CPU y desde la ventana de SCS State Management en la barra de
herramientas de Maintenance Support Tool.
Se limitan los cambios hechos desde el exterior del controlador en funcin
del nivel de seguridad.
El nivel de seguridad puede ser cambiado cuando un usuario autorizado
escribe la clave a travs del SCS Manager.
Usando el bloque de sistema (SYS_SEC_CTL) se puede controlar el permiso
para cambiar el nivel de seguridad desde un interruptor externo o similar.
La Figura 1.31 ilustra la transicin de los estados en los niveles de seguridad.

*1 Est permitido restablecer el nivel de seguridad de Nivel 1 a Nivel 2 a travs de la RST de entrada en el
bloque SYS_SECURE, independientemente del nivel de seguridad habilitado/deshabilitado del estado de
SYS_SEC_CTL
Figura 1.31. Transiciones en los niveles de seguridades
1.13.3.2 DEFINICIN DE CADA NIVEL DE SEGURIDAD
Hay dos clasificaciones de nivel; nivel online y nivel offline.
El nivel Online se usa cuando la SCS est en operacin normal.
El nivel Offline se usa cuando la SCS no est en operacin normal.
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
45
1.13.3.3 NIVEL ONLINE
El nivel Online es un nivel de seguridad para ser usado en condiciones de operacin
normal. El nivel Online se divide en dos niveles de acuerdo con los lmites de las funciones
que pueden ser utilizados.

Nivel Descripcin
Nivel 2 El nivel de seguridad ms alto. La SCS debe operar a este nivel
normalmente.
Nivel 1 Nivel de seguridad temporal usado por los ingenieros o personal de
mantenimiento del sistema autorizado o para cambios en los programas
en online.
Tabla 1.4. Definiciones
1.13.3.4 NIVEL OFFLINE
El nivel Offline es un nivel de seguridad usado cuando hay alguna operacin
anmala en la SCS. Se muestra como Level 0 en la ventana de Status Display de la SCS
y en la SENG. En el nivel Offline, la SCS no limita el acceso de datos desde el exterior.
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
46
1.13.4 Bloques creados para el sistema
Para el tratamiento de las entradas analgicas, se han creado diferentes bloques
dependiendo del instrumento y de su aplicacin, con lo cual tenemos los siguientes bloques
para las seales analgicas, DET_DERRAME (entrada analgica con alarma de baja),
DET_LLAMA (entrada analgica con alarma de alta), DET_GAS (entrada analgica con
alarma de alta), S_DI_NA (entrada digital con supervisin de lnea, se considera analgica
por el tratamiento de la supervisin de lnea, da alarma cuando se cierra el circuito),
S_DI_NC ( dem al S_DI_NA pero da alarma al abrirse el circuito).
Para las entradas digitales que provocan alarma usaremos los bloques DI_BP
(entrada digital con posibilidad de bypass), DI (entrada digital sin bypass). Los argumentos
generales son los de la Tabla 1.5.
IN/OUT Argumentos Tipo de dato Descripcin
IN
IN REAL Valor de entrada (0 a 100%)
STAT BOOL Valor de status de la seal de entrada
SH REAL Lmite de escala superior (valor de ingeniera)
SL REAL Lmite de escala inferior (valor de ingeniera)
AHH REAL Punto de paro por alarma de alta (valor de ingeniera)
AH REAL Punto de prealarma de alta (valor de ingeniera)
AL REAL Punto de prealarma de baja (valor de ingeniera)
CALH REAL Constante para el valor mximo de la calibracin.
CALL REAL Constante para el valor mnimo de la calibracin.
DB, HYS REAL Histresis (HYS 0; 0% -100%). Si HYS <0, equivale a
HYS =0.
TAG STRING Cadena de texto de hasta 32 single-byte o 16 double-byte
caracteres especificados para el registro de la alarma de la
seal en cuestin en el SOER
CMNT STRING Cadena de texto con los caracteres que aparecern
encadenados al STRING TAG para comentar el disparo en
cuestin.
BP BOOL Permisivo de override o bypass.
OZP BOOL Orden de zona en pruebas.
OUT
IOP BOOL Indicador de circuito abierto o cortocircuito
TRUE: No ocurrido FALSE: Ocurrido
OUT REAL Valor de salida (valor despus del escalado)
ALM BOOL Seal de alarma
ENHH BOOL Indicador de alarma de alta
ENH BOOL Indicador de prealarma de alta
ENCL BOOL Indicador de alarma de baja
AVER BOOL Indicador de fallo de linea
BPC BOOL Indicador de bypass activo
TRUE: Activo FALSE: No activo
ENCA BOOL Confirmacin de detector en calibracin.
CINH BOOL Confirmacin de inhibicin de detector.
CZP BOOL Confirmacin de zona en pruebas.
MNT BOOL Indicacin de detector en mantenimiento.

Tabla 1.5. Tabla de argumentos para bloques
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
47

Tambin se usan bloques para uso generales como pueden ser B2D5 (Bloque para
detectar dos alarmas de cinco seales de entrada), AUT_MAN (Para poner en automtico o
manual la zona en pruebas), VALV_ALARM (Bloque especifico para activar las vlvulas
del sistema de diluvio).
Estos bloques se programan internamente con lenguaje de bloques y siguiendo las
restricciones que impone un sistema de seguridad, en lo referente a comunicaciones
seguras con otros sistemas y el uso de bloques lgicos sencillos calificados como seguros.
Veamos cmo estn configurados cada uno de ellos en los siguientes apartados.
Antes de conocer cmo se hace el tratamiento de las seales analgicas, es
importante conocer el funcionamiento del bloque ANLG que est insertado dentro de stas
lgicas, que hace el escalado del valor de entrada (IN) y calcula el valor de salida (OUT).
ste compara dicho valor de salida con cuatro tipos de valores de disparo (HH, PH, PL y
LL) y los estados de las alarmas de salida (HTRP, HHH, LLL o LTRP). Notar que el
evento que debe registrarse en el SOE no lo registra el ANLG ya que en la misma lgica se
usan los elementos especficos SOE_B.
Cuando una seal de entrada analgica se captura en una variable de entrada, los
datos se normalizan de 0.0 a 100.0 %. El ANLG escala stos datos segn los valores scale
high limit (SH) y scale low limit (SL) dados por el programador. El clculo de la salida
(OUT) se aprecia en la ecuacin (1.3)

(1.3)

Si el valor de salida (OUT) es mayor que el valor de HH, la salida del bloque ANLG
pasa a TRUE para que ocurra un estado de disparo en HTRP. Si el valor de salida (OUT)
es menor que el valor de LL, la salida del bloque ANLG pasa a TRUE para que ocurra un
estado de disparo en LTRP.
Si el valor de salida baja del valor de HH menos la histresis (HYS) la salida de
HTRP pasa a FALSE. Si la salida sube del valor de LL ms la histresis (HYS) la salida
pasa a FALSE.

SL
SL SH IN
OUT +

=
0 . 100
) (
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
48
Esta funcionalidad se representa en la Figura 1.32.

Figura 1.32. Relacin entre OUT i la comprobacin del nivel de Trip
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
49
1.13.4.1 Bloque DET_GAS para entrada analgica con alarma de alta
Este bloque mostrado en las Figuras 1.33 y 1.34 genera la alarma de alta ENHH, se
utiliza para el tratamiento de la seal enviada por el detector de gas. La seal del detector
entra en el bloque por IN, SH es el valor mximo de la seal (100%), SL el valor mnimo
de la seal (0%), AHH es la consigna de alarma (60%), AH es la consigna de prealarma
(20%).Adems registra en el SOE la seal de disparo tambin se incluye la de IOP, que
proviene de la variable STATUS y refleja el estado de la seal instanciada al bloque, todo
ello gracias a los elementos SOE_B. La seal de IOP es mantenida a TRUE mientras el
contacto est operativo (sin cortocircuitar ni en circuito abierto), y cae a FALSE en caso
contrario generando alarma.

Figura 1.33. Instancia del bloque DET_GAS

La variable OZP acta de forma que cuando su estado pasa a ser TRUE, pone en
zona en pruebas el detector, ya que en ese momento prevalece ante una seal posible de
disparo proveniente (FALSE) del bloque ANLG.
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
50

Figura 1.34. Lgica del bloque DET_GAS

Las variables CALH y CALL son puntos de consigna en los que si la seal que
proviene del detector est entre esos valores se considera que el detector se encuentra en el
modo de calibracin.
La salida CINH sirve para poner al detector en inhibicin, esto se utiliza por ejemplo
si el detector est averiado para que la seal que proviene del detector no influya en el
sistema.

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
51
1.13.4.2 Bloque DET_LLAMA para entrada analgica con alarma de alta
Este bloque mostrado en las Figuras 1.35 y 1.36 genera la alarma de alta AH, se
utiliza para el tratamiento de la seal enviada por el detector de llama. La seal del detector
entra en el bloque por IN, SH es el valor mximo de la seal (100%), SL el valor mnimo
de la seal (0%), AH es la consigna de alarma (75%). Adems registra en el SOE la seal
de disparo tambin se incluye la de IOP, que proviene de la variable STATUS y refleja el
estado de la seal instanciada al bloque, todo ello gracias a los elementos SOE_B. La seal
de IOP es mantenida a TRUE mientras el contacto est operativo (sin cortocircuitar ni en
circuito abierto), y cae a FALSE en caso contrario generando alarma.

Figura 1.35. Instancia del bloque DET_LLAMA


MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
52

Figura 1.36. Lgica del bloque DET_LLAMA

Las variables MANH y MANL son puntos de consigna en los que si la seal que
proviene del detector est entre esos valores se considera que el detector se encuentra en el
modo de mantenimiento.
sistema.

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
53
1.13.4.3 Bloque DET_DERRAME para entrada analgica con alarma de baja
Este bloque mostrado en las Figuras 1.37 y 1.38 genera la alarma de baja ENCL, se
utiliza para el tratamiento de la seal enviada por el detector de derrame. La seal del
detector entra en el bloque por IN, SH es el valor mximo de la seal (100% (50C)), SL el
valor mnimo de la seal (0%(-200C), AL es la consigna de alarma (-50C). Adems
registra en el SOE la seal de disparo tambin se incluye la de IOP, que proviene de la
variable STATUS y refleja el estado de la seal instanciada al bloque, todo ello gracias a
los elementos SOE_B. La seal de IOP es mantenida a TRUE mientras el contacto est
operativo (sin cortocircuitar ni en circuito abierto), y cae a FALSE en caso contrario
generando alarma.

Figura 1.37. Instancia del bloque DET_DERRAME


MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
54

Figura 1.38. Lgica del bloque DET_DERRAME

sistema.
1.13.4.4 Bloques S_DI_NA/NC para entrada digital con supervisin de linea
El funcionamiento de los bloques de las figuras 1.39 y 1.40 sirven para detectar si un
contacto situado en campo ha sido accionado y mediante la supervisin de lnea se puede
detectar si el cable sufre alguna anomala. La anomala se detecta mediante los kits
SCB100 y SCB110 ver esquema de conexionado en la Figura 1.19.

Figura 1.39. Lgica del bloque S_DI_NA

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
55

Figura 1.40. Lgica del bloque S_DI_NC

1.13.4.5 Bloques DI_NSI_FGS para DI con fallo de Linea
Bloques generadores de la alarma de entrada digital DITR, utilizada para la lgica de
enclavamientos. Adems de registrar en el SOE la seal de disparo tambin se incluye la
de IOP, que proviene de la variable STATUS y refleja el estado de la seal instanciada al
bloque, todo ello gracias a los elementos SOE_B. La seal de IOP es mantenida a TRUE
mientras el contacto est operativo (sin cortocircuitar ni en circuito abierto), y cae a
FALSE en caso contrario, en ese momento provoca la alarma ESTH y el consecuente
disparo. Como el bloque anterior dispone de supervisin de lnea para verificar si el cable
sufre alguna anomala. La anomala se detecta mediante los kits SCB100 y SCB110 ver
esquema de conexionado en la Figura 1.19.

Figura 1.41. Instancia del bloque DI_NSI_FGS

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
56
1.13.4.6 Bloques DI_bp para entrada digital
Bloques generadores de la alarma de entrada digital DITR, utilizada para la lgica de
enclavamientos. Adems de registrar en el SOE la seal de disparo tambin se incluye la
de IOP, que proviene de la variable STATUS y refleja el estado de la seal instanciada al
bloque, todo ello gracias a los elementos SOE_B. La seal de IOP es mantenida a TRUE
mientras el contacto est operativo (sin cortocircuitar ni en circuito abierto), y cae a
FALSE en caso contrario, en ese momento provoca la alarma ALRM y el consecuente
disparo.
El bloque BP (OVR_B) cuando est activado pone la salida OUT el valor que
tenemos en la entrada VAL sin tener en cuenta la entrada.

Figura 1.42. Lgica del bloque DI_BP

1.13.4.7 Bloque b2D5, B2d10, b2d15, b2d21 para disparo por lgica 2 de X
El bloque 2 de 5 se usar para los casos donde tengamos 5 transmisores y no tenga
que ocurrir ninguna accin de disparo de planta hasta que 2 estn en alarma. Con este
bloque y en combinacin con las lgicas de los diferentes detectores, se consigue que slo
haya una accin cuando realmente existan 2 alarmas de proceso que provengan de
detectores operativos, es decir, no se tendrn en cuenta las alarmas provocadas por IOP y
tampoco se tendrn en cuenta los detectores que estn bypaseados. Por tanto la lgica 2 de
5 pasar a una lgica 1 de 4 si existe alguna de las anteriores situaciones y a una 1 de 1 si
existen 4 transmisores fuera de servicio, el siguiente estado (con 5 transmisores fuera de
servicio) provocar un disparo irremediable del Interlock asociado a este 2 de 5. El resto de
bloques funcionan exactamente igual.
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
57

Figura 1.43. Lgica simple del bloque B2D5

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
58
1.13.5 Operacin con el sistema de FGS

El sistema de control y supervisin de FGS, de la Planta de SAGGAS, es la
aplicacin que recoge toda la informacin que proviene de los distintos sensores
distribuidos por las distintas zonas de la planta, con el fin de obtener toda la informacin
necesaria para supervisar el estado y la seguridad de la instalacin.

La informacin recopilada es agrupada y presentada segn el origen de los datos que
se muestrean:
Informacin del estado general de la planta.
Informacin de cada zona particular y de los detectores y otros
elementos de la misma.
Alarmas.
Histricos de alarmas y eventos.

La organizacin de las pantallas grficas en el entorno distribuido es de la
siguiente forma
- Pantallas de:
o Sistema de Control Distribuido (DCS)
o Sistema Parada de Emergencia (ESD / SIS)
o Sistema Contra-Incendios (FGS)
Todas estas pantalla se visualizan a travs del Sistema de Control Distribuido (DCS).
A continuacin se describe la organizacin para el sistema Contra-Incendios ( o
Sistema FGS).
1.13.5.1 Descripcin del entrorno de las pantallas
En estas pantallas se distinguen tres zonas:
1. Parte superior, es donde est ubicada la barra de herramientas del DCS.
2. Parte central, es una planimetra de la zona, que incluye los detectores de esa
zona.
3. Parte inferior, donde estn ubicados los CUADROS RESUMEN de estados de
los tres tipos de detectores asociados a dichos cuadro y zona. Adems de los
botones de acciones

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
59

1.13.5.1.1 Pantalla general de Planta
Existe una pantalla principal o de vista general, la cual muestra la planta subdividida
en zonas.

Figura 1.44. Pantalla de vista general

Cada zona de la pantalla vista general, puede tomar cinco colores en funcin del
estado de sus equipos en esa zona:
Zona en color VERDE indica Estado Normal .
Zona en color NARANJ A indica Fallo en la Zona.
Zona en color AMARILLO indica Alarma en la Zona .
( por gas, derrame, etc.., solo 1 detector de la zona en alarma)
Zona en color ROJ O indica Riesgo en la Zona
( por gas, derrame, etc.., ms de 1 detector de la zona en alarma)
Zona en color AZUL indica Zona en Pruebas.

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
60
1.13.5.1.2 Pantalla de Zona
Mediante la seleccin correspondiente de la zona en la pantalla de vista general, se
accede directamente la pantalla correspondiente a esa zona.
Se presenta a continuacin, una pantalla de zona que se acceden desde la pantalla de
vista general y sus diferentes estados:

Figura 1.45. Zona normalizada

Figura 1.46. Zona en alarma y riego
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
61

Figura 1.47. Zona en pruebas
1.13.5.1.3 Cuadros Resumen

Como se ha dicho en el apartado anterior, en algunas pantalla en la parte inferior,
existen cuadros resumen para fuego, gas, derrame. Se comentan a continuacin:
- GAS (Detectores de gas):
Estado NORMAL.
Estado de ALARMA (algn detector con alarma alta o muy alta alarma gas).
Estado de RIESGO ZONA (dos o ms detectores con alarma muy alta de gas,
produciendo disparo de la planta).
Estado de FALLO (algn detector con fallo).

Para que se active el estado de RIESGO ZONA es necesario que dos o ms
detectores estn en alarma de alta concentracin de gas, y adems pertenezcan al mismo
grupo de activacin del riesgo.

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
62
El objeto que resume el estado de los detectores de gas es el siguiente

Figura 1.48. Resumen detectores de gas

El cdigo de colores es:
NORMAL Verde. ALARMA Amarillo.
RIESGO ZONA Rojo. FALLO Naranja.

- DERRAME (Detectores de derrame):
Estado NORMAL.
Estado de ALARMA (algn detector con alarma de temperatura).
Estado de RIESGO ZONA (dos o ms detectores con alarma de temperatura).
detectores estn en alarma de temperatura y adems pertenezcan al mismo grupo
o zona.
El objeto que resume el estado de los detectores de derrame es el siguiente:

Figura 1.49. Resumen detectores de derrame
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
63
- FUEGO (Detectores de calor, llama y pulsadores):
Estado NORMAL.
Estado de ALARMA (algn detector con alarma o actuado).
Estado de RIESGO ZONA (dos o ms detectores con alarma o actuados).

detectores estn en alarma y adems pertenezcan al mismo grupo.
El objeto que resume el estado de los detectores de fuego es el siguiente:

Figura 1.50. Resumen detectores fuego


MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
64
1.13.5.2 Acciones
En todas las pantallas de las zonas se pueden realizar acciones, estas vienen
determinadas por las caractersticas de cada zona. Por ejemplo, si cogemos la
zona 16_1 tenemos:

Figura 1.51. Pantalla detalle plataforma del tanque
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
65
1.13.5.2.1 Acciones disparo al sistema SIS
En la Figura 1.52. se observa un selector AUTO-MAN, DISP. MANUAL y
otro de CANC. MANUAL. Cuando el selector se encuentra en posicin
AUTO el disparo se ejecuta inmediatamente y el recuadro exterior se pone
color rojo. Cuando el selector se encuentra en posicin MANUAL el
Shutdown se ejecuta transcurridos 30. En caso de que el operador decida
Cancelar la accin de Shutdown deber activar el selector CANCELACION
antes de transcurridos los 30. Si se desea quitar la cancelacin manual y
queremos que no provoque disparo, hay que asegurarse que el cuadrado
exterior esta en color gris. Para activa o desactivar se pide confirmacin por
parte del operador, en todos los casos.

Figura 1.52. Cuadro de selectores
1.13.5.2.2 Acciones extincin de diluvio
En la figura 1.53 se observa un selector AUTO-MAN, DISP. MANUAL y otro de
CANC. MANUAL. Cuando el selector se encuentra en posicin AUTO el disparo se
ejecuta inmediatamente y el recuadro exterior se pone color rojo. Cuando el selector se
encuentra en posicin MANUAL el Shutdown se ejecuta transcurridos 30. En caso de
que el operador decida Cancelar la accin de Shutdown deber activar el selector
CANCELACION antes de transcurridos los 30. Si se desea quitar la cancelacin manual
y queremos que no provoque disparo, hay que asegurarse que el cuadrado exterior esta
en color gris.

Figura 1.53. Cuadro de selectores sistema diluvio

Recuadro exterior:
Rojo indica disparo.
Gris indica estado
norm
Recuadro exterior:
Rojo indica disparo.
Gris indica estado
normal.
Acceso a la pantalla
Vlvulas Diluvio
Proceso
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
66
1.13.5.2.3 Acciones XMCP (Lamparas )y sirena
En la figura 1.54 est situado el selector DISP. MANUAL y otro de CANC.
MANUAL. Cuando se activa el disparo manual la sirena y la lmpara se
activan simultneamente. La cancelacin manual solo cancela el sonido de la
sirena.

Figura 1.54. Cuadro de selectores de lmpara y sirena

1.13.5.2.4 Accin Zona en Pruebas
En la figura 1.55 se observa el selector ZONA EN PRUEBAS. Cuando se
activa todos los detectores y pulsadores de dicha zona se ponen el color azul.
Para desactivar al que hacer clic en el recuadro que pone desactivar.

Figura 1.55. Selector de zona en pruebas

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
67
1.13.5.3 Pantallas del sistema de extincin Diluvio.
Hay dos pantallas de sistemas de extincin diluvio para cada tanque, como
ejemplo usaremos las del tanque 20-T-01:

Figura 1.56. Sistema de extincin de diluvio del atraque y tanque

El funcionamiento de las vlvulas, presostatos es el mismo que el sistema de
extincin de espuma. Con un mismo pulsador del pupitre se pueden activar un
conjunto de vlvulas de una misma zona.
Figura 1.57. Sistema de activacin vlvulas de diluvio

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
68
1.13.5.4 Pantalla del sistema extincin polvo tanque
Hay una pantalls del sistema de extincin polvo para tanques, como ejemplo
usaremos las del tanque 20-T-01 :
Pantalla sistema extincin polvo tanque 20-T-01

Figura 1.58. Sistema extincin de polvo
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
69
1.13.5.5 Caraturas de los detectores
La representacin grfica de las cartulas de los detectores, usados en el
sistema de FGS, se compone principalmente de las siguientes reas:
rea de Visualizacin de comentario
rea que se encarga de visualizar el nombre y comentarios del detector, se
compone de:
Tag Name
Es donde se visualiza el tag asignado al detector.
Tag Comment
Donde se visualiza los comentarios asociados al detector, como puede ser la
zona o equipo.
rea de Visualizacin de Estado
rea destinada a la visualizacin de los estados posibles asociados al tipo de
detector. Esta rea se compone de:
Tag Mark
Donde se visualiza el estado del detector mediante el cdigo de colores
asociado al tipo de detector ( NR es verde, HH es rojo, etc).
El parpadeo del tag mark, sirve para indicar que el estado o alarma asociado al
color visualizado, no ha sido reconocida por el operador. Cuando se reconoce
la alarma o estado del detector, el tag mark se queda con el color de alarma o
estado FIJ O.
Estado de Fallo
Cuando se visualiza el texto IOP, indica que el detector tiene FALLO de lnea.
Estado de Alarma
Indica los posibles estados de alarma que posee el detector, como alarma de
alta, muy alta, etc. En estado normal se visualiza NR. Ver cdigos asociados al
tipo de detector

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
70
Estado de Calibracin
La visualizacin del texto CAL, indica que el detector esta en calibracin. Si el
detector no esta en calibracin, no se visualiza ningn tipo de texto.
Estado de Inhibicin
La visualizacin del texto INH, indica que el instrumento esta en inhibicin. Si
el detector no esta en inhibicin, no se visualiza ningn tipo de texto.
rea de Visualizacin de Parmetros
Nombre tem Dato
Indica el nombre del tem del dato que se visualiza. En los detectores con
entrada analgica, normalmente es la variable de proceso (PV).
Dato
Visualiza el dato asociado al nombre del tem del dato. Solo afecta a los
detectores con entrada analgica como los detectores de gas.
Unidades de Ingeniera
Visualiza las unidades de ingeniera asociada al dato y al dato tem.
rea de Visualizacin de Instrumento
Escalado del rango del instrumento
Representa la divisin del escalado para el rango del detector.
Barra indicadora de variable de proceso
Visualiza con una barra indicadora, el dato asociado a la variable de proceso
(PV), como puede ser el porcentaje de gas.
Barra indicadora de valores limite
Barra que representa los valores limites asociados al detector como alarma de
alta, alarma de muy alta, mediante cdigo de colores.
rea de Inhibicin del detector
Botn de inhibicin
Botn que se encarga de activar o desactivar la inhibicin del detector.
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
71

Indicacin de Orden y Confirmacin de la inhibicin del detector
Cuando en la parte izquierda se visualiza un rectngulo de color Cyan, indica que se
ha dado orden de inhibicin del detector.
Cuando en la parte derecha se visualiza un rectngulo de color Verde, indica que el
sistema de FGS ha recibido la inhibicin del detector.

rea de Visualizacin Sistema
Marca de operacin de sistema
La visualizacin del texto FGS en fondo granate, indica que la cartula pertenece
al sistema de FGS. Se utiliza este texto para diferenciar las cartulas del FGS
respecto a otros sistemas como las cartulas del DCS.
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
72
1.13.5.5.1 Detector de GAS (GSD)
SMBOLO

Figura 1.59. Smbolo del detector de gas

Cada vez que se hace clic sobre el smbolo aparecer una cartula con informacin
ms detallada del detector.

CDIGO DE COLORES
El cdigo de colores asociados a los detectores de gas, son los siguientes:
Estado Color
NORMAL VERDE
ALARMA ROJ O
PRE-ALARMA AMARILLO
AVERA o ERROR NARANJ A
PRUEBAS AZUL
INHIBIDO CYAN
CALIBRACION MAGENTA
FALLO COMUNICACIONES BLANCO

Tabla 1.6. Representacin de colores del detector de gas

Estos cdigos de colores tambin son usados en la cartula del detector en:

- Tag mark
- Barra indicadora de variable de proceso
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
73
Caratula

Figura 1.60. Representacin grafica de una caratula para un detector de gas
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
74
1.13.5.5.2 Detector de derrame (TSD)

SMBOLO

Figura 1.61. Smbolo del detector de derrame


CDIGO DE COLORES
El cdigo de colores asociados a este tipo de detector, son los siguientes:

Estado Color
NORMAL VERDE
ALARMA ROJ O
PRUEBAS AZUL
INHIBIDO CYAN

Tabla 1.7. Representacin de colores del detector de derrame


- Tag mark
- Barra indicadora de variable de proceso
MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
75
Caratula
Figura 1.62. Representacin grafica de una caratula para un detector de derrame

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
76
1.13.5.5.3 Detector de llama (FSD)
SMBOLO

Figura 1.63. Smbolo del detector de llama


CDIGO DE COLORES

Estado Color
NORMAL VERDE
ALARMA ROJ O
PRUEBAS AZUL
INHIBICION CYAN

Tabla 1.8. Representacin de colores del detector de llama

- Tag mark

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
77
Caratula

Figura 1.64. Representacin grafica de una caratula para un detector de llama

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
78

1.13.5.5.4 Pulsador de alarma (MCP)
SMBOLO

Figura 1.63. Smbolo del pulsador de alarma


CDIGO DE COLORES

Estado Color
NORMAL VERDE
ALARMA ROJ O
PRUEBAS AZUL
INHIBICION CYAN

Tabla 1.9. Representacin de colores del pulsador de emergencia


- Tag mark

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
79

Caratula

Figura 1.66. Representacin grafica de una caratula para un pulsador de emergencia

MEMORIA DESCRIPTIVA
80
1.13.5.6 Pantallas de alarmas de sistema, alarmas activas y sumario de alarmas
La gestin de este tipo de pantallas, es la misma que se describen en el manual del
sistema del DCS.


Memoria de clculo

MEMORIA DE CLCULO
2

3
Sistema de deteccin de fuego y gas para un tanque en un planta
regasificadora

MEMORIA DE CLCULO

Encargado por:
Poblacin: Tarragona
CP: 43002

Elaborado por:
Poblacin: Reus
CP: 43204

MEMORIA DE CLCULO
3

1 MEMORIA DE CLCULOS ................................................................................................... 4
1.1 INTRODUCCIN ........................................................................................................................ 4
1.2 CONFIGURACIN DE ENTRADAS/SALIDAS AL SISTEMA ........................................................ 4
1.2.1 ENTRADAS ANALGICAS ........................................................................................................ 4
1.2.2 ENTRADAS DIGITALES .......................................................................................................... 16
1.2.3 SALIDAS DIGITALES .............................................................................................................. 20
1.2.3.1 LIMITACIN EN LAS CONEXIONES DE SALIDAS DIGITALES ................................................ 25
1.3 LGICA IMPLEMENTADA ....................................................................................................... 27

MEMORIA DE CLCULO
4
1 Memoria de clculos
1.1 Introduccin
En los siguientes apartados se configuran todas las seales provinentes de campo al
sistema de fuego y gas (FGS). Para ello hay que tener en cuenta las distancias del cableado
de campo entre otros factores.
La lgica implementada para el control del sistema se detalla en este apartado.
1.2 Configuracin de Entradas/Salidas al sistema
A continuacin se detalla la configuracin para seales del sistema.
1.2.1 Entradas analgicas
Para las entradas analgicas se usa el mdulo SAI143, con 16 entradas de 4 a 20 mA
cada una. Para cada una de las entradas podemos configurar los siguientes parmetros:
Channel Number: A asignar en la declaracin de la variable.
Wiring Position: A asignar en la declaracin de la variable.
I/O Variable Name: Nombre que fijamos a la variable al declararla.
Direction: Escritura/Lectura
Comment: Comentario determinado por la ingeniera bsica
Input Processing at Fault: Decisin a tomar en caso de fallo de la seal
(mantener el valor antiguo o utilizar el valor determinado por [Input Value at
Fault]).
Input Value at Fault Valor a utilizar por una seal si sta falla.
Unit: Es la unidad de la seal de entrada y viene determinada por el tipo de
mdulo de entrada. (Slo sirve como informacin)
Detect IOP (High): Este tem especifica si se desea detectar IOP o no en la
parte alta de la seal
Detect IOP (Low): Este tem especifica si se desea detectar IOP o no en la
parte baja de la seal
Threshold of IOP (High) %: Este tem especifica el valor superior al que
deseamos detectar cortocircuito, por defecto est configurado al 112,5%.
Threshold of IOP (Low) %: Este tem especifica el valor inferior al que
deseamos detectar circuito abierto, por defecto est configurado al -6,3%.
Detect Transmitter Fault (High): Este tem especifica si se desea detectar
fallo de transmisor o no en la parte alta de la seal del mismo.
Detect Transmitter Fault (Low): Este tem especifica si se desea detectar fallo
de transmisor o no en la parte baja de la seal del mismo.
MEMORIA DE CLCULO
5
Signal Conversion: Segn la seal del transmisor se debe aplicar un mtodo
de conversin de seal, LINEAR o bien SQRT:
o LINEAR (Sin conversin o conversin lineal): El rango fsico viene
especificado por el Lmite Bajo y el Lmite Alto (mA o V) son
convertidos datos de 0 a 100 (%)
o SQRT: Se calcula la raz cuadrada i el resultado se convierte a un
valor de dato de 0 a 100 (%). La Figura 1.1 ilustra esta conversin.

Figura 1.1. SQRT
Las seales medidoras de caudal SRFST022A, SRFST022B,
SRFST024A y SRFST024B. Deben tener esta configuracin cuadrtica
ya que se tratan de medidores por vrtice.
Threshold of Transmitter Fault (High) %: Este tem especifica el valor
superior al que deseamos detectar fallo del transmisor por valor excesivo, por
defecto est configurado al 106,3%.
Threshold of Transmitter Fault (Low) %: Este tem especifica el valor
inferior al que deseamos detectar fallo del transmisor por valor demasiado
bajo, por defecto est configurado al -1,25%.
Field Power Diagnosis: Precisa el tipo de cableado para este tem. Se utiliza
para determinar el mtodo de diagnstico de alimentacin
de los mdulos de entrada. La corriente de los mdulos de entrada realiza un
auto-diagnstico de si la alimentacin se presenta correctamente en terreno
de acuerdo con esta configuracin. Este parmetro slo se activa para
entradas de corriente. Son posibles las siguientes opciones:
o Ninguno: no realizar el diagnstico de la fuente de alimentacin.
o 2-hilos (Por defecto: Diagnstico de la potencia que se suministra a
campo. El diagnstico se indica como normal si se suministra
corriente al dispositivo de campo.)
o 4-hilos (Diagnostica si no se suministra energa a campo. El
diagnstico se indica como normal, si no se suministra de energa a
los dispositivos de campo.)
P&ID tag name: Es un comentario que el usuario puede especificar con el fin
de hacer ms fcil extraer la informacin para identificar con el canal en un
dibujo P & ID. El comentario debe ser escrito utilizando hasta 16 caracteres
de un solo byte o 8 caracteres de doble byte. Este ajuste puede ser omitido.
MEMORIA DE CLCULO
6
Listado de entradas analgicas
SAI143 Configuracin de entradas Analgicas Nodo 1 Slot 1
Channel
Number
Wiring
Position
I/O Variable Name Direction Comment
1 %IU11.0 A63TSD49023 Input BOMBAS SECUNDARIAS
2 %IU11.1 A63TSD49024 Input BOMBAS SECUNDARIAS
3 %IU11.2 A63TSD50012 Input VAPORIZ. AGUA MAR
6 %IU11.5 A63TSD56001 Input TANQUE 21T04
10 %IU11.9 Input RESERVA

Channel
Number
Wiring
Position
1 %IU13.0 A63GSD44005 Input TANQUE 31Z02
4 %IU13.3 A63GSD49014 Input BOMBAS SECUNDARIAS
7 %IU13.6 A63GSD50008 Input VAPORIZ. AGUA MAR
12 %IU13.11 A63GSD56001 Input TANQUE 21T04

Channel
Number
Wiring
Position
1 %IU21.0 A63FSD56006 Input TANQUE 21T04
MEMORIA DE CLCULO
7


Channel
Number
Wiring
Position

Channel
Number
Wiring
Position
1 %IU41.0 A63MCP56002 Input TANQUE 21T04

MEMORIA DE CLCULO
8

Channel
Number
Wiring
Position
1 %IU51.0 A63PSLP5083 Input TECHO 21T04
2 %IU51.1 A63PSLP5084 Input TECHO 21T04
3 %IU51.2 A63PSLP5085 Input PLATAFORM. INF. 21T04
4 %IU51.3 A63TSH10013 Input 21PSV04027A/21T04
5 %IU51.4 A63TSH10014 Input 21PSV04027B/21T04
6 %IU51.5 A63TSH10015 Input 21PSV04027C/21T04
7 %IU51.6 A63TSH10016 Input 21PSV04027D/21T04
8 %IU51.7 A63PSL10013A Input 21PSV04027A/21T04
9 %IU51.8 A63PSL10013B Input 21PSV04027A/21T04
10 %IU51.9 A63PSL10014A Input 21PSV04027B/21T04
11 %IU51.10 A63PSL10014B Input 21PSV04027B/21T04
12 %IU51.11 A63PSL10015A Input 21PSV04027C/21T04
13 %IU51.12 A63PSL10015B Input 21PSV04027C/21T04
14 %IU51.13 A63PSL10016A Input 21PSV04027D/21T04
15 %IU51.14 A63PSL10016B Input 21PSV04027D/21T04
16 %IU51.15 A63MCP56001 Input TANQUE 21T04

Otros parmetros de entradas Analgicas Nodo 1 Slot 1
I/O Variable Name
Input Processing
at Fault
Input Value
at Fault
Signal
Conversion
Low Limit High Limit Unit
A63TSD49023 Fixed Value 0.0 LINEAR 4 20 mA

I/O Variable Name
Input Processing
at Fault
Input Value
at Fault
Signal
Conversion
A63GSD44005 Fixed Value 0.0 LINEAR 4 20 mA

MEMORIA DE CLCULO
9


I/O Variable Name
Input Processing
at Fault
Input Value
at Fault
Signal
Conversion
A63FSD56006 Fixed Value 0.0 LINEAR 4 20 mA

I/O Variable Name
Input Processing
at Fault
Input Value
at Fault
Signal
Conversion

MEMORIA DE CLCULO
10

I/O Variable Name
Input Processing
at Fault
Input Value
at Fault
Signal
Conversion
A63MCP56002 Fixed Value 0.0 LINEAR 4 20 mA

I/O Variable Name
Input Processing
at Fault
Input Value
at Fault
Signal
Conversion
A63PSLP5083 Fixed Value 0.0 LINEAR 4 20 mA
A63TSH10013 Fixed Value 0.0 LINEAR 4 20 mA
A63PSL10013A Fixed Value 0.0 LINEAR 4 20 mA
A63PSL10013B Fixed Value 0.0 LINEAR 4 20 mA
A63MCP56001 Fixed Value 0.0 LINEAR 4 20 mA

I/O Variable Name Detect IOP (High) Detect IOP (High)
Threshold
of IOP (High)
Threshold
of IOP (Low)
A63TSD49023 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63TSD49024 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63TSD50012 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63TSD50013 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63TSD50014 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3

MEMORIA DE CLCULO
11

A63TSD56001 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63TSD56002 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63TSD56003 No No 112.5 -6.3
A63TSD56004 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3

Threshold
of IOP (High)
Threshold
of IOP (Low)
A63GSD44005 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD44010 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD44011 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD49014 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD49022 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD49023 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD50008 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD50009 No No 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD50019 No No 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD50020 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD50021 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD56001 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD56002 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD56003 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD56004 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD56005 No No 112.5 -6.3

Threshold
of IOP (High)
Threshold
of IOP (Low)
A63FSD56006 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63FSD56007 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63FSD56008 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63FSD56009 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63FSD56010 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63FSD56001 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63FSD56002 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63FSD56003 No No 112.5 -6.3
A63FSD56004 No No 112.5 -6.3
A63FSD56005 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63FSD56006 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63FSD56007 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63FSD56008 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63FSD56009 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63FSD56011 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
MEMORIA DE CLCULO
12

A63FSD56012 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3

Threshold
of IOP (High)
Threshold
of IOP (Low)
A63GSD56013 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD56014 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD56015 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD56016 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD56017 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD56018 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD56019 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD56020 No No 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD56021 No No 112.5 -6.3
A63GSD56010 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3

Threshold
of IOP (High)
Threshold
of IOP (Low)
A63MCP56002 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3

Threshold
of IOP (High)
Threshold
of IOP (Low)
A63PSLP5083 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63PSLP5084 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63PSLP5085 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63TSH10013 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63TSH10014 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
MEMORIA DE CLCULO
13

A63TSH10015 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63TSH10016 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63PSL10013A No No 112.5 -6.3
A63PSL10013B No No 112.5 -6.3
A63PSL10014A Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63PSL10014B Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63PSL10015A Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63PSL10015B Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63PSL10016A Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63PSL10016B Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3
A63MCP56001 Yes Yes 112.5 -6.3

I/O Variable Name
Detect Transmitter
Fault (High)
Detect Transmitter
Fault (Low)
Threshold
of Transmitter (High)
Threshold
of Transmitter (Low)
Field Power
Diagnosis
A63TSD49023 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63TSD49024 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63TSD50012 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63TSD50013 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63TSD50014 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63TSD56001 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63TSD56002 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63TSD56003 No No 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63TSD56004 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire

I/O Variable Name
Detect Transmitter
Fault (High)
Detect Transmitter
Fault (Low)
Threshold
Threshold
Field Power
Diagnosis
A63GSD44005 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD44010 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD44011 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD49014 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD49022 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD49023 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD50008 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD50009 No No 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD50019 No No 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD50020 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD50021 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD56001 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD56002 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD56003 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
MEMORIA DE CLCULO
14

A63GSD56004 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD56005 No No 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire

I/O Variable Name
Detect Transmitter
Fault (High)
Detect Transmitter
Fault (Low)
Threshold
Threshold
Field Power
Diagnosis
A63FSD56006 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63FSD56007 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63FSD56008 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63FSD56009 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63FSD56010 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63FSD56001 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63FSD56002 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63FSD56003 No No 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63FSD56004 No No 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63FSD56005 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63FSD56006 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63FSD56007 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63FSD56008 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63FSD56009 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63FSD56011 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63FSD56012 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire

I/O Variable Name
Detect Transmitter
Fault (High)
Detect Transmitter
Fault (Low)
Threshold
Threshold
Field Power
Diagnosis
A63GSD56013 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD56014 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD56015 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD56016 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD56017 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD56018 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD56019 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD56020 No No 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD56021 No No 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire
A63GSD56010 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 4-Wire

I/O Variable Name
Detect Transmitter
Fault (High)
Detect Transmitter
Fault (Low)
Threshold
Threshold
Field Power
Diagnosis
A63MCP56002 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 2-Wire

MEMORIA DE CLCULO
15

I/O Variable Name
Detect Transmitter
Fault (High)
Detect Transmitter
Fault (Low)
Threshold
Threshold
Field Power
Diagnosis
A63PSLP5083 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 2-Wire
A63TSH10013 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 2-Wire
A63TSH10014 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 2-Wire
A63TSH10015 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 2-Wire
A63TSH10016 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 2-Wire
A63PSL10013A Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 2-Wire
A63PSL10013B Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 2-Wire
A63MCP56001 Yes Yes 106.3 -1.25 2-Wire
MEMORIA DE CLCULO
16
1.2.2 Entradas digitales
Para las entradas digitales se usa el mdulo SDV144, con 16 entradas. Para cada una
de las entradas podemos configurar los siguientes parmetros:
Input Processing at Fault: Este parmetro especifica el valor que ser pasado
a la lgica de aplicacin en lugar del valor real de campo si se detecta un
error en la entrada del canal, incluyendo errores del canal, errores del mdulo
de DI y errores en la ruta de la CPU a la DI mdulo. Se pueden elegir las
siguientes opciones:
o 0: El valor de entrada pasa a 0 cuando se detectan errores (por
defecto).
o 1: El valor de entrada pasa a 1 cuando se detectan errores.
o Hold: El valor justo antes del error se mantiene cuando ste sucede.
Detect Disconnection: Este parmetro especifica si requiere o no detectar la
desconexin del cableado. (Para este caso usaremos el dispositivo supervisor
de lnea SCB100 tal como se ha explicado en la Memria Descriptiva).
Detect Short Circuit: Este parmetro especifica si requiere o no detectar
cortocircuitos en el cableado. (Para este caso usaremos el dispositivo
supervisor de lnea SCB110 tal como se ha explicado en la Memria
Descriptiva).
Pulse Test: Este parmetro especifica si se desea realizar una prueba de
impulsos (comprobar el cableado entre los canales de entrada
mediante la generacin de pulsos).
SOER (Setting for SOER): Este parmetro nos permite habilitar o deshabilitar
el registro de la seal en cuestin al SOER.
Trip Signal (Setting for SOER): Permito o no permite considerar un cambio
en la seal del canal como un disparo. Este ajuste slo se activa si se habilita
el registro en el SOER.
P&ID Tag Name: Es un comentario que el usuario puede especificar con el
fin de hacer ms fcil extraer la informacin para identificar con el canal en
un dibujo P & ID. El comentario debe ser escrito utilizando hasta 16
caracteres de un solo byte o 8 caracteres de doble byte. Este ajuste puede ser
omitido.
MEMORIA DE CLCULO
17
Listado de entradas digitales
SDV144 Configuracin de entradas Digitales Nodo 1 Slot 5
Channel
Number
Wiring Position I/O Variable Name Direction Comment
1 %IU15.0 A63HS05083A Input CORTINAS TANQUE 21T04
2 %IU15.1 A63HS05083B Input CORTINAS TANQUE 21T04
3 %IU15.2 A63HS10013AA Input 21PSV04027A/21T04
4 %IU15.3 A63HS10013BA Input 21PSV04027A/21T04
5 %IU15.4 A63HS10013BB Input 21PSV04027A/21T04
6 %IU15.5 A63HS10014AA Input 21PSV04027B/21T04
7 %IU15.6 A63HS10014AB Input 21PSV04027B/21T04
8 %IU15.7 A63HS10014BA Input 21PSV04027B/21T04
9 %IU15.8 A63HS10014BB Input 21PSV04027B/21T04
10 %IU15.9 A63HS10015AB Input 21PSV04027C/21T04
11 %IU15.10 A63HS10015AA Input 21PSV04027C/21T04
12 %IU15.11 A63HS10015BA Input 21PSV04027C/21T04
13 %IU15.12 A63HS10015BB Input 21PSV04027C/21T04
14 %IU15.13 A63HS10016AA Input 21PSV04027D/21T04
15 %IU15.14 A63HS10016AB Input 21PSV04027D/21T04
16 %IU15.15 A63HS10016BA Input 21PSV04027D/21T04

Channel
Number
1 %IU23.0 A63HS10016BB Input 21PSV04027A/21T04
2 %IU23.1 A63FGS1325A2 Input SEALES PARO TANQUE 21T04
3 %IU23.2 A63HS10013AB Input 21PSV04027A/21T04

Channel
Number
MEMORIA DE CLCULO
18

14 %IU33.13 AFMB1523 Input FALLO MB-1523 FIR1
15 %IU33.14 AFBT1523 Input FALLO BT-1523-FIR1
16 %IU33.15 AFA01FGSFIR1 Input FALLO FA-01 FIR1 FGS

Otros parmetros de entradas Digitales Nodo 1 Slot 5
I/O Variable Name
Input Processing
at Fault
Detect
Disconnection
Detect Short
Circuit
Pulse
Test
SOER
Trip
Signal
A63HS05083A 0 No Yes Yes Yes No
A63HS05083B 0 No Yes Yes Yes No
A63HS10013AA 0 No Yes Yes Yes No
A63HS10013BA 0 No Yes Yes Yes No
A63HS10013BB 0 No Yes Yes Yes No
A63HS10014AB 0 No Yes Yes Yes No

I/O Variable Name
Input Processing
at Fault
Detect
Disconnection
Detect Short
Circuit
Pulse
Test
SOER
Trip
Signal
A63FGS1325A2 0 No No No No No

MEMORIA DE CLCULO
19

I/O Variable Name
Input Processing
at Fault
Detect
Disconnection
Detect Short
Circuit
Pulse
Test
SOER
Trip
Signal

AFMB1523 0 No No No Yes No
AFBT1523 0 No No No Yes No
AFA01FGSFIR1 0 No No No Yes No
MEMORIA DE CLCULO
20
1.2.3 Salidas digitales
Para las salidas digitales se usa el mdulo SDV541, con 16 salidas a 24 Vdc, tambin
se usa el mdulo SDV531, con 8 salidas a 24 Vdc. Para cada una de las salidas podemos
configurar los siguientes parmetros:
Output Value in Detecting Error: Este parmetro especifica un valor de salida
del canal a campo si un ocurre un error en el mdulo CPU (ambos mdulos
de CPU en la configuracin redundante) o en la ruta de la CPU al mdulo de
salida.
Detect Disconnection: Este parmetro permite habilitar o deshabilitar la
deteccin de desconexin de la salida.
SOER (Setting for SOER): Este parmetro nos permite habilitar o deshabilitar
el registro de la seal en cuestin al SOER.
Trip Signal (Setting for SOER): Permito o no permite considerar un cambio
en la seal del canal como un disparo. Este ajuste slo se activa si se habilita
el registro en el SOER.
P&ID Tag Name Es un comentario que el usuario puede especificar con el fin
de hacer ms fcil extraer la informacin para identificar con el canal en un
dibujo P & ID. El comentario debe ser escrito utilizando hasta 16 caracteres
de un solo byte o 8 caracteres de doble byte. Este ajuste puede ser omitido.
Command Line: Este comando no tiene que ser entrado.

MEMORIA DE CLCULO
21
Listado de salidas digitales
SDV531 Configuracin de salidas Digitales Nodo 2 Slot 5
Channel
Number
1 %QU25.0 A63XY10013A Output 21PSV04027A/21T04
2 %QU25.1 A63XY10014A Output 21PSV04027B/21T04
3 %QU25.2 A63XY10015A Output 21PSV04027C/21T04
4 %QU25.3 A63XY10016A Output 21PSV04027D/21T04
5 %QU25.4 A63XY05083 Output VAL.DILUV.TECHO 21T04
6 %QU25.5 A63XY05085 Output PLATAFOR.INFERIOR 21T04
7 %QU25.6 A63FGS2511I2 Output DET.GAS 63GSD50019
8 %QU25.7 A63FGS2511J 2 Output DET.GAS 63GSD50020

Channel
Number
1 %QU27.0 A63PLL05083A Output LAMP.CORT.TANQ.21T04
2 %QU27.1 A63PL10013AA Output 21PSV04027A/21T04
3 %QU27.2 A63PL10013BA Output 21PSV04027A/21T04
4 %QU27.3 A63PL10014AA Output 21PSV04027B/21T04
5 %QU27.4 A63PL10014BA Output 21PSV04027B/21T04
6 %QU27.5 A63PL10015AA Output 21PSV04027C/21T04
7 %QU27.6 A63PL10015BA Output 21PSV04027C/21T04
8 %QU27.7 A63PL10016AA Output 21PSV04027D/21T04
9 %QU27.8 A63PL10016BA Output 21PSV04027D/21T04
10 %QU27.9 A63TAH10013A Output 21PSV04027A/21T04
11 %QU27.10 A63TAH10014A Output 21PSV04027B/21T04
12 %QU27.11 A63TAH10015A Output 21PSV04027C/21T04
13 %QU27.12 A63TAH10016A Output 21PSV04027D/21T04
14 %QU27.13 A63FGS2521A2 Output DETECTORES DE DERRAME
15 %QU27.14 A63FGS2521A2 Output DET.GAS 63GSD44010
16 %QU27.15 A63FGS2512B2 Output DET.GAS 63GSD44011

Channel
Number
1 %QU35.0 A63XY10013B Output 21PSV04027A/21T04
2 %QU35.1 A63XY10014B Output 21PSV04027B/21T04
3 %QU35.2 A63XY10015B Output 21PSV04027C/21T04
4 %QU35.3 A63XY10016B Output 21PSV04027D/21T04
5 %QU35.4 A63XY05084 Output VAL.DILUV.TECHO 21T04
6 %QU35.5 A63FGS2511K2 Output DET.GAS 63GSD49021
7 %QU35.6 A63FGS2511L2 Output DET.GAS 63GSD49022
8 %QU35.7 A63FGS2511M2 Output DET.GAS 63GSD49023

Channel
Number
1 %QU37.0 A63PLL05083B Output LAMP.CORT.TANQ.21T04
2 %QU37.1 A63PL10013AB Output 21PSV04027A/21T04
3 %QU37.2 A63PL10013BB Output 21PSV04027A/21T04
4 %QU37.3 A63PL10014AB Output 21PSV04027B/21T04
MEMORIA DE CLCULO
22

5 %QU37.4 A63PL10014BB Output 21PSV04027B/21T04
6 %QU37.5 A63PL10015AB Output 21PSV04027C/21T04
7 %QU37.6 A63PL10015BB Output 21PSV04027C/21T04
8 %QU37.7 A63PL10016AB Output 21PSV04027D/21T04
9 %QU37.8 A63PL10016BB Output 21PSV04027D/21T04
10 %QU37.9 A63TAH10013B Output 21PSV04027A/21T04
11 %QU37.10 A63TAH10014B Output 21PSV04027B/21T04
12 %QU37.11 A63TAH10015B Output 21PSV04027C/21T04
13 %QU37.12 A63TAH10016B Output 21PSV04027D/21T04
14 %QU37.13 A63FGS2512C2 Output DET.LLAMA 63FSD44005
15 %QU37.14 A63FGS2511A2 Output DET.LLAMA 63FSD49014
16 %QU37.15 A63FGS2511B2 Output DET.LLAMA 63FSD50008

Channel
Number
1 %QU43.0 A63XS03023 Output FGO/G/DER. TANQUE 21T04
2 %QU43.1 A63XS03024 Output PELIGRO TANQUE 21T04
3 %QU43.2 A63TLD56001A Output DERRAME EN ZONA-16
4 %QU43.3 A63TLD56001B Output DERRAME EN ZONA-16
5 %QU43.4 A63FLD56001A Output FUEGO EN ZONA-16
6 %QU43.5 A63FLD56001B Output FUEGO EN ZONA-16
7 %QU43.6 A63CL56001 Output TANQUE 21T04 Z16
8 %QU43.7 A63GLD56001A Output GAS EN ZONA-16
9 %QU43.8 A63GLD56001B Output GAS EN ZONA-16
10 %QU43.9 A63XMCP56001 Output TANQUE 21T04 Z16
11 %QU43.10 A64FGS2511C2 Output DET.LLAMA 63FSD50009
12 %QU43.11 A64FGS2511D2 Output DET.DERRAME 63TSD49023
13 %QU43.12 A64FGS2511E2 Output DET.DERRAME 63TSD49024
14 %QU43.13 A64FGS2511F2 Output DET.DERRAME 63TSD50012
15 %QU43.14 A64FGS2511G2 Output DET.DERRAME 63TSD50013
16 %QU43.15 A64FGS2511H2 Output DET.DERRAME 63TSD50014

Otros parmetros de salidas Digitales Nodo 2 Slot 5
I/O Variable Name
Output Value in
Detecting Error
Detect
Disconnection
SOER
Trip
Signal
A63XY10013A 0 Yes No No
A63XY05083 0 Yes No No
A63FGS2511I2 0 Yes No No
A63FGS2511J 2 0 Yes No No

I/O Variable Name
Output Value in
Detecting Error
Detect
Disconnection
SOER
Trip
Signal
A63PLL05083A 0 Yes No No
A63PL10013AA 0 Yes No No
MEMORIA DE CLCULO
23

A63PL10013BA 0 Yes No No
A63TAH10013A 0 Yes No No
A63FGS2521A2 0 Yes No No
A63FGS2512B2 0 Yes No No

I/O Variable Name
Output Value in
Detecting Error
Detect
Disconnection
SOER
Trip
Signal
A63XY10013B 0 Yes No No
A63FGS2511K2 0 Yes No No
A63FGS2511L2 0 Yes No No
A63FGS2511M2 0 Yes No No

I/O Variable Name
Output Value in
Detecting Error
Detect
Disconnection
SOER
Trip
Signal
A63PLL05083B 0 Yes No No
A63PL10013AB 0 Yes No No
A63PL10013BB 0 Yes No No
A63TAH10013B 0 Yes No No
A63FGS2512C2 0 Yes No No
A63FGS2511B2 0 Yes No No

MEMORIA DE CLCULO
24

I/O Variable Name
Output Value in
Detecting Error
Detect
Disconnection
SOER
Trip
Signal
A63XS03023 0 Yes No No
A63XS03024 0 Yes No No
A63TLD56001A 0 Yes No No
A63TLD56001B 0 Yes No No
A63FLD56001A 0 Yes No No
A63FLD56001B 0 Yes No No
A63CL56001 0 Yes No No
A63GLD56001A 0 Yes No No
A63GLD56001B 0 Yes No No
A63XMCP56001 0 Yes No No
A64FGS2511C2 0 Yes No No
A64FGS2511D2 0 Yes No No
A64FGS2511E2 0 Yes No No
A64FGS2511F2 0 Yes No No
A64FGS2511G2 0 Yes No No
A64FGS2511H2 0 Yes No No

MEMORIA DE CLCULO
25
1.2.3.1 LIMITACIN EN LAS CONEXIONES DE SALIDAS DIGITALES
El mdulo SDV541 puede manejar un mximo 0.2 A de corriente de carga por canal,
y el mdulo SDV531 puede manejar un mximo de 0.6 A. Sin embargo, esto puede causar
la generacin de prdida de voltaje debido al cable conectado y componentes de resistencia
de adaptador, etc. Por lo tanto, es necesario tener en cuenta las limitaciones de magnitud de
corriente de carga y longitud de cable conectado como se muestra en la Figura 1.2.

*1: 1 a 16 canales

Figura 1.2. Conexin de cableado entre mdulo de salidas digitales y carga

La conexin de mdulo de salida digital es configurada con un bloque terminal
(SRM54D), por consiguiente, hay que tener en cuenta las condiciones previas siguientes:
- El voltaje de la fuente de alimentacin externa se expresa como V
p
[V]
- La longitud del cable de alimentacin Lp [m]
- El valor de la resistencia del cable de alimentacin Rp [/m]
- La longitud del cable de la seal Ls [m]
- La longitud del cable de seal (AKB331) L [m]
- El valor total de corriente que fluye por el canal 1 al canal 16 como I
p
[A]
- El valor de corriente que fluye por n-canales Isn [A]
- El valor de resistencia del cable de seal Rs [/m]
- El voltaje suministrado a las cargas conectadas a n-canales VLn [V]

MEMORIA DE CLCULO
26
La cada de voltaje de la fuente de alimentacin externa (V
p
) hasta las cargas es un
total de un diferencial de voltaje, V1, en la lnea de alimentacin, V2, en la lnea de
seal, para indicar un voltaje suministrado a las cargas conectadas a los n-canales como
expresin matemtica (1.1).

V
Ln
=V
p
- (V1 +V2) = (1.1)
=V
p
- (R
p
L
p
2 +0.06371L +0.05636) I
p
- 1 - (R
s
L
s
2 +0.4460L +0.2028) I
sn

Acto seguido se muestra una posible seal cableada de longitud Ls [m] cuando
cambiando la longitud, L [m], de un cable de seal de AKB331 y la corriente, Isn [A],
fluyendo por canales de n-canales como en la Tabla 1.1.
Adems, se dan los siguientes parmetros segn caractersticas del fabricante:
L
p
[m] 0.5 Longitud de cable de alimentacin
R
p
[/m] 0.023 Resistencia del cable de alimentacin
R
s
[/m] 0.023 Resistencia del cable de seal
V
Ln
[V] 21.6 Voltaje suministrado a las cargas conectadas a n-
canales
I
p
[A] (I
sn
16) Valor total de corriente que fluye por el canal 1 al 16

Para una fuente de alimentacin, V
p
[V] de 24V obtenemos los valores mostrados en
la Tabla 1.1.

Valor de
corriente (I
sn
)
por canal,
[A]
Longitud del multicable AKB331
15 m 10 m 7 m 5 m 3 m 2 m 1 m 0.6 m
0.1 No aplica 78.4 140.7 182.3 223.8 244.6 265.4 273.7
0.2 No aplica No aplica No aplica 30.1 71.6 92.4 113.2 121.5
0.3 No aplica No aplica No aplica No aplica 20.9 41.7 62.5 70.8
0.4 No aplica No aplica No aplica No aplica No aplica 16.3 37.1 45.4
0.5 No aplica No aplica No aplica No aplica No aplica 1.1 21.9 30.2
0.6 No aplica No aplica No aplica No aplica No aplica No aplica 11.7 20.0

Tabla 1.1. Posible longitud, Ls [m], (con cableado AWG18) desde el bloque terminal a la
carga.

MEMORIA DE CLCULO
27

1.3 Lgica implementada
En las siguientes pginas se adjunta la lgica implementada para este sistema de
seguridad. Los programas que se mostrarn son:
Programa de la lgica de la zona 16:
LOGICA_Z16 (LOGICA Z16)

Programa resumen alarmas zona 16 detectores Llama, Derrame y Gas:
RES_ALARM_Z16 (RES.ALARM Z16, DERR. Y LLAMA)
RES_ALARM_Z16_1 (RES.ALARM.Z16 GAS)

Programa de megafona de la zona 16:
MEGAFON_Z16 (MEGAFONIA Z16)

Programa de sealizacin de alarma zona 16:
SENAL_Z16 (SEALIZACION Z16)

Programa de parada de emergencia 21T04:
PARADA_21T04 (Z16.PARADA_21T04)

Programa de vlvulas de sistema de diluvio tanque 21T04:
VALV_63XV05083 (Z16 SIS.DILUV.21T04)

Programas del sistema de polvo tanque 21T04:
P_21PSV04027A (SIS.POLV.Z16 21PSV04027A)
R_21PSV04027A (SIS.POLV.Z16 21PSV04027A)
P_21PSV04027B (SIS.POLV.Z16 21PSV04027B)
R_21PSV04027B (SIS.POLV.Z16 21PSV04027B)
P_21PSV04027C (SIS.POLV.Z16 21PSV04027C)
R_21PSV04027C (SIS.POLV.Z16 21PSV04027C)
P_21PSV04027D (SIS.POLV.Z16 21PSV04027D)
R_21PSV04027D (SIS.POLV.Z16 21PSV04027D)
MEMORIA DE CLCULO
28
Programas de detectores zona 4:
DET_63XS03009 (DET.Z04 63XS03009)

Programas de detectores zona 9B:
DET_Z09B (DET.Z09B BOMB.SECUN.)

DET_Z10 (DET.Z10 VAP.MAR)

DET_Z10 (DET.Z10 VAP.MAR)

Programas tratamiento seales analgicas de detectores de gas, llama, derrame y
pulsadores de emergencia:
DET_FUEGO_Z16 (DET.FUEGO Z16)
DET_GAS_Z16 (DET.GAS Z16)
DET_DERRAM_Z16 (DET.DERRAM.Z16)
PULS_MCP_Z16 (PULS.MCP.Z16)

Programas de tratamiento de las seales digitales de los distintos sistemas de
extincin:
DI_VALV_DILUV (DI_VALV_DILUVIO)
DI_SIS_POLVO (DI_SIST_POLVO_21T04)
MEMORIA DE CLCULO
29

Lgica implementada

1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1. Configuration 1: SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1. Resource 125: SCS0125 (* FGS REGASIFICADORA *)
1.1.1.1. LOGICA_Z16 (* LOGICA Z16 *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
OR
BLOQUE_2D21
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN1
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
IN17
IN18
IN19
IN2
IN21
OUT
BLOQUE_2D5
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
OUT
BLOQUE_2D5
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
OUT
TON
IN
PT
Q
ET
BLOQUE_2D5
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
OUT
BLOQUE_2D5
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
OUT
A63TSD56001A
DETEC. DERRAME 2D4
IN
A63MEH56001
ENC. ALARM. 63MCP56001
A63MEH56002
A253A
SAL. OR MCP
A63GHH56002
ALARMA 63GSD56002
A63GHH56003
ALARMA 63GSD56003
A63GHH56004
ALARMA 63GSD56004
A63GHH56005
ALARMA 63GSD56005
A63GHH56006
ALARMA 63GSD56006
A63GHH56008
ALARMA 63GSD56008
A63GHH56009
ALARMA 63GSD56009
A63GHH56010
ALARMA 63GSD56010
A63GHH56011
ALARMA 63GSD56011
A63GHH56012
ALARMA 63GSD56012
A63GHH56014
ALARMA 63GSD56014
A63GHH56015
ALARMA 63GSD56015
A63GHH56016
ALARMA 63GSD56016
A63GHH56017
ALARMA 63GSD56017
A63GHH56018
ALARMA 63GSD56018
A63GHH56019
ALARMA 63GSD56019
A63GHH56020
ALARMA 63GSD56020
A63GHH56021
ALARMA 63GSD56021
A63GHH56007
ALARMA 63GSD56007
A63GHH56013
ALARMA 63GSD56013
A63GHH56001
ALARMA 63GSD56001
A252A
SAL. 2D21 GSD
A63FEH56002
ENC.ALARMA 63FSD56002
A63FEH56005
A63FEH56006
FALSE
FALSE
A63FEH56003
A63FEH56004
A63FEH56010
FALSE
A253C
SAL. 2D5 FSD
FALSE
FALSE
A63FEH56007
A63FEH56008
A63FEH56009
T#60S
A63FEH56001
A253B
SAL. 2D5 FSD
A254A
SAL. 2D5 FSD
FALSE
A63TAL56001
ALARMA BAJA 63TDS56001
A63TAL56002
A63TAL56003
A63TAL56004
A255A
SAL. 2D5 TSD
DETECTORES DE
GAS
DETECTORES DE
LLAMA
LOGICA ZONA 16
PULSADORES DE EMERGENCIA
DETECTORES DE DERRAME
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. RES_ALARM_Z16 (* RES.ALARM Z16, DERRM. Y LLAMA *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
OR
ALRM_10
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
Q
QP
REPEATT
RUN
STF
ONT
OFFT
Q
TP
IN
PT
Q
ET
OR
ALRM_10
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
Q
QP
ALRM_5
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
Q
QP
UNION_ALRM
I1Q
I1QP
I2Q
I2QP
OUT
OUTR
TP
IN
PT
Q
ET
A63FFL56001
FALLO LINEA 63FSD56001
A63FFL56002
A63FFL56003
A63FFL56004
A63FFL56005
A63FFL56006
A63FFL56007
A63FFL56008
A63FFL56009
A63FFL56010
COM.DCS 63FSD56010
A63FEH56001
A63FEH56002
A63FEH56003
A63FEH56004
A63FEH56005
A63FEH56006
A63FEH56007
A63FEH56008
A63FEH56009
A63FEH56010
A253B
SAL. 2D5 FSD
A253C
SAL. 2D5 FSD
A254A
SAL. 2D5 FSD
A253A
SAL. OR MCP
A253A
SAL. OR MCP
TRUE
T#5S
T#5S
A10HS01900
PRUEBA LAMPARAS
T#5S
A63ZIA56001F_R
REP.Z16 ALARM. FUEGO
A63ZIA56001F
Z16 ALARM. FUEGO
A63FLD56001A.v
FUEGO EN ZONA A-16
A63FLD56001B.v
FUEGO EN ZONA A-16
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
A63MFL56001
FALLO LIN. 63MCP56001
A63MFL56002
A63ZIF56001F
Z16 FALLO FUEGO
T#5S
A63ZIF56001F_R
REP.Z16 FALLO FUEGO
RESUMEN ALARMAS DE DERRAME Y GAS EN ZONA 16
RESUMEN ALARMAS DE FUEGO
ALRM_5
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
Q
QP
TP
IN
PT
Q
ET
ALRM_5
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
Q
QP
TP
IN
PT
Q
ET
REPEATT
RUN
STF
ONT
OFFT
Q
OR
A63TFL56002
FALLO LINEA 63TDS56002
A63TFL56003
A63TFL56004
A63TFL56001
A63ZIF56001D
ZONA 16 FALLO DERRAME
T#5S
A63ZIF56001D_R
REP. Z16 FALLO DERRAME
FALSE
FALSE
A63TAL56002
A63TAL56003
A63TAL56004
A255A
SAL. 2D5 TSD
A63TAL56001
T#5S
TRUE
T#5S
T#5S
A10HS01900
PRUEBA LAMPARAS
A63ZIR56001D
RIESGO Z16 DERRAME
A63TLD56001A.v
DERRAME EN ZONA A-16
A63ZIA56001D_R
REP.Z16 ALARM. DERRAME
A63ZIA56001D
ZONA 16 ALARM. DERRAME
A63TLD56001B.v
DERRAME EN ZONA A-16
RESUMEN ALARMAS DE DERRAME
ZONA ALARMA
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. RES_ALARM_Z16_1 (* RES.ALARM.Z16 GAS *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
ALRM_10
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN1
Q
QP
ALRM_10
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN1
Q
QP
ALRM_5
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
Q
QP
UNION_ALRM
I1Q
I1QP
I2Q
I2QP
OUT
OUTR
UNION_ALRM
I1Q
I1QP
I2Q
I2QP
OUT
OUTR
A63GAH56001
PREALARMA 63GSD56001
A63GAH56002
A63GAH56003
A63GAH56004
A63GAH56005
A63GAH56006
A63GAH56007
A63GAH56008
A63GAH56009
A63GAH56010
A63GAH56011
A63GAH56012
A63GAH56013
A63GAH56014
A63GAH56015
A63GAH56016
A63GAH56017
A63GAH56018
A63GAH56019
A63GAH56020
FALSE
FALSE
A63GAH56021
FALSE
FALSE
RESUMEN ALARMAS DE GAS
ZONA DE PREALARMA
ALRM_10
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN1
Q
QP
ALRM_5
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
Q
QP
ALRM_10
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN1
Q
QP
UNION_ALRM
I1Q
I1QP
I2Q
I2QP
OUT
OUTR
UNION_ALRM
I1Q
I1QP
I2Q
I2QP
OUT
OUTR
UNION_ALRM
I1Q
I1QP
I2Q
I2QP
OUT
OUTR
TP
IN
PT
Q
ET
OR
REPEATT
RUN
STF
ONT
OFFT
Q
A63GHH56001
ALARMA 63GSD56001
A63GHH56002
ALARMA 63GSD56002
A63GHH56003
ALARMA 63GSD56003
A63GHH56004
ALARMA 63GSD56004
A63GHH56005
ALARMA 63GSD56005
A63GHH56006
ALARMA 63GSD56006
A63GHH56007
ALARMA 63GSD56007
A63GHH56008
ALARMA 63GSD56008
A63GHH56009
ALARMA 63GSD56009
A63GHH56010
ALARMA 63GSD56010
A63GHH56011
ALARMA 63GSD56011
A63GHH56012
ALARMA 63GSD56012
A63GHH56013
ALARMA 63GSD56013
A63GHH56014
ALARMA 63GSD56014
A63GHH56015
ALARMA 63GSD56015
A63GHH56016
ALARMA 63GSD56016
A63GHH56017
ALARMA 63GSD56017
A63GHH56018
ALARMA 63GSD56018
A63GHH56019
ALARMA 63GSD56019
A63GHH56020
ALARMA 63GSD56020
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
A63GHH56021
ALARMA 63GSD56021
T#5S
A63ZIA56001G_R
REP.ALARM Z16 GAS
A63GLD56001A.v
GAS EN ZONA A-16
TRUE
T#5S
T#5S
A10HS01900
PRUEBA LAMPARAS
A63ZIR56001G
RIESGO Z16 GAS
A252A
SAL. 2D21 GSD
A63ZIA56001G
ALARMA Z16 GAS
A63GLD56001B.v
GAS EN ZONA A-16
ZONA DE ALARMA
ALRM_10
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN1
Q
QP
ALRM_5
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
Q
QP
ALRM_10
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN1
Q
QP
UNION_ALRM
I1Q
I1QP
I2Q
I2QP
OUT
OUTR
UNION_ALRM
I1Q
I1QP
I2Q
I2QP
OUT
OUTR
TP
IN
PT
Q
ET
A63GFL56001
FALLO LINEA 63GSD56001
A63GFL56002
A63GFL56003
A63GFL56004
A63GFL56005
A63GFL56006
A63GFL56007
A63GFL56008
A63GFL56009
A63GFL56010
A63GFL56011
A63GFL56012
A63GFL56013
A63GFL56014
A63GFL56015
A63GFL56016
A63GFL56017
A63GFL56018
A63GFL56019
A63GFL56020
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
FALSE
A63GFL56021
A63ZIF56001G
Z16 FALLO GAS
T#5S
A63ZIF56001G_R
REP. Z16 FALLO GAS
ZONA EN FALLO
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. MEGAFON_Z16 (* MEGAFONIA Z16 *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
TP
IN
PT
Q
ET
OR
A255A
SAL. 2D5 TSD
A252A
SAL. 2D21 GSD
A253B
SAL. 2D5 FSD
A254A
SAL. 2D5 FSD
T#60S
A253C
SAL. 2D5 FSD
A63XS03024.v
PELIGRO TANQUE 21T04
MEGAFONIA ZONA 16 TANQUE 21-T-04
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. SENAL_Z16 (* SEALIZACION Z16 *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
OR
REPEATT
RUN
STF
ONT
OFFT
Q
OR
AND
REPEATT
RUN
STF
ONT
OFFT
Q
OR
OR
OR
A253A
SAL. OR MCP
A255A
SAL. 2D5 TSD
A252A
SAL. 2D21 GSD
A253B
SAL. 2D5 FSD
A254A
SAL. 2D5 FSD
A253C
SAL. 2D5 FSD
TRUE
T#5S
T#5S
A63ZMO56003
DISP.MAN. Z16
A63ZIO56003
INH.MAN.Z16 SIRENA
A63CL56001.v
TANQUE 21T04. Z16
TRUE
T#5S
T#5S
A63ZMO56003
DISP.MAN. Z16
A63PEL05083
ENCL. ALARMA 63PSL05083
A63PEL05084
A63PEL05085
A63XMCP56001.v
TANQUE 21T04. ZONA A-16
SEALIZACION ZONA 16 TANQUE 21-T-04
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. PARADA_21T04 (* Z16.PARADA_21T04 *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
OR
OR
OR
DI_BP
IN
TAG
ALRM
ENCL
BPC
AUT_MAN
DISP
OZP
OAM
CANC
TEMP
SAUT
SMAN
CZP
CAM
A63ACO56001
ALAR. COINC. PARO 21T04
IN
'63FGS1325A2'
A63FGS1325A2.v
SEALES PARO TANQ 21T04
A253B
SAL. 2D5 FSD
A253C
SAL. 2D5 FSD
A254A
SAL. 2D5 FSD
BC63FGS1325A2
BP.SEAL. P. TANQ 21T04
A63FGS1325A2ALM
ALM.SEAL. P. TANQ 21T04
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZAO56001
Z16 A/M PARO 21T04
T#30S
A63ZMO56001
D.M. Z16 PARO 21T04
A63ZIO56001
CANC. M. Z16 PARO 21T04
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZAC56001
CONF. Z16 A/M P.21T04
A63XS03023.v
FGO/G/DER. TANQ 21T04
PARO TANQUE 21-T-04 (63-XS-03023)
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. VALV_63XV05083 (* Z16 SIS.DILUV. 21T04 *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
A63ACO56002_1
ALAR. COINC. EXT. Z16
IN
OR
OR
AUT_MAN
DISP
OZP
OAM
CANC
TEMP
SAUT
SMAN
CZP
CAM
AND
OR
VAL_A
IN
INTE
TON
TOFF
OUT
AND
OR
REPEATT
RUN
STF
ONT
OFFT
Q
OR
OR
A63XY05083_LF
FALLO LINEA 63XY05083
IN
A254A
SAL. 2D5 FSD
T#30S
A63ZIO56002
CANC. M. Z16
A63ZAO56002
Z16 A/M VALV. DILUV.
A63ZAC56002
CONF. Z16 A/M
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A253B
SAL. 2D5 FSD
A63HS05083
DISP.MAN. Z16
A63ZMO56002
DISP.MAN. Z16
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63HEH05083A
ENCL. ALARMA 63HS05083A
A63HEH05083B
ENCL. ALARMA 63HS05083B
A63HSRE05083
REARM. MAN. IND.Z16
REALIM
A261D
63XY05085
TRUE
T#5S
T#5S
A260D
63XY05084
A261E
63XY05085
A63PEL05083
A63PEL05083
T#10S
T#10S
A260E
63XY05084
A63XAL05083
ALARMA PSL 63PSL05083
A10HS01900
PRUEBA LAMPARAS
A63PLL05083B.v
LAMP. CORT. TANQ. 21T04
A63PLL05083A.v
LAMP.CORT. TANQ. 21T04
A63XY05083.v
VALV. DILUV.TECHO 21T04
A63XY05083.status
VALV. DILUV.TECHO 21T04
EXTINCION ZONA 16 (63-XV-05083) VALVULA DE
DILUVIO 21-T-04
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. VALV_63XV05084 (* Z16 SIS. DILUV. 21T04 *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
A63ACO56002_1
IN
OR
OR
AUT_MAN
DISP
OZP
OAM
CANC
TEMP
SAUT
SMAN
CZP
CAM
AND
OR
VAL_A
IN
INTE
TON
TOFF
OUT
AND
A63XY05084_LF
IN
A254A
SAL. 2D5 FSD
T#30S
A63ZIO56002
CANC. M. Z16
A63ZAO56002
A63ZAC56002
CONF. Z16 A/M
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A253B
SAL. 2D5 FSD
A63ZMO56002
DISP.MAN. Z16
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63HEH05083A
A63HEH05083B
A63HSRE05084
REARM. MAN. IND.Z16
REALIM
A63HS05084
DISP.MAN. Z16
T#10S
T#10S
A63PEL05084
A63PEL05084
A260D
63XY05084
A63XY05084.v
TECHO 21-T-04
A260E
63XY05084
A63XAL05084
A63XY05084.status
TECHO 21-T-04
DILUVIO 21-T-04
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. VALV_63XV05085 (* Z16 SIS.DILUV.21T04 *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
AND
OR
VAL_A
IN
INTE
TON
TOFF
OUT
AND
A63ACO56002_2
IN
OR
A63XY05085_LF
IN
AUT_MAN
DISP
OZP
OAM
CANC
TEMP
SAUT
SMAN
CZP
CAM
T#30S
A63ZIO56002
CANC. M. Z16
A63ZAO56002
A63ZAC56002
CONF. Z16 A/M
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZMO56002
DISP.MAN. Z16
A63HEH05083A
A63HEH05083B
T#10S
T#10S
REALIM
A253C
SAL. 2D5 FSD
A63HS05085
DISP.MAN. Z16
A63XY05085.v
PLATAFOR. INFERIOR 21T04
A63HSRE05085
REARM. MAN. IND.Z16
A63XAL05085
A261E
63XY05085
A261D
63XY05085
A63PEL05085
A63PEL05085
A63XY05085.status
PLATAFOR. INFERIOR 21T04
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
DILUVIO 21-T-04
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. P_21PSV04027A (* SIS.POLV.Z16 21PSV04027A *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
OR
A63ACO56005
IN
AND
OR
AUT_MAN
DISP
OZP
OAM
CANC
TEMP
SAUT
SMAN
CZP
CAM
VAL_ALRM
IN
INTE
TON
TOFF
OUT
OR
REPEATT
RUN
STF
ONT
OFFT
Q
AND
OR
T#30S
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZAO56005
AUTO/MAN Z16
A63TEH10013
ENC.ALARMA 63TSH10013
A63TAH10013A.v
21-PSV-04027A
A63TAH10013B.v
21-PSV-04027A
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A10HS01900
PRUEBA LAMPARAS
REALIM
A63ZIO56005
CANC. MAN Z16
A63HEH10013AA
ENCL. ALARMA 63HS10013AA
A63HEH10013AB
ENCL. ALARMA 63HS10013AB
A63ZAC56005
A63HS10013A
DISP.MAN. IND. Z16
A63HSRE10013A
REARM. MAN. IND.Z16
T#10S
T#10S
A63PEL10013A
ENCL. ALARMA 63PSL10013A
TRUE
T#5S
T#5S
A63PEL10013A
A63PL10013AA.v
21-PSV-04 027A/21-T-04
A63PL10013AB.v
21-PSV-04 027A / 21-T-04
A10HS01900
PRUEBA LAMPARAS
A63XAL10013A
ALARMA PSL 63PSL10013A
A63XY10013A.v
DISP. CILIND. PRINC.
DISP. DEPOSITO PRINCIPAL (21-PSV-04027A) SISTEMA POLVO
21-T-04
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. R_21PSV04027A (* SIS.POLV.Z16 21PSV04027A *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
OR
OR
AND
VAL_AL
IN
INTE
TON
TOFF
OUT
AND
REPEATTI
RUN
STF
ONT
OFFT
Q
OR
A63HEH10013BA
ENCL. ALARMA 63HS10013BA
A63HEH10013BB
ENCL. ALARMA 63HS10013BB
A63HS10013B
DISP.MAN. IND. Z16
A63HSRE10013B
REARM. MAN. IND.Z16
REALIM05
T#10S
T#10S
A63PEL10013B
ENCL. ALARMA 63PSL10013B
TRUE
T#5S
T#5S
A63PEL10013B
A10HS01900
PRUEBA LAMPARAS
A63XAL10013B
ALARMA PSL 63PSL10013B
A63PL10013BA.v
21-PSV-04 027A/21-T-04
A63PL10013BB.v
21-PSV-04 027A / 21-T-04
A63XY10013B.v
21-PSV-04 027A / 21-T-04
DISPARO DEPOSITO RESERVA (21-PSV-04027A) SISTEMA
POLVO 21-T-04
1.1.1.1.2. Local Variables + Parameters
Local Variables
Group Type Alias Attribute Direction Int.Value
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
REALIM05@R_21PSV04027A Comment:
BOOL Free Internal
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. P_21PSV04027B (* SIS.POLV.Z16 21PSV04027B *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
OR
AND
OR
AUT_MAN
DISP
OZP
OAM
CANC
TEMP
SAUT
SMAN
CZP
CAM
VAL_ALRM
IN
INTE
TON
TOFF
OUT
OR
REPEATT
RUN
STF
ONT
OFFT
Q
AND
OR
A63ACO56006
IN
T#30S
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A10HS01900
PRUEBA LAMPARAS
T#10S
T#10S
TRUE
T#5S
T#5S
A10HS01900
PRUEBA LAMPARAS
A63TEH10014
A63TAH10014A.v
21-PSV-04 027B/21-T-04
A63TAH10014B.v
21-PSV-04 027B / 21-T-04
A63ZAO56006
AUTO/MAN Z16
A63ZIO56006
CANC. MAN Z16
A63ZAC56006
A63XY10014A.v
21-PSV-04 027B/21-T-04
A63PL10014AA.v
21-PSV-04 027B/21-T-04
A63PL10014AB.v
21-PSV-04 027B / 21-T-04
A63XAL10014A
A63PEL10014A
A63PEL10014A
A63HEH10014AA
A63HEH10014AB
A63HSRE10014A
REARM. MAN. IND.Z16
A63HS10014A
DISP.MAN. IND. Z16
REALIM
DISP. DEPOSITO PRINCIPAL (21-PSV-04027B) SISTEMA POLVO
21-T-04
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. R_21PSV04027B (* SIS.POLV.Z16 21PSV04027B *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
OR
OR
AND
VAL_AL
IN
INTE
TON
TOFF
OUT
AND
REPEATTI
RUN
STF
ONT
OFFT
Q
OR
T#10S
T#10S
TRUE
T#5S
T#5S
A10HS01900
PRUEBA LAMPARAS
REALIM01
A63HEH10014BA
A63HEH10014BB
A63HS10014B
DISP.MAN. IND. Z16
A63HSRE10014B
REARM. MAN. IND.Z16
A63XY10014B.v
21-PSV-04 027B / 21-T-04
A63PEL10014B
A63PEL10014B
A63XAL10014B
A63PL10014BA.v
21-PSV-04 027B/21-T-04
A63PL10014BB.v
21-PSV-04 027B / 21-T-04
DISPARO DEPOSITO RESERVA (21-PSV-04027B) SISTEMA
POLVO 21-T-04
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. P_21PSV04027C (* SIS.POLV.Z16 21PSV04027C *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
OR
AND
OR
AUT_MAN
DISP
OZP
OAM
CANC
TEMP
SAUT
SMAN
CZP
CAM
OR
REPEATT
RUN
STF
ONT
OFFT
Q
AND
OR
A63ACO56007
IN
VAL_ALRM
IN
INTE
TON
TOFF
OUT
T#30S
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A10HS01900
PRUEBA LAMPARAS
TRUE
T#5S
T#5S
A10HS01900
PRUEBA LAMPARAS
A63TEH10015
A63TAH10015A.v
21-PSV-04 027C/21-T-04
A63TAH10015B.v
21-PSV-04 027C / 21-T-04
A63ZAO56007
AUTO/MAN Z16
A63ZIO56007
CANC. MAN Z16
A63ZAC56007
REALIM
A63PEL10015A
A63XY10015A.v
21-PSV-04 027C/21-T-04
A63PL10015AA.v
21-PSV-04 027C/21-T-04
A63PL10015AB.v
21-PSV-04 027C / 21-T-04
A63HSRE10015A
REARM. MAN. IND.Z16
A63HS10015A
DISP.MAN. IND. Z16
A63HEH10015AA
A63HEH10015AB
T#10S
T#10S
A63PEL10015A
A63XAL10015A
DISP. DEPOSITO PRINCIPAL (21-PSV-04027C) SISTEMA POLVO
21-T-04
Local Variables
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
REALIM01@P_21PSV04027C Comment:
BOOL Free Internal
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. P_21PSV04027D (* SIS.POLV.Z16 21PSV04027D *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
OR
AND
OR
AUT_MAN
DISP
OZP
OAM
CANC
TEMP
SAUT
SMAN
CZP
CAM
OR
REPEATT
RUN
STF
ONT
OFFT
Q
AND
OR
A63ACO56008
IN
VAL_ALRM
IN
INTE
TON
TOFF
OUT
T#30S
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A10HS01900
PRUEBA LAMPARAS
TRUE
T#5S
T#5S
A10HS01900
PRUEBA LAMPARAS
A63TAH10016A.v
21-PSV-04 027D/21-T-04
A63TAH10016B.v
21-PSV-04 027D / 21-T-04
A63TEH10016
A63ZAO56008
AUTO/MAN Z16
A63ZIO56008
CANC. MAN Z16
A63ZAC56008
A63XY10016A.v
21-PSV-04 027D/21-T-04
A63PEL10016A
A63HEH10016AA
A63HEH10016AB
A63HS10016A
DISP.MAN. IND. Z16
A63HSRE10016A
REARM. MAN. IND.Z16
A63PL10016AA.v
21-PSV-04 027D/21-T-04
A63PL10016AB.v
21-PSV-04 027D / 21-T-04
REALIM
T#10S
T#10S
A63PEL10016A
A63XAL10016A
DISP. DEPOSITO PRINCIPAL (21-PSV-04027D) SISTEMA
POLVO 21-T-04
Local Variables
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
REALIM01@P_21PSV04027D Comment:
BOOL Free Internal
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. P_21PSV04027D (* SIS.POLV.Z16 21PSV04027D *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
OR
AND
OR
AUT_MAN
DISP
OZP
OAM
CANC
TEMP
SAUT
SMAN
CZP
CAM
OR
REPEATT
RUN
STF
ONT
OFFT
Q
AND
OR
A63ACO56008
IN
VAL_ALRM
IN
INTE
TON
TOFF
OUT
T#30S
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A10HS01900
PRUEBA LAMPARAS
TRUE
T#5S
T#5S
A10HS01900
PRUEBA LAMPARAS
A63TAH10016A.v
21-PSV-04 027D/21-T-04
A63TAH10016B.v
21-PSV-04 027D / 21-T-04
A63TEH10016
A63ZAO56008
AUTO/MAN Z16
A63ZIO56008
CANC. MAN Z16
A63ZAC56008
A63XY10016A.v
21-PSV-04 027D/21-T-04
A63PEL10016A
A63HEH10016AA
A63HEH10016AB
A63HS10016A
DISP.MAN. IND. Z16
A63HSRE10016A
REARM. MAN. IND.Z16
A63PL10016AA.v
21-PSV-04 027D/21-T-04
A63PL10016AB.v
21-PSV-04 027D / 21-T-04
REALIM
T#10S
T#10S
A63PEL10016A
A63XAL10016A
DISP. DEPOSITO PRINCIPAL (21-PSV-04027D) SISTEMA
POLVO 21-T-04
Local Variables
---------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
REALIM01@P_21PSV04027D Comment:
BOOL Free Internal
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. R_21PSV04027D (* SIS.POLV.Z16 21PSV04027D *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
OR
OR
AND
VAL_AL
IN
INTE
TON
TOFF
OUT
AND
REPEATTI
RUN
STF
ONT
OFFT
Q
OR
T#10S
T#10S
TRUE
T#5S
T#5S
A10HS01900
PRUEBA LAMPARAS
A63HEH10016BA
A63HEH10016BB
A63HS10016B
DISP.MAN. IND. Z16
A63HSRE10016B
REARM. MAN. IND.Z16
REALIM01
A63PEL10016B
A63PEL10016B
A63XY10016B.v
21-PSV-04 027D / 21-T-04
A63PL10016BA.v
21-PSV-04 027D/21-T-04
A63PL10016BB.v
21-PSV-04 027D / 21-T-04
A63XAL10016B
DISPARO DEPOSITO RESERVA (21-PSV-04027D) SISTEMA
POLVO 21-T-04
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. DET_63XS03009 (* DET. Z04 63XS03009 *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
A63GI44010
BLOQUE
63GSD44010
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GI44011
BLOQUE
63GSD44011
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD44010
TANQUE 31-Z-02
A63GSD44010.status
TANQUE 31-Z-02
'63GSD44010'
A63GID44010
VALOR % LEL 63GSD44010
A63GCA44010
CALIBRACION 63GSD44010
A63GIC44010
CONF.INH. 63GSD44010
A63GSD44011
TANQUE 31-Z-02
A63GSD44011.status
TANQUE 31-Z-02
'63GSD44011'
A63ZPO44001
ORDEN Z04 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC44001
CONF. Z04 PRUEBAS
A63GID44011
A63GFL44011
A63GCA44011
A63GIC44011
A63ZPC44001
CONF. Z04 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO44001
ORDEN Z04 PRUEBAS
A63GAH44010
A63FGS2512B2.v
DET. GAS 63-GSD-44011
A63FGS2512A2.v
A63GFL44010
A63GHH44010
ALARMA 63GSD44010
A63GAH44011
A63GHH44011
ALARMA 63GSD44011
DETECTORES DE GAS Y LLAMA EN ERM/ODORIZACION
(63-XS-03009)
DETECTORES DE GAS. 63-GSD-44010,63-GSD44011
A63FI44005
BLOQUE
63FSD44005
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AH
MANH
MANL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
MANT
100.0
0.0
0.5
75.0
MANH
CTE MANT. H
MANL
CTE MANT. L
A63FSD44005
TANQUE 31-Z-02
A63FSD44005.status
TANQUE 31-Z-02
A63ZPO44001
ORDEN Z04 PRUEBAS
'63FSD44005'
A63FID44005
VALOR 63FSD44005
A63FFL44005
A63FIC44005
CONF.INH. 63FSD44005
A63ZPC44001
CONF. Z04 PRUEBAS
A63MNT44005
MANTENIMIENTO 63FSD44005
A63FGS2512C2.v
DET. LLAMA 63-FSD-44005
A63FAH44005
EST. ALARMA 63FSD44005
A63FEH44005
ENC. ALARMA 63FSD44005
DETECTOR DE LLAMA. 63-FSD-44005
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. DET_Z09B (* DET.Z09B BOMB. SECUN. *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
A63FI49014
BLOQUE
63FSD49014
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AH
MANH
MANL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
MANT
A63GI49022
BLOQUE
63GSD49022
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
100.0
0.0
0.5
75.0
MANH
CTE MANT. H
MANL
CTE MANT. L
A63FGS2511A2.v
A63FSD49014
BOMBAS SECUNDARIAS
A63FSD49014.status
BOMBAS SECUNDARIAS
'63FSD49014'
A63FID49014
VALOR 63FSD49014
A63FFL49014
A63FIC49014
A63MNT49014
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63FGS2511K2.v
A63GSD49022
BOMBAS SECUNDARIAS
A63GSD49022.status
BOMBAS SECUNDARIAS
A63ZPO49001
ORDEN Z09 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC49001
CONF. Z09 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO49001
ORDEN Z09 PRUEBAS
'63GSD49022'
A63GID49022
A63GFL49022
A63GCA49022
A63GIC49022
A63ZPC49001
CONF. Z09 PRUEBAS
A63FAH49014
A63FEH49014
A63GAH49022
A63GHH49022
ALARMA 63GSD49022
DETECTORES ZONA 09B, BOMBAS
SECUNDARIAS
DETECTOR DE LLAMA. 63-FSD-49014
DETECTORES DE GAS. 63-GSD-49022,63-GSD-49023
A63GI49023
BLOQUE
63GSD49023
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63TI49023
BLOQUE
63TSD49023
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENCL
CINH
CZP
A63TI49024
BLOQUE
63TSD49024
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENCL
CINH
CZP
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD49023
BOMBAS SECUNDARIAS
A63GSD49023.status
BOMBAS SECUNDARIAS
A63ZPO49001
ORDEN Z09 PRUEBAS
'63GSD49023'
A63GID49023
A63GFL49023
A63FGS2511L2.v
A63GCA49023
A63GIC49023
A63ZPC49001
CONF. Z09 PRUEBAS
A63GAH49023
A63GHH49023
ALARMA 63GSD49023
100.0
0.0
0.5
-50.0
A63TSD49023
BOMBAS SECUNDARIAS
A63TSD49023.status
BOMBAS SECUNDARIAS
A63ZPO49001
ORDEN Z09 PRUEBAS
'63TSD49023'
A63TID49023
VALOR TEMP.63TDS49023
A63TIC49023
CONF. INH. 63TDS49023
A63ZPC49001
CONF. Z09 PRUEBAS
100.0
0.0
0.5
-50.0
A63ZPO49001
ORDEN Z09 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC49001
CONF. Z09 PRUEBAS
A63TSD49024
BOMBAS SECUNDARIAS
A63TSD49024.status
BOMBAS SECUNDARIAS
'63TSD49024'
A63TID49024
A63FGS2511E2.v
DET. DERRAME 63-TSD-49024
A63FGS2511D2.v
A63TIC49024
A63TFL49023
A63TAL49023
A63TFL49024
A63TAL49024
DETECTORES DE DERRAME.63-TSD-49023,63-TSD-49024
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. DET_Z10 (* DET.Z10 VAP.MAR *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
A63TI50012
BLOQUE
63TSD50012
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENCL
CINH
CZP
A63TI50013
BLOQUE
63TSD50013
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENCL
CINH
CZP
A63TI50014
BLOQUE
63TSD50014
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENCL
CINH
CZP
100.0
0.0
0.5
-50.0
A63TSD50012
VAPORIZADORES AGUA MAR
A63TSD50012.status
A63ZPO50001
ORDEN Z10 PRUEBAS
'63TSD50012'
A63TID50012
A63FGS2511F2.v
A63TIC50012
A63ZPC50001
CONF. Z10 PRUEBAS
100.0
0.0
0.5
-50.0
A63ZPC50001
CONF. Z10 PRUEBAS
A63TSD50013
A63TSD50013.status
A63ZPO50001
ORDEN Z10 PRUEBAS
'63TSD50013'
A63TID50013
A63FGS2511G2.v
A63TIC50013
100.0
0.0
0.5
-50.0
A63ZPC50001
CONF. Z10 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO50001
ORDEN Z10 PRUEBAS
A63TSD50014
A63TSD50014.status
'63TSD50014'
A63TID50014
A63FGS2511H2.v
A63TIC50014
A63TFL50012
A63TAL50012
A63TFL50013
A63TAL50013
A63TFL50014
A63TAL50014
DETECTORES ZONA 10 VAPORIZADORES AGUA
DE MAR
63-TSD-50012,63-TSD-50013,63-TSD-500
A63GI50019
BLOQUE
63GSD50019
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GI50020
BLOQUE
63GSD50020
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD50019
A63GSD50019.status
A63ZPO50001
ORDEN Z10 PRUEBAS
'63GSD50019'
A63GID50019
A63GFL50019
A63FGS2511I2.v
A63GCA50019
A63GIC50019
A63ZPC50001
CONF. Z10 PRUEBAS
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63ZPO50001
ORDEN Z10 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC50001
CONF. Z10 PRUEBAS
A63GSD50020
A63GSD50020.status
'63GSD50020'
A63GID50020
A63GFL50020
A63FGS2511J2.v
A63GCA50020
A63GIC50020
A63GAH50019
A63GHH50019
ALARMA 63GSD50019
A63GAH50020
A63GHH50020
ALARMA 63GSD50020
DETECTORES DE GAS.
63-GSD-50019,63-GSD-50020,63-GSD-5002
A63GI50021
BLOQUE
63GSD50021
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63FI50008
BLOQUE
63FSD50008
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AH
MANH
MANL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
MANT
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63ZPO50001
ORDEN Z10 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC50001
CONF. Z10 PRUEBAS
A63GSD50021
A63GSD50021.status
'63GSD50021'
A63GID50021
A63GFL50021
A63FGS2511K2.v
A63GCA50021
A63GIC50021
100.0
0.0
0.5
75.0
MANH
CTE MANT. H
MANL
CTE MANT. L
A63FSD50008
A63FSD50008.status
A63ZPO50001
ORDEN Z10 PRUEBAS
'63FSD50008'
A63FID50008
VALOR 63FSD50008
A63FFL50008
A63FGS2511B2.v
A63FIC50008
A63ZPC50001
CONF. Z10 PRUEBAS
A63MNT50008
A63GAH50021
A63GHH50021
ALARMA 63GSD50021
A63FAH50008
A63FEH50008
DETECTOR DE LLAMA.
63-FSD-50008,63-FSD-50009
A63FI50009
BLOQUE
63FSD50009
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AH
MANH
MANL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
MANT
100.0
0.0
0.5
75.0
MANH
CTE MANT. H
MANL
CTE MANT. L
A63ZPO50001
ORDEN Z10 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC50001
CONF. Z10 PRUEBAS
A63FSD50009
A63FSD50009.status
'63FSD50009'
A63FID50009
VALOR 63FSD50009
A63FFL50009
A63FGS2511C2.v
A63FIC50009
A63MNT50009
A63FAH50009
A63FEH50009
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. DET_FUEGO_Z16 (* DET.FUEGO Z16 *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
A63FI56001
BLOQUE
63FSD56001
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AH
MANH
MANL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
MANT
A63FI56002
BLOQUE
63FSD56002
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AH
MANH
MANL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
MANT
A63FI56006
BLOQUE
63FSD56006
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AH
MANH
MANL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
MANT
A63FI56007
BLOQUE
63FSD56007
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AH
MANH
MANL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
MANT
A63FSD56001.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
'63FSD56001'
0.5
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63FSD56001
TANQUE 21-T-04
A63FFL56001
A63FAH56001
75.0
MANH
CTE MANT. H
MANL
CTE MANT. L
A63FID56001
VALOR 63FSD56001
A63FIC56001
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63MNT56001
A63FSD56002.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
'63FSD56002'
0.5
A63FSD56002
TANQUE 21-T-04
A63FFL56002
A63FAH56002
75.0
MANH
CTE MANT. H
MANL
CTE MANT. L
A63FID56002
VALOR 63FSD56002
A63FIC56002
A63MNT56002
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63FSD56006.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
'63FSD56006'
0.5
A63FSD56006
TANQUE 21-T-04
A63FFL56006
A63FAH56006
75.0
MANH
CTE MANT. H
MANL
CTE MANT. L
A63FID56006
VALOR 63FSD56006
A63FIC56006
A63MNT56006
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63FSD56007.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
'63FSD56007'
0.5
A63FSD56007
TANQUE 21-T-04
A63FFL56007
A63FAH56007
A63FEH56007
75.0
MANH
CTE MANT. H
MANL
CTE MANT. L
A63FID56007
VALOR 63FSD56007
A63FIC56007
A63MNT56007
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63FEH56001
A63FEH56002
A63FEH56006
LOGICA DETECTORES DE LLAMA
A63FI56003
BLOQUE
63FSD56003
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AH
MANH
MANL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
MANT
A63FI56004
BLOQUE
63FSD56004
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AH
MANH
MANL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
MANT
A63FI56005
BLOQUE
63FSD56005
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AH
MANH
MANL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
MANT
A63FI56008
BLOQUE
63FSD56008
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AH
MANH
MANL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
MANT
A63FI56009
BLOQUE
63FSD56009
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AH
MANH
MANL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
MANT
A63FI56010
BLOQUE
63FSD56010
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AH
MANH
MANL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
MANT
A63FSD56003.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
'63FSD56003'
0.5
A63FSD56003
TANQUE 21-T-04
A63FFL56003
A63FAH56003
A63FEH56003
75.0
MANH
CTE MANT. H
MANL
CTE MANT. L
A63FID56003
VALOR 63FSD56003
A63FIC56003
A63MNT56003
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63FSD56004.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
'63FSD56004'
0.5
A63FSD56004
TANQUE 21-T-04
A63FFL56004
A63FAH56004
A63FEH56004
75.0
MANH
CTE MANT. H
MANL
CTE MANT. L
A63FID56004
VALOR 63FSD56004
A63FIC56004
A63MNT56004
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63FSD56005.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
'63FSD56005'
0.5
A63FSD56005
TANQUE 21-T-04
A63FFL56005
A63FAH56005
75.0
MANH
CTE MANT. H
MANL
CTE MANT. L
A63FID56005
VALOR 63FSD56005
A63FIC56005
A63MNT56005
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63FSD56008.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
'63FSD56008'
0.5
A63FSD56008
TANQUE 21-T-04
A63FFL56008
A63FAH56008
A63FEH56008
75.0
MANH
CTE MANT. H
MANL
CTE MANT. L
A63FID56008
VALOR 63FSD56008
A63FIC56008
A63MNT56008
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63FSD56009.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
'63FSD56009'
0.5
A63FSD56009
TANQUE 21-T-04
A63FFL56009
A63FAH56009
A63FEH56009
75.0
MANH
CTE MANT. H
MANL
CTE MANT. L
A63FID56009
VALOR 63FSD56009
A63FIC56009
A63MNT56009
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63FSD56010.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
'63FSD56010'
0.5
A63FSD56010
TANQUE 21-T-04
A63FFL56010
COM.DCS 63FSD56010
A63FAH56010
A63FEH56010
75.0
MANH
CTE MANT. H
MANL
CTE MANT. L
A63FID56010
VALOR 63FSD56010
A63FIC56010
A63MNT56010
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63FEH56005
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. DET_GAS_Z16 (* DET. GAS Z16 *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
A63GI56002
BLOQUE
63GSD56002
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GI56012
BLOQUE
63GSD56012
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GI56013
BLOQUE
63GSD56013
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GI56014
BLOQUE
63GSD56014
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GI56001
BLOQUE
63GSD56001
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GI56003
BLOQUE
63GSD56003
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GSD56001.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56001'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56001
TANQUE 21-T-04
A63GFL56001
A63GAH56001
A63GCA56001
A63GIC56001
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63GSD56002.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56002'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56002
TANQUE 21-T-04 A63GID56002
A63GHH56002
ALARMA 63GSD56002
A63GAH56002
A63GCA56002
A63GIC56002
A63GSD56003.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56003'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56003
A63GFL56003
A63GAH56003
A63GCA56003
A63GIC56003
A63GSD56012.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56012'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56012
A63GFL56012
A63GAH56012
A63GCA56012
A63GIC56012
A63GSD56013.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56013'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56013
A63GFL56013
A63GAH56013
A63GCA56013
A63GIC56013
A63GSD56014.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56014'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56014
A63GFL56014
A63GAH56014
A63GCA56014
A63GIC56014
A63GID56001
A63GHH56001
ALARMA 63GSD56001
A63GFL56002
A63GHH56003
ALARMA 63GSD56003
A63GHH56012
ALARMA 63GSD56012
A63GHH56013
ALARMA 63GSD56013
A63GHH56014
ALARMA 63GSD56014
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
DETECTORES DE GAS EN ZONA 16
A63GI56004
BLOQUE
63GSD56004
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GI56005
BLOQUE
63GSD56005
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GI56006
BLOQUE
63GSD56006
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GI56015
BLOQUE
63GSD56015
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GI56016
BLOQUE
63GSD56016
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GI56017
BLOQUE
63GSD56017
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GSD56004.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56004'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56004
A63GFL56004
A63GAH56004
A63GCA56004
A63GIC56004
A63GSD56005.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56005'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56005
A63GFL56005
A63GAH56005
A63GCA56005
A63GIC56005
A63GSD56006.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56006'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56006
A63GFL56006
A63GAH56006
A63GCA56006
A63GIC56006
A63GSD56015.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56015'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56015
A63GFL56015
A63GAH56015
A63GCA56015
A63GIC56015
A63GSD56016.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56016'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56016
A63GFL56016
A63GAH56016
A63GCA56016
A63GIC56016
A63GSD56017.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56017'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56017
A63GFL56017
A63GAH56017
A63GCA56017
A63GIC56017
A63GHH56004
ALARMA 63GSD56004
A63GHH56005
ALARMA 63GSD56005
A63GHH56006
ALARMA 63GSD56006
A63GHH56015
ALARMA 63GSD56015
A63GHH56016
ALARMA 63GSD56016
A63GHH56017
ALARMA 63GSD56017
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63GI56007
BLOQUE
63GSD56007
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GI56008
BLOQUE
63GSD56008
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GI56009
BLOQUE
63GSD56009
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GI56018
BLOQUE
63GSD56018
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GI56019
BLOQUE
63GSD56019
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GI56020
BLOQUE
63GSD56020
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GSD56007.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56007'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56007
A63GHH56007
ALARMA 63GSD56007
A63GAH56007
A63GCA56007
A63GIC56007
A63GSD56008.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56008'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56008
A63GFL56008
A63GAH56008
A63GCA56008
A63GIC56008
A63GSD56009.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56009'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56009
A63GFL56009
A63GAH56009
A63GCA56009
A63GIC56009
A63GSD56018.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56018'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56018
A63GFL56018
A63GAH56018
A63GCA56018
A63GIC56018
A63GSD56019.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56019'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56019
A63GFL56019
A63GAH56019
A63GCA56019
A63GIC56019
A63GSD56020.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56020'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56020
A63GFL56020
A63GAH56020
A63GCA56020
A63GIC56020
A63GFL56007
A63GHH56008
ALARMA 63GSD56008
A63GHH56009
ALARMA 63GSD56009
A63GHH56018
ALARMA 63GSD56018
A63GHH56019
ALARMA 63GSD56019
A63GHH56020
ALARMA 63GSD56020
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63GI56011
BLOQUE
63GSD56011
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GI56021
BLOQUE
63GSD56021
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GI56010
BLOQUE
63GSD56010
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AHH
AH
CALH
CALL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENHH
ENH
ENCA
CINH
CZP
A63GSD56010.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56010'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56010
A63GFL56010
A63GAH56010
A63GCA56010
A63GIC56010
A63GSD56011.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56011'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56011
A63GFL56011
A63GAH56011
A63GCA56011
A63GIC56011
A63GSD56021.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
60.0
0.5
'63GSD56021'
20.0
CALH
CTE CALIBRA. H
CALL
CTE CALIBRA. L
A63GSD56021
A63GFL56021
A63GAH56021
A63GCA56021
A63GIC56021
A63GHH56010
ALARMA 63GSD56010
A63GHH56011
ALARMA 63GSD56011
A63GHH56021
ALARMA 63GSD56021
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. DET_DERRAM_Z16 (* DET.DERRAM.Z16 *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
A63TI56001
BLOQUE
63TSD56001
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENCL
CINH
CZP
A63TI56002
BLOQUE
63TSD56002
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENCL
CINH
CZP
A63TI56003
BLOQUE
63TSD56003
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENCL
CINH
CZP
A63TI56004
BLOQUE
63TSD56004
IN
STAT
SH
SL
AL
OZP
DB
TAG
OUT
AVER
ENCL
CINH
CZP
A63TSD56001.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
100.0
0.0
'63TSD56001'
0.5
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
-50.0
A63TSD56001
TANQUE 21-T-04
A63TID56001
A63TFL56001
A63TAL56001
A63TIC56001
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
100.0
0.0
0.5
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
-50.0
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63TSD56002
TANQUE 21-T-04
A63TSD56002.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
'63TSD56002'
A63TID56002
A63TFL56002
A63TAL56002
A63TIC56002
100.0
0.0
0.5
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
-50.0
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63TSD56003
TANQUE 21-T-04
A63TSD56003.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
'63TSD56003'
A63TID56003
A63TFL56003
A63TAL56003
A63TIC56003
100.0
0.0
0.5
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
-50.0
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63TSD56004
TANQUE 21-T-04
A63TSD56004.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
'63TSD56004'
A63TID56004
A63TFL56004
A63TAL56004
A63TIC56004
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. PULS_MCP_Z16 (* PULS.MCP.Z16 *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
A63MIP56001
BLOQUE
63MCP56001
IN
STAT
AH
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63MIP56001
BLOQUE
63MCP56001
IN
STAT
AH
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63MCP56001.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
45.0
'63MCP56001'
A63MFL56001
A63MAH56001
EST. ALARM. 63MCP56001
A63MIC56001
CONF. INH. 63MCP56001
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63MCP56001
TANQUE 21-T-04
45.0
A63MCP56002
TANQUE 21-T-04
A63MCP56002.status
TANQUE 21-T-04
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
'63MCP56002'
A63MFL56002
A63MAH56002
EST. ALARM. 63MCP56002
A63MEH56002
A63MIC56002
CONF. INH. 63MCP56002
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63MEH56001
PULSADORES ZONA
16
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. DI_VALV_DILUV (* DI_VALV_DILUVIO *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
A63HIS05083A
BLOQUE
63HS05083A
IN
STAT
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63HIS05083B
BLOQUE
63HS05083B
IN
STAT
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63PIL05083
BLOQUE
A63PSL05083
IN
STAT
AH
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63HS05083A.status
CORTINAS TANQUE 21T04
'63HS05083A'
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63HS05083A
A63HFL05083A
FALLO LINEA 63HS05083A
A63HAH05083A
EST. ALARMA 63HS05083A
A63HEH05083A
A63HIC05083A
CONF. INH. 63HS05083A
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63HS05083B
A63HS05083B.status
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
'63HS05083B'
A63HFL05083B
FALLO LINEA 63HS05083B
A63HAH05083B
EST. ALARMA 63HS05083B
A63HEH05083B
A63HIC05083B
CONF. INH. 63HS05083B
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
'63PSL05083'
A63PSL05083
TECHO 21-T-04
A63PSL05083.status
TECHO 21-T-04
25.0
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63PFL05083
FALLO LINEA 63PSL05083
A63PEL05083
A63PIC05083
CONF. INH. 63PSL05083
A63PAL05083
EST. ALARMA 63PSL05083
TRATAMIENTO ENTRADAS DIGITALES DE
LAS
VALVULAS DE
DILUVIO
A63PIL05084
BLOQUE
63PSL05084
IN
STAT
AH
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63PIL05084
BLOQUE
63PSL05084
IN
STAT
AH
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
25.0
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63PSL05084
TECHO 21-T-04
A63PSL05084.status
TECHO 21-T-04
'63PSL05084'
A63PFL05084
A63PAL05084
A63PEL05084
A63PIC05084
25.0
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63PSL05085
PLATAFORMA INF. 21-T-04
A63PSL05085.status
PLATAFORMA INF. 21-T-04
'63PSL05085'
A63PFL05085
A63PAL05085
A63PEL05085
A63PIC05085
1. SCS0125 (* FGS *)
1.1.1.1. DI_SIS_POLVO (* DI_SIST_POLVO_21T04 *)
1.1.1.1.1. Source
A63HIS10013AA
BLOQUE
63HS10013AA
IN
STAT
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63HIS10013BA
BLOQUE
63HS10013BA
IN
STAT
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63PIL10013A
BLOQUE
A63PSL10013A
IN
STAT
AH
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63HIS10013BB
BLOQUE
63HS10013BB
IN
STAT
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63PIL10013B
BLOQUE
A63PSL10013B
IN
STAT
AH
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63TIH10013
BLOQUE
63TSH10013
IN
STAT
AH
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63HIS10013BA
BLOQUE
63HS10013BA
IN
STAT
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63TSH10013
21-PSV-04 027A / 21-T-04
A63TSH10013.status
21-PSV-04 027A / 21-T-04
25.0
'63TSH10013'
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63HS10013AA
21-PSV-04 027A/21-T-04
A63HS10013AA.status
21-PSV-04 027A/21-T-04
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
'63HS10013AA'
A63HFL10013AA
FALLO LINEA 63HS10013AA
A63HAH10013AA
EST. ALARMA 63HS10013AA
A63HEH10013AA
A63HIC10013AA
CONF. INH. 63HS10013AA
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63HS10013AB
21-PSV-04 027A/21-T-04
A63HS10013AB.status
21-PSV-04 027A/21-T-04
'63HS10013AB'
A63HFL10013AB
FALLO LINEA 63HS10013AB
A63HAH10013AB
EST. ALARMA 63HS10013AB
A63HEH10013AB
A63HIC10013AB
CONF. INH. 63HS10013AB
25.0
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63PSL10013A
21-PSV-04 027A / 21-T-04
A63PSL10013A.status
21-PSV-04 027A / 21-T-04
'63PSL10013A'
A63PFL10013A
FALLO LINEA 63PSL10013A
A63PAL10013A
EST. ALARMA 63PSL10013A
A63PEL10013A
A63PIC10013A
CONF. INH. 63PSL10013A
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63HS10013BA
21-PSV-04 027A/21-T-04
A63HS10013BA.status
21-PSV-04 027A/21-T-04
'63HS10013BA'
A63HS10013BB
21-PSV-04 027A/21-T-04
A63HS10013BB.status
21-PSV-04 027A/21-T-04
'63HS10013BB'
A63HFL10013BB
FALLO LINEA 63HS10013BB
A63HAH10013BB
EST. ALARMA 63HS10013BB
A63HEH10013BB
A63HIC10013BB
CONF. INH. 63HS10013BB
25.0
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63PSL10013B
21-PSV-04 027A / 21-T-04
A63PSL10013B.status
21-PSV-04 027A / 21-T-04
'63PSL10013B'
A63PFL10013B
FALLO LINEA 63PSL10013B
A63PAL10013B
EST. ALARMA 63PSL10013B
A63PEL10013B
A63PIC10013B
CONF. INH. 63PSL10013B
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63TFL10013
FALLO LINEA 63TSH10013
A63TAH10013
EST.ALARMA 63TSH10013
A63TEH10013
A63TIC10013
CONF. INH. 63TSH10013
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63HFL10013BA
FALLO LINEA 63HS10013BA
A63HAH10013BA
EST. ALARMA 63HS10013BA
A63HEH10013BA
A63HIC10013BA
CONF. INH. 63HS10013BA
TRATAMIENTO DIGITALES SISTEMA
POLVO 21-T-04
A63TIH10014
BLOQUE
63TSH10014
IN
STAT
AH
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63PIL10014A
BLOQUE
A63PSL10014A
IN
STAT
AH
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63HIS10014AA
BLOQUE
63HS10014AA
IN
STAT
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63HIS10014AB
BLOQUE
63HS10014AB
IN
STAT
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63HIS10014BA
BLOQUE
63HS10014BA
IN
STAT
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63HIS10014BB
BLOQUE
63HS10014BB
IN
STAT
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63PIL10014B
BLOQUE
A63PSL10014B
IN
STAT
AH
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63TIH10015
BLOQUE
63TSH10015
IN
STAT
AH
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63HIS10015BA
BLOQUE
63HS10015BA
IN
STAT
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
25.0
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63TSH10014
21-PSV-04 027B / 21-T-04
A63TSH10014.status
21-PSV-04 027B / 21-T-04
'63TSH10014'
A63TFL10014
A63TAH10014
A63TEH10014
A63TIC10014
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
25.0
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63HS10014AA
21-PSV-04 027B/21-T-04
A63HS10014AA.status
21-PSV-04 027B/21-T-04
'63HS10014AA'
A63HFL10014AA
A63HAH10014AA
A63HEH10014AA
A63HIC10014AA
A63HS10014AB
21-PSV-04 027B/21-T-04
A63HS10014AB.status
21-PSV-04 027B/21-T-04
'63HS10014AB'
A63HFL10014AB
A63HAH10014AB
A63HEH10014AB
A63HIC10014AB
A63PSL10014A
21-PSV-04 027B / 21-T-04
A63PSL10014A.status
21-PSV-04 027B / 21-T-04
'63PSL10014A'
A63PFL10014A
A63PAL10014A
A63PEL10014A
A63PIC10014A
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
25.0
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63HFL10014BA
A63HAH10014BA
A63HEH10014BA
A63HIC10014BA
A63HS10014BA
21-PSV-04 027B/21-T-04
A63HS10014BA.status
21-PSV-04 027B/21-T-04
'63HS10014BA'
A63HS10014BB
21-PSV-04 027B/21-T-04
A63HS10014BB.status
21-PSV-04 027B/21-T-04
'63HS10014BB'
A63HFL10014BB
A63HAH10014BB
A63HEH10014BB
A63HIC10014BB
A63PSL10014B
21-PSV-04 027B / 21-T-04
A63PSL10014B.status
21-PSV-04 027B / 21-T-04
'63PSL10014B'
A63PFL10014B
A63PAL10014B
A63PEL10014B
A63PIC10014B
25.0
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63TSH10015
21-PSV-04 027C / 21-T-04
A63TSH10015.status
21-PSV-04 027C / 21-T-04
'63TSH10015'
A63TFL10015
A63TAH10015
A63TEH10015
A63TIC10015
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63HFL10015BA
A63HAH10015BA
A63HEH10015BA
A63HIC10015BA
A63HS10015BA
21-PSV-04 027C/21-T-04
A63HS10015BA.status
21-PSV-04 027C/21-T-04
'63HS10015BA'
A63PIL10015A
BLOQUE
A63PSL10015A
IN
STAT
AH
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63HIS10015AB
BLOQUE
63HS10015AB
IN
STAT
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63HIS10015BB
BLOQUE
63HS10015BB
IN
STAT
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63PIL10015B
BLOQUE
A63PSL10015B
IN
STAT
AH
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63TIH10016
BLOQUE
63TSH10016
IN
STAT
AH
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63HIS10016AA
BLOQUE
63HS10016AA
IN
STAT
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63HIS10016BA
BLOQUE
63HS10016BA
IN
STAT
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63HIS10016BB
BLOQUE
63HS10016BB
IN
STAT
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63HIS10015AA
BLOQUE
63HS10015AA
IN
STAT
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
25.0
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63HS10015AA
21-PSV-04 027C/21-T-04
A63HS10015AA.status
21-PSV-04 027C/21-T-04
'63HS10015AA'
A63HFL10015AA
A63HAH10015AA
A63HEH10015AA
A63HIC10015AA
A63HS10015AB
21-PSV-04 027C/21-T-04
A63HS10015AB.status
21-PSV-04 027C/21-T-04
'63HS10015AB'
A63HFL10015AB
A63HAH10015AB
A63HEH10015AB
A63HIC10015AB
A63PSL10015A
21-PSV-04 027C / 21-T-04
A63PSL10015A.status
21-PSV-04 027C / 21-T-04
'63PSL10015A'
A63PFL10015A
A63PAL10015A
A63PEL10015A
A63PIC10015A
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
25.0
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63HS10015BB
21-PSV-04 027C/21-T-04
A63HS10015BB.status
21-PSV-04 027C/21-T-04
'63HS10015BB'
A63HFL10015BB
A63HAH10015BB
A63HEH10015BB
A63HIC10015BB
A63PSL10015B
21-PSV-04 027C / 21-T-04
A63PSL10015B.status
21-PSV-04 027C / 21-T-04
'63PSL10015B'
A63PFL10015B
A63PAL10015B
A63PEL10015B
A63PIC10015B
25.0
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63TSH10016
21-PSV-04 027D / 21-T-04
A63TSH10016.status
21-PSV-04 027D / 21-T-04
'63TSH10016'
A63TFL10016
A63TAH10016
A63TEH10016
A63TIC10016
A63HS10016AA
21-PSV-04 027D/21-T-04
A63HS10016AA.status
21-PSV-04 027D/21-T-04
'63HS10016AA'
A63HFL10016AA
A63HAH10016AA
A63HEH10016AA
A63HIC10016AA
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63HS10016BA
21-PSV-04 027D/21-T-04
A63HS10016BA.status
21-PSV-04 027D/21-T-04
'63HS10016BA'
A63HFL10016BA
A63HAH10016BA
A63HEH10016BA
A63HIC10016BA
A63HS10016BB
21-PSV-04 027A/21-T-04
A63HS10016BB.status
21-PSV-04 027A/21-T-04
'63HS10016BB'
A63HFL10016BB
A63HAH10016BB
A63HEH10016BB
A63HIC10016BB
A63HIS10016AB
BLOQUE
63HS10016AB
IN
STAT
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63PIL10016A
BLOQUE
A63PSL10016A
IN
STAT
AH
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63PIL10016B
BLOQUE
A63PSL10016B
IN
STAT
AH
OZP
TAG
AVER
ESTH
ENH
CINH
CZP
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
25.0
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
25.0
A63ZPO56001
ORDEN Z16 PRUEBAS
A63ZPC56001
CONF. Z16 PRUEBAS
A63HS10016AB
21-PSV-04 027D/21-T-04
A63HS10016AB.status
21-PSV-04 027D/21-T-04
'63HS10016AB'
A63HFL10016AB
A63HAH10016AB
A63HEH10016AB
A63HIC10016AB
A63PSL10016A
21-PSV-04 027D / 21-T-04
A63PSL10016A.status
21-PSV-04 027D / 21-T-04
'63PSL10016A'
A63PFL10016A
A63PAL10016A
A63PEL10016A
A63PIC10016A
A63PSL10016B
21-PSV-04 027D / 21-T-04
A63PSL10016B.status
21-PSV-04 027D / 21-T-04
'63PSL10016B'
A63PFL10016B
A63PAL10016B
A63PEL10016B
A63PIC10016B


Memoria de planos

PLANOS
2

4

MEMORIA DE PLANOS

Encargado por:
Poblacin: Tarragona
CP: 43002

Elaborado por:
Poblacin: Reus
CP: 43204

PLANOS
3

1 DISTRIBUCIN DEL ARMARIO 86-FGS-10F/11F ........................................................ 5
2 DISTRIBUCIN DEL ARMARIO 86-FGS-10R/11R ....................................................... 6
5 PLANOS DIMENSIONALES FGS FIR-1 .............................................................................. 9
6 ALIMENTACIN 230V AC LINEA 1 Y LINEA 2 ............................................................. 10
7 ALIMENTACIN EXTERNA LINEA NO SEGURA ........................................................ 11
8 ALIMENTACIN 24V CC SISTEMA FGS FIR-1 .............................................................. 12
9 ALIMENTACIN 24V CC SISTEMA FGS FIR-1 .............................................................. 13
10 ALIMENTACIN 24V CC SISTEMA FGS FIR-1 ............................................................ 14
11 ALARMA DE BLOQUES TERMINALES ......................................................................... 15
12 TIERRAS DEL SISTEMA FGS FIR-1 ................................................................................ 16
13 DISTRIBUCIN DE TIERRAS FGS FIR-1 PARA SISTEMA PROSAFE-RS ............. 17
PLANOS
4

14 LEYENDA ESQUEMAS INTERCONEXIN ................................................................... 18
15 LEYENDA ESQUEMAS INTERCONEXIN ................................................................... 19


Presupuesto

PRESUPUESTO
2

5

PRESUPUESTO

Encargado por:
Poblacin: Tarragona
CP: 43002

Elaborado por:
Poblacin: Reus
CP: 43204

PRESUPUESTO
3

1 PRESUPUESTO ........................................................................................................................ 4
1.1 ALCANCE .................................................................................................................................. 4
1.2 TRMINOS Y CONDICIONES ..................................................................................................... 4
1.2.1 TRMINOS DE VALIDEZ .......................................................................................................... 4
1.2.2 PRECIOS .................................................................................................................................. 4
1.2.3 CONDICIONES DE ENVO ......................................................................................................... 4
1.2.4 GARANTAS ............................................................................................................................ 4
1.2.5 FABRICANTE DEL SISTEMA DEL SISTEMA DE PARO DE EMERGENCIA ................................... 5
1.2.6 CONDICIONES DE PAGO .......................................................................................................... 5
1.2.7 PLAZO DE ENTREGA ............................................................................................................... 5
1.3 PRESUPUESTO TCNICO .......................................................................................................... 5
1.3.1 SISTEMA DE PARO DE EMERGENCIA CON CONTROLADOR PROSAFE-RS ............................... 5
1.4 PRESUPUESTO COMERCIAL ..................................................................................................... 6

PRESUPUESTO
4
1 Presupuesto
1.1 Alcance
El siguiente presupuesto esta basado en la configuracin completa del sistema de
seguridades, incluyendo los armarios del sistema, cableado interno de las seales en el
armario, bloques de rels, CPU, nodos y equipo para la configuracin y mantenimiento del
sistema.

1.2 Trminos y condiciones
El propsito de este apartado es definir los trminos y condiciones que regirn la
propuesta de oferta. En la cotizacin se han incluido precios unitarios y cantidades.

1.2.1 Trminos de validez
Esta oferta es vlida durante 90 das, si no se realiza un contrato de acuerdo con la
actual propuesta en este perodo de validez, la propuesta expira automticamente, a no ser
que el cliente pida una prrroga de dicho plazo de validez, en tal caso se reserva el derecho
de modificar total o parcialmente la propuesta incluyendo las especificaciones del sistema
de control.

1.2.2 Precios
Los precios incluidos en esta oferta son fijos y no revisables durante el periodo de
validez de la oferta.

1.2.3 Condiciones de envo
Se incluyen en la oferta transporte y seguro hasta planta.

1.2.4 Garantas
Los materiales estn garantizados de todo defecto de fabricacin por un periodo de
18 meses desde la puesta en marcha de los equipos, o de 24 meses desde la entrega del
material.

PRESUPUESTO
5
1.2.5 Fabricante del sistema del Sistema de Paro de Emergencia
Los equipos estn fabricados por:
Yokogawa Electric Corporation (Japan)
EMASA S. L. (Reus): Montaje del armario y suministrador de componentes
elctricos

1.2.6 Condiciones de pago
Se proponen las siguientes condiciones de pago mediante cheque o transferencia a 90
das f.f.:
40% a la aceptacin del pedido.
60% a la finalizacin de pruebas FAT y envo del material a planta.

1.2.7 Plazo de entrega
El plazo de entrega ser de 24-26 semanas desde la fecha del pedido.

1.3 Presupuesto tcnico
1.3.1 Sistema de Fuego y gas con controlador Prosafe-RS
En la presente oferta se ha valorado el sistema Yokogawa para el proyecto del
sistema de fuego y gas para un tanque en una planta de regasificacin de gas natural.
Sistema ofertado compuesto por:
Sistema de Fuego y gas (FGS)
Interfaz hombre/mquina
Paquetes de software del sistema
Ingeniera, configuracin, documentacin y gestin
Pruebas FAT (Factory Acceptance Test)
Puesta en marcha
PRESUPUESTO
6
1.4 Presupuesto comercial
INTERFAZ HOMBRE/MQUINA

PLATAFORMA PC

ESTACIN DE INGENIERA
MODELO: PC DE SOBREMESA

Estacin de ingeniera:
Modelo: HP Convertible minitower 1 1.586,25 1.586,25
Procesador Intel Core
TM
2 Duo
2 GB memoria RAM estndar
500 GB de disco duro
Grabadora DVD+/-RW 16x
Sistema operativo Windows XP SP 3 (licencia OEM)
Microsoft Office Edicin Pyme 2007

CONEXIONES CON ORDENADOR

Tarjeta interface (Tipo PCI) 1 548,83 548,83
Conexin V-Net redundante
Modelo: VF701

SUBTOTAL INTERFACE HOMBRE/MQUINA 2.135,08

PRESUPUESTO
7

HARDWARE ESTNDAR

CONTROLADOR DE CAMPO

Unidad de control de seguridad 1 9.216,15 9.216,15
Modelo: SSC10D-S2121
CPU red, V-Net y bus ESB redundantes
Fuente de alimentacin 220V AC

NODO DE INTERFACE

Nodo para bus ESB redundante (Prosafe-RS) 4 2.713,23 10.852,92
Modelo: SNB10D-223
Fuente de alimentacin redundante 220V AC
Hasta 8 Mdulos E/S
/CU2N: Con conectores ESB bus 3 78,14 234,42
/CU2T: Con terminadores ESB bus 1 78,14 78,14

MDULOS DE E/S ANALGICAS (AISLADOS)

Mdulo de entradas analgicas Prosafe-RS 12 1.587,11 19.045,32
16 Canales (4-20mA), aislamiento colectivo
Modelo: SAI143-H03
/A4D00: Con bloque red. de terminales atornillables 6 121,00 726,00

MDULO DE E/S DIGITALES

Mdulo de entradas digitales Prosafe-RS 8 402,31 3.218,48
16 Canales Aislamiento colectivo
Modelo: SDV144-S13
/B4D00: Con bloque red. de terminales atornillables 4 121,06 484,24

Adaptador para comprobacin de cableado en entradas dig. 3 108,25 324,75
Deteccin de circuito abierto en seales off
Modelo: SCB100-S0 (8 unidades)

PRESUPUESTO
8

Deteccin de circuito abierto en seales on

Mdulo de salidas digitales Prosafe-RS 6 798,74 4.792,44
16 salidas Aislamiento colectivo
Modelo: SDV541-S23

Mdulo de salidas digitales Prosafe-RS 4 716,07 2.864,28
Modulo: SDV531-S23

MDULO DE COMUNICACIN CON NODOS

Mdulo de conexin bus ESB para Prosafe-RS 2 1.416,93 2.833,86
Modelo: SEC401-11

PLACAS CIEGAS

Placa ciega para mdulos de E/S para Prosafe-RS 10 5,53 55,30
Modelo: SDCV01

TERMINALES Y RELES

Rel de seguridad (1 contacto NO y 1 contacto NC) 16 100,00 1.600,00
Modelo: RS 508

MotherBoard entradas analgicas 1 1.330,98 1.330,98
16 canales Seguridad intrnseca
Modelo: MB-RS-AI16-KS-185838

Bloque terminal entradas analgicas 5 120,00 600,00
16 canales No seguridad intrnseca
Modelo: TB-RS-AI16-KS-186102

Bloque terminal entradas digitales 3 120,00 360,00
Modelo: TB-RS-DI16-AKB-185847
PRESUPUESTO
9

Bloque terminal salida digitales 2 296,50 593,00
Modelo: TB-RS-DO8-AKB-185849

Bloque terminal salida digitales 3 296,50 889,50
Modelo: TB-RS-DO16-AKB-204061

SUBTOTAL HARDWARE ESTNDAR 60.424.53

HARDWARE COMPLEMENTARIO Y CABINAS

CABINAS

Cabina de doble acceso para montaje de controlador 2 7.102,03 14.204,06
Dimensiones (Alt.xAnch.xProf.): 2000(+100)x600x800 mm
Modelo: PS Rittal

HARDWARE COMPLEMENTARIO

Fuente de alimentacin 24V DC 20 A 2 300,13 600,26
Modelo: QUINT-PS/ 1AC/24DC/20

Magnetotrmico 20 A 2P 2 46,00 92,00
Modelo: C60HC220

Magnetotrmico 16 A 2P 3 46,00 138,00
Modelo: C60HC216

Magnetotrmico 6A 2P 22 37,00 814,00
Modelo: C60HC206

SUBTOTAL HARDWARE COMPLEMENTARIO 15.848,32

PRESUPUESTO
10

CABLES DE INTERCONEXIN

CABLES DEL SISTEMA

Cable V-Net coaxial (10Base2) 4 103,60 414,40
Modelo: YCB141-M050 (longitud 50 m)

Terminador del bus V-net 10Base2 4 23,00 92,00
Modelo: YCB148

Convertidor de bus V-Net 10Base2 a 10Base5 4 21,00 84,00
Modelo: YCB149

Conector en T para consola HIS 2 41,09 82,18
Modelo: YCB146

Cable ESB bus 8 84,50 676,00
Modelo: YCB301-C100 (longitud 1m)

CABLES DE SEALES

Cable de seal DI/DO 16 canales (50 pines) 12 66,66 799,92
Longitud del cable: 4 m
Modelo: FLK 50-PA/EZ-DR/KS/400/YUC

Cable de seal DO 8 canales (50 pines) 4 72,15 288,60
Modelo: FLK 50-PA/EZ-DR/KS/200/YOC

Cable de seal AI 16 canales (40 pines) 10 66,66 666,60
Modelo: FLK 40-PA/EZ-DR/KS/400/YUC

PRESUPUESTO
11

Cable de seal AI 16 canales (50 pines) 2 150,00 300,00
Modelo: 2866776

SUBTOTAL CABLES INTERCONEXIN 3.403,70

PAQUETES DE SOFTWARE

SOFTWARE PROSAFE-RS

CD-ROM software Prosafe-RS 1 61,00 61,00
Modelo: CHSKM02-C11

Licencia de identificacin del sistema 1 135,00 135,00
Modelo: CHSDM01

Paquete de generacin y mantenimiento del sistema 1 4.936,15 4.936,15
Modelo: CHS5100-S11

Paquete de visualizacin SOE 1 1.486,17 1.486,17
Modelo: CHS2100-S11

Paquete de interfaz OPC para SOE 1 356,11 356,11
Modelo: CHS2200-S11

Manual de instrucciones electrnico 1 311,09 311,09
Modelo: CHS5400-S11

SUBTOTAL PAQUETES DE SOFTWARE 7.285,52

PRESUPUESTO
12

INGENIERA Y CONFIGURACIN

INGENIERA DEL SISTEMA

Diseo del hardware del sistema 1 24.616,68 24.616,68
Diseo de cabinas en funcin del reparto de seales
Clculos de consumos elctricos y potencia disipada
Definicin de filosofa de tierras
Diseo de la base de datos del sistema (E/S fsicas)
Definicin de seales de comunicacin con subsistemas
Definicin de filosofas de control y enclavamientos
Definicin de overviews y grupos de control
Implementacin en el sistema de los puntos anteriores
Generacin del protocolo de pruebas FAT de la aplicacin
Nota: Los puntos anteriores estn basados en la recepcin
por parte de la ingeniera de este proyecto de la documentacin
completa en cuanto a P&IDs, lista de instrumentos, rangos, etc
Todas las entradas y salidas definidas en la especificacin han
sido incluidas en el precio del sistema, incluyendo las reservas
requeridas.
En caso de que sean aadidas nuevas seales al sistema, se
alterar el precio en un costo adicional que ser calculado en
funcin de las horas que resulten de la nueva configuracin de:
Lazos extra
Aadir datos a secuencias existentes
Instrumentos nuevos

SUBTOTAL INGENIERIA Y CONFIGURACIN 24.616,68

DIRECCIN DEL PROYECTO

Gestin de proyecto 1 1.384,52 1.384,52
Administracin del proyecto
Reuniones de seguimiento con el cliente
Reuniones en planta

SUBTOTAL DIRECCIN DEL PROYECTO 1.384,52

PRESUPUESTO
13

DOCUMENTACIN DEL PROYECTO

DOCUMENTACIN SOFTWARE

Documentacin referente a: 1 2.333,32 2.333,32
Carga de mdulos de E/S
Grficos
Lista de Tags
Parmetros del sistema
Lista de clculos

DOCUMENTACIN HARDWARE

Manuales de instrucciones del hardware para
cada tem especfico 1 1.198,97 1.198,97

Dibujos
Manual de instalacin
Se suministrarn las copias necesarias en CD
Certificado del TEST del sistema
Documento de la orden de trabajo

SUBTOTAL DOCUMENTACIN DEL PROYECTO 3.535,29

FAT / PUESTA EN MARCHA EN FRO

Inspeccin y chequeo del equipo en oficinas de la ingeniera 1 2.723,25 2.723,35
5 das laborales (estimacin); 8 horas/da

Supervisin de la instalacin y servicios de la ingeniera en 1 4.203,47 4.203,47
planta del cliente
5 das laborables (estimacin); 8 horas/das

SUBTOTAL FAT / PUESTAN EN MARCHA EN FRO 6.926,82

PRESUPUESTO
14

EMBALAJES, TRANSPORTE Y SEGUROS

Sistema de embalado y cargado sobre camin en planta 1 1.358,00 1.358,00
del cliente

SUBTOTAL EMBALAJES, TRANSPORTE Y SEGUROS 1.358,00

PUESTA EN MARCHA EN CALIENTE

Incluye bsicamente:

10 das laborables (8h/da) en la planta del cliente 1 7.600,00 7.600,00
Trabajos a realizar por un ingeniero de proyecto

Tarifa para jornada laboral de 8 horas (/da) 525,00
(no incluye ni dietas ni transporte)
Hora extra trabajada 83,50
Hora extra nocturna / festiva 102,15

SUBTOTAL PUESTA EN MARCHA EN CALIENTE 7.600,00

REPUESTOS PUESTA EN MARCHA

Mdulo de entradas digitales Prosafe-RS 1 402,31 402,31
16 Canales Aislamiento colectivo
Modelo: SDV144-S13
/B4D00: Con bloque red. de terminales atornillables 1 121,06 121,06

Deteccin de circuito abierto en seales off

Deteccin de circuito abierto en seales on

PRESUPUESTO
15

Mdulo de salidas digitales Prosafe-RS 1 798,74 728,74
Modelo: SDV541-S23

Mdulo de salidas digitales Prosafe-RS 1 716,07 716,07
Modulo: SDV531-S23

SUBTOTAL REPUESTOS PUESTA EN MARCHA 2.184,68
PRESUPUESTO
16

RESUMEN DE PRECIOS

HARDWARE / SOFTWARE DEL SISTEMA

1 Interfaz hombre/mquina 2.135,08
2 Hardware estndar 60.424,53
3 Hardware complementario y cabinas 15.848,32
4 Cables de interconexin 3.403,70
5 Paquetes de software 7.285,52

TOTAL HARDWARE / SOFTWARE DEL SISTEMA 89.097,15

SERVICIOS DE INGENIERIA / MONTAJE / PUESTA EN MARCHA

6 Ingeniera y configuracin 24.616,68
7 Direccin del proyecto 1.384,52
8 Documentacin del proyecto 3.535,29
9 FAT /Puesta en marcha en fro 6.926,82
10 Embalaje, transporte y seguros 1.358,00
11 Puesta en marcha en caliente 7.600,00

TOTAL SERVICIOS DE INGENIERIA /MONTAJE / PUESTA EN MARCHA 45.421,31

PRECIO TOTAL PROYECTO 134.516,46

OPCIONES

12 Repuestos puesta en marcha 2.184,68

PRECIO TOTAL CON OPCIONES 136.701,14


Pliego de condiciones

PLIEGO DE CONDICIONES
2

6
Sistema de deteccin de fuego y gas para una ampliacin de una

Encargado por:
Poblacin: Tarragona
CP: 43002

Elaborado por:
Poblacin: Reus
CP: 43204

3

1 PLIEGO DE CONDICIONES .................................................................................................. 4
1.1 CONDICIONES GENERALES ..................................................................................................... 4
1.1.1 INTRODUCCIN ...................................................................................................................... 4
1.1.2 TRMINOS DE VALIDEZ .......................................................................................................... 4
1.1.3 DOCUMENTOS DEL PROYECTO ............................................................................................... 4
1.1.4 REGLAMENTOS Y NORMAS ..................................................................................................... 5
1.1.5 MODIFICACIONES EN LA INSTALACIN .................................................................................. 5
1.1.6 MATERIALES .......................................................................................................................... 5
1.1.7 INDICACIN DE TRABAJOS Y SUMINISTROS ........................................................................... 6
1.1.8 RESPONSABLE PERSONAL ...................................................................................................... 6
1.1.9 CONDICIONES DE ENTREGA .................................................................................................... 6
1.1.10 PLAZOS DE ENTREGA ........................................................................................................... 6
1.1.11 FUERZAS MAYORES .............................................................................................................. 7
1.1.12 DOCUMENTACIN FINAL ...................................................................................................... 7
1.2 CONDICIONES ECONMICAS ................................................................................................... 7
1.2.1 CONDICIONES DE PAGO .......................................................................................................... 7
1.2.2 PRECIOS .................................................................................................................................. 7
1.2.3 DEFECTOS EN LA INSTALACIN ............................................................................................. 8
1.2.4 SUSPENSIN /RESTRASOS ...................................................................................................... 8
1.2.5 CANCELACIN........................................................................................................................ 8
1.3 PRUEBAS E INSPECCIONES ...................................................................................................... 8
1.3.1 F.A.T. (FACTORY ACCEPTANCE TEST) .................................................................................. 8
1.3.2 S.A.T. (SITE ACCEPTANCE TEST) .......................................................................................... 9
1.3.3 GARANTAS ............................................................................................................................ 9

4
1 Pliego de condiciones
1.1 Condiciones Generales
1.1.1 Introduccin
El presente proyecto desarrolla la configuracin completa del sistema de seguridades,
incluyendo hardware y software para una ampliacin de una planta regasificador.

1.1.2 Trminos de validez
Esta oferta es vlida durante 90 das, si no se realiza un contrato de acuerdo con la
actual propuesta en este perodo de validez, la propuesta expira automticamente, a no ser
que el cliente pida una prrroga de dicho plazo de validez, en tal caso se reserva el derecho
de modificar total o parcialmente la propuesta incluyendo las especificaciones del sistema
de control.

1.1.3 Documentos del Proyecto
El presente proyecto consta de los siguientes documentos:
Memoria Descriptiva
Memoria de Clculo
Memoria de Planos
Presupuesto
Pliego de Condiciones
Se entienden por documentos contractuales aquellos documentos incorporados por
contrato y que son de obligado cumplimiento, excepto aquellas modificaciones
debidamente autorizadas por la direccin del mismo. Estos documentos son los Planos,
Pliego de condiciones y Presupuesto.
Solo los documentos contractuales constituyen la base del contrato. Por lo tanto, el
contratista no podr realizar o alegar modificaciones de las condiciones de Contrato en
base a los datos contenidos en los documentos informativos, excepto que estos datos
figuren en algn documento contractual.
El contratista ser el responsable de los posibles fallos que se puedan derivar por
mala o insuficiente informacin recibida.

5

En caso de contradicciones entre la documentacin entregada, ser responsabilidad el
contratista la informacin puntual al director del proyecto a fin de subsanar los mismos en
un plazo no superior a siete das de su deteccin. Aquello que haya sido nombrado en el
Pliego de Condiciones y no en los planos o viceversa, tendr que ser ejecutado como si
hubiese estado expuesto en ambos documentos, siempre que a juicio del director del
proyecto quede suficientemente definido en cuanto a unidades de obra y estas tengan
precio en el contrato.
1.1.4 Reglamentos y normas
Todas las unidades de la instalacin se ejecutaran cumpliendo las prescripciones de
los reglamentos de Seguridad y Normas Tcnicas, que son de obligado cumplimiento para
este tipo de instalaciones, tanto dentro del mbito estatal, autonmico y municipal como
todas las otras establecidas en el proyecto.

1.1.5 Modificaciones en la instalacin
El contratista realizar todos los planteamientos particulares que sean necesarios para
la correcta ejecucin de las modificaciones establecidas, las cuales debern ser
previamente aprobadas por la direccin del proyecto. El contratista tendr que realizar
todos aquellos puntos que la direccin considere oportunos para el acabado correcto de las
diferentes modificaciones.
Todos los materiales, equipos y mano de obra necesarios para la ejecucin de la
modificacin corrern a cuenta del contratista.

1.1.6 Materiales
Todos los materiales utilizados sern de primera calidad y cumplirn las
especificaciones definidas en las hojas tcnicas de proyecto, normas tcnicas generales o
en este pliego de condiciones.
El contratista entregara a la propiedad previamente a su instalacin, los certificados
de los materiales preceptivos de instalarse. En caso de existir contraindicaciones u omisin
en los documentos del proyecto, el contratista tiene la obligacin de avisar al tcnico que
ejerza de Director de Obra durante la Puesta en Marcha, quien decidir al respecto. En
ningn caso podr ser instalado cualquier material sin la autorizacin de la direccin del
proyecto.
Cualquier cambio por incumplimiento por parte del contratista de las
especificaciones establecidas en el proyecto, no recaern bajo ningn concepto sobre la
direccin del mismo, sino que corrern a cargo de la empresa contratada.

6
1.1.7 Indicacin de Trabajos y suministros
Ningn equipo ni servicio no indicado y cubierto expresamente por la actual oferta
podr considerarse como integrante de sta, pudiendo ser considerador y cotizados bajo
peticin del Cliente.

1.1.8 Responsable personal
El contratista nombrara un responsable de obra con autoridad sobre sus trabajadores.
Dicho responsable deber ejercer de recurso preventivo, por lo que deber disponer de la
formacin necesaria para dicha funcin. El responsable de obra recibir, tramitara las
instrucciones y ordenes del tcnico Director de Obra.
El contratista dispondr de suficiente personal cualificado en obra para la ejecucin
de la misma. Estos operarios tendrn aptitudes y experiencia contrastada para ejecutar su
trabajo.
El contratista esta obligado a separar de la obra a todo aquel personal que segn el
Tcnico Director, no cumpla sus obligaciones, haga el trabajo defectuosamente, no cumpla
las medidas de seguridad establecidas o que con su comportamiento ponga en peligro la
seguridad y salud de los de mas trabajadores.
El contratista estar obligado a mantener una continuidad en lo que refiere a su
personal en obra a fin del buen transcurso de la misma.

1.1.9 Condiciones de entrega
El FGS propuesto ser entregado al Cliente en la localizacin anteriormente
mencionada, excluyendo descarga y transporte a Sala de racks.
Una vez finalizada la ejecucin de la obra, se formalizara la recepcin provisional de
la obra, con el consecuente levantamiento de acta y firma por parte del tcnico Director, el
contratista y la propiedad.
En caso de no ser admitida la obra, se har constar en el acta, juntamente con las
medidas que deber tomar el contratista para la subsanacin de las anomalas detectadas,
juntamente con el plazo establecido para la subsanacin de las mismas.
Es preceptivo de cualquier pago o adelanto la aceptacin de la obra por parte de la
propiedad.
La propuesta podr incluir F.A.T., S.A.T., supervisin de la instalacin y puesta en
marcha. Al finalizar S.A.T. el FGS propuesto pasara a ser propiedad del Cliente.

1.1.10 Plazos de entrega
Se establecer un calendario de actividades conjuntamente con el Cliente, que
permita gestionar de la mejor manera posible el proyecto, bajo los diferentes criterios y
comn acuerdo. El plazo de entrega ser de 22-24 semanas desde la fecha del pedido.

7
1.1.11 Fuerzas mayores
El suministrador no ser responsable de cualquier prdida, deterioro, detencin o
retraso debido a fuego, huelgas, autoridad civil y/o militar, insurreccin, revueltas o
cualquier otra causa fuera de su control razonable.

1.1.12 Documentacin final
La empresa contratante esta obligada a suministrar a la propiedad dos copias de toda
la documentacin generadas por este proyecto en papel y las que sean necesarias en CD,
todas en castellano y en un plazo mximo de dos semanas de la firma del final de obra.
Formarn parte imprescindible de dicha documentacin:
Certificados de calidad de todos los materiales empleados
Certificaciones de las pruebas realizadas por organismos de control
Descripcin detallada de las modificaciones implementadas a nivel de
software.
Documentacin generada como consecuencia de cambios o modificaciones al
proyecto base e implementadas en la unidad.
Se entregar al cliente un juego completo de Manuales de Instruccin en ingls. El
precio cotizado para documentacin puede ser alterado en funcin del nmero de copias
y/o composicin a entregar.

1.2 Condiciones econmicas
1.2.1 Condiciones de pago
Se proponen las siguientes condiciones de pago mediante cheque o transferencia a 90
das f.f.:
40% a la aceptacin del pedido.
60% a la finalizacin de pruebas F.A.T. y envo del material a planta.

1.2.2 Precios
Los precios indicados incluyen Impuestos, transportes y seguros hasta sus
instalaciones. El impuesto IVA (en el porcentaje legal vigente) queda excluido de los
mismos.

8
1.2.3 Defectos en la instalacin
Cuando el contratista halle cualquier unidad de obra defectuosa o que no se ajuste a
los establecido en el proyecto o pliego de condiciones, esta obligado a consultar al respecto
al director de obra, quien fijara el procedimiento a seguir.

1.2.4 Suspensin /Restrasos
En caso de que el contratista requiera, despus de establecido el contrato, una
suspensin del trabajo y/o variacin en el plazo de entrega, y que se acepte dicha
modificacin, se reserva el derecho a pedir al contratista que le compense
econmicamente, y el contratista acepta cumplirlo, por todos aquellos costos directos y/o
indirectos a esta demora o suspensin.

1.2.5 Cancelacin
En el supuesto de que el contratista, despus de establecido el contrato, cancele su
pedido, se aplicar la siguiente estructura de cargos:
Hardware
Hardware estndar de Yokogawa
Cancelacin anterior a las especificaciones de fabricacin: sin cargo. A partir de las
especificaciones de fabricacin y hasta la fecha de entrega o posterior: costo prorrateado en
funcin de las semanas transcurridas desde el pedido, con un mnimo del 25% y un
mximo del 100%.
Se presentarn facturas con cargo a los trabajos desempeados conforme al precio
ofertado en la actual propuesta.

1.3 Pruebas e Inspecciones
1.3.1 F.A.T. (Factory Acceptance Test)
Las pruebas F.A.T. se realizarn en las dependencias del proveedor. Se probarn los
siguientes conceptos:
El 100% de las seales montadas en la cabina
Las comunicaciones entre la Estacin de ingeniera y el controlador de
seguridad Prosafe-RS.
Las comunicaciones externas posibles en funcin de los equipos de otros,
disponibles para las pruebas.
La lgica implementada y sus actuaciones fsicas mediante simuladores de
seal.

9
Una vez realizadas adecuadamente estas pruebas, el contratista firmar el Protocolo
de pruebas F.A.T. a efecto de aceptacin de las pruebas y liberar los equipos para realizar
el envo.

1.3.2 S.A.T. (Site Acceptance Test)
Las S.A.T. sern unas pruebas condensadas de las F.A.T. realizadas en la planta del
Cliente de idntica forma a la realizada en las F.A.T. Probando el cableado hasta campo en
su actuacin.

1.3.3 Garantas
Los materiales estn garantizados de todo defecto de fabricacin por un periodo de
18 meses desde la puesta en marcha de los equipos, o de 24 meses desde la entrega del
material.
Si el equipo ofertado en este proyecto se utiliza y/o modifica de forma no aprobada
por escrito por el suministrador, cualquier causa derivada de tal actuacin no estar
cubierta por la garanta. El cliente deber responsabilizarse del uso adecuado.
Esta garanta no es aplicable a equipos, partes y piezas no suministradas por el
suministrador, en dichos equipos, materiales y piezas ser aplicable la garanta indicada
por su fabricante.
El sistema deber permanecer bajo las condiciones ambientales especificadas en la
Memoria Descriptiva.


Anexos

ANEXOS
2

7

ANEXOS

Encargado por:
Poblacin: Tarragona
CP: 43002

Elaborado por:
Poblacin: Reus
CP: 43204

ANEXOS
3

1 ANEXOS ..................................................................................................................................... 4
1.1 DETECTOR DE GAS .................................................................................................................... 4
1.2 DETECTOR DE LLAMA ............................................................................................................... 5
1.3 DETECTOR DE DERRAME........................................................................................................... 6
1.4 PULSADOR DE EMERGENCIA ..................................................................................................... 7
1.5 LMPARA DE EMERGENCIA ....................................................................................................... 8
1.6 SIRENA DE EMERGENCIA ......................................................................................................... 9

ANEXOS
4
1 Anexos
1.1 Detector de gas

Instructions 95-8526
Infrared Hydrocarbon Gas Detector
PointWatch Eclipse
Model PIRECL
8.1 2/10 95-8526
APPLICATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
OPERATION OVERVIEW. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Theory of Operation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Detectable Gases. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Data Logging Capability. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Optional Third Party Addressable Modules . . . . . 2
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
INSTALLATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Identifcation of Flammable Vapor(s) to be
Detected . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8
Identifcation of Detector Mounting Locations . . . 8
Physical Installation Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . 8
24 Vdc Power Supply Requirements . . . . . . . . . . 9
Wiring Cable Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
Power Wiring Size and Maximum Length. . . . . . . 9
Optional Relays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Wiring Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
Remote Calibration Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10
DESCRIPTION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Internal Magnetic Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
HART Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Multicolor LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Weather Baffle Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
History Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Remote Calibration Option. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Special Applications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
OPERATION. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Factory Default Settings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Operating Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
4-20 ma Current Loop Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Fault Indication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
STARTUP . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 22
PIRECL Start-up/Commissioning Checklists . . . 22
CALIBRATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Calibration Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Additional Calibration Notes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 23
Calibration Initiation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Detailed Calibration Procedure using Magnetic
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Time Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Calibration Abort . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Routine Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Weather Baffle Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Optics Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
O-Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Protective Caps and Covers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
DEVICE REPAIR AND RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
ORDERING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
PointWatch Eclipse Detector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Calibration Equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Spare Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29
APPENDIX A HART COMMUNICATION. . . . . . . . . A-1
APPENDIX B MODBUS COMMUNICATION . . . . . B-1
APPENDIX C E Q PREMIER MODEL. . . . . . . . . . . C-1
APPENDIX D DETECTION OF OTHER GASES. . D-1
APPENDIX E WARRANTY. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . E-1
APPENDIX F CONTROL DRAWING. . . . . . . . . . . . F-1
Table of Contents
IMPORTANT
Be sure to read and understand the entire
instruction manual before installing or operating
the gas detection system. This product is intended
to provide early warning of the presence of a
fammable or explosive gas mixture. Proper device
installation, operation, and maintenance is required
to ensure safe and effective operation. If this
equipment is used in a manner not specifed in
this manual, safety protection may be impaired.
APPLICATION
The Pointwatch Eclipse
Model PIRECL is a diffusion-

based, point-type infrared gas detector that provides
continuous monitoring of combustible hydrocarbon gas
concentrations in the range of 0 to 100% LFL.
Three basic congurations are available:
4-20 mA output with HART communication protocol
and RS-485 MODBUS communications.
4-20 mA output with HART communication protocol
and RS-485 MODBUS communications, with two
alarm relays and one fault relay.
Eagle Quantum Premier (EQP) compatible version
(no analog or relay outputs).
All units are powered from 24 volts DC, and are furnished
with an onboard "status indication" LED, an internal
magnetic calibration switch and an external calibration
line for use with the optional PIRTB remote calibration
termination box.
The Pointwatch Eclipse is ideal for use in harsh outdoor
environments and is certied for use in Class I, Division
1, and Zone 1 hazardous areas. It can be used as a
stand-alone detector, or as part of a larger facility
protection system using other Det-Tronics equipment
such as the FlexVu
UD10 Universal Display Unit, the

U9500H Inniti Transmitter, the R8471H Controller, or
the Eagle Quantum Premier Fire and Gas Detection/
Releasing System.
OPERATION OVERVIEW
THEORY OF OPERATION
Flammable hydrocarbon gases diffuse through the weather
bafe assembly into the internal measurement chamber,
which is illuminated by an infrared (IR) source. As the
IR passes through the gas within the chamber, certain
IR wavelengths are absorbed by the gas, while other
IR wavelengths are not. The amount of IR absorption is
determined by the concentration of the hydrocarbon gas.
A pair of optical detectors and associated electronics
measure the absorption. The change in intensity of the
absorbed light (active signal) is measured relative to the
intensity of light at a non-absorbed wavelength (reference
signal). See Figure 1. The microprocessor computes
the gas concentration and converts the value into a 4 to
20 milliampere current output or digital process variable
signal, which is then communicated to external control
and annunciation systems.
INSTRUCTIONS
Infrared Hydrocarbon Gas Detector
PointWatch Eclipse
Model PIRECL
8.1 Detector Electronics Corporation 2010 2/10 95-8526
2 95-8526 8.1
DETECTABLE GASES
Eclipse is capable of detecting many hydrocarbon
gases and vapors. Field selectable standard settings
are provided for methane, ethane, propane, butane,
ethylene, and propylene. Gas type and other operational
parameters are selected via digital communications.
Factory default setting is methane.
OUTPUTS
Standard
The standard version provides an isolated/non-isolated
4-20 mA current loop for connection to analog input
devices.
Optional Relays
An optional relay output board providing two
programmable alarm relay outputs and one fault
relay output can be factory installed with the standard
version. All relays are sealed and provide form C (NO/
NC) contacts. The high and low alarm relay settings are
programmable and can be set for latching or non-latching
operation. The low alarm cannot be set above the high
alarm threshold. Alarm conguration can be done with
the HART or MODBUS interface. The onboard multicolor
LED indicates a LOW alarm condition via a ashing red
color, and a HIGH alarm condition via a steady red color.
The Eclipse internal magnetic switch or HART Field
Communicator can be used to reset latched alarms. A
short-duration magnetic switch activation of 1 second
will reset latched alarms. Holding the magnetic switch
closed for 2 seconds will start the calibration sequence.
The external calibration line will not reset latched alarm
relays.
When the optional relay output board is specied, the
PIRECLs approval rating is Ex d only.
NOTE
Refer to Alarm Relaysin the Specifcations section
of this manual for important information regarding
alarm relays.
EQP Version
The Eagle Quantum Premier model provides proprietary
digital signals that are compatible with the EQ Premier
network (LON) only. No analog 4-20 mA or RS-485
MODBUS signal outputs are provided. The optional
onboard HART communication port is operational,
but is not recommended for programming use. All
programming of the EQP PIRECL detector should be
accomplished using the S3 point conguration software.
Refer to the EQP appendix within this manual for additional
information.
DATA LOGGING CAPABILITY
Non-volatile memory is provided to save the 10 most
recent calibrations, alarm/fault events, and minimum/
maximum operating temperature history. An hour meter
(running operational hours since startup) is provided to
record operating service time and to give an indication
of the relative time between events. This information is
accessible using HART, MODBUS communication, or
EQP system software.
OPTIONAL THIRD PARTY ADDRESSABLE MODULES
The PIRECL is electrically compatible with third party
addressable modules, provided the module ts within
the PIRECL wiring compartment. Whenever a third party
addressable module is installed, the PIRECLs Ex e rating
and FM Approval are void, and only the Ex d rating is valid.
Installation of a third party addressable module requires a
specially labeled PIRECL model to ensure valid product
approvals.
SIGNAL PROCESSING
ELECTRONICS
GAS
CONCENTRATION
(LEL)
IR SOURCE
IR TRANSPARENT
WINDOW
OPTICAL
BEAM SPLITTER
MEASUREMENT
SIGNAL DETECTOR
REFERENCE
SIGNAL DETECTOR
OPTICAL
FILTERS
PERMEABLE
GAS CELL
SAPPHIRE
MIRROR
Figure 1Measurement Scheme for Infrared Gas Detector
3 95-8526 8.1
SPECIFICATIONS
INPUT VOLTAGE (All Models)
24 Vdc nominal. Operating range is 18 to 32 Vdc.
Ripple cannot exceed 0.5 volts P-P.
POWER CONSUMPTION (All Models)
Detector without Relays
4.0 watts nominal @ 24 Vdc
7.5 watts peak @ 24 Vdc
10 watts peak @ 32 Vdc.
Detector with Relays
5.5 watts nominal @ 24 Vdc
8.0 watts peak @ 24 Vdc
10.0 watts peak @ 32 Vdc.
GAS DETECTION RANGE
0 to 100% LFL standard. Other ranges are congurable
(down to 20% full scale).
DETECTABLE GASES
Most ammable hydrocarbon vapors are detectable.
Standard gases include methane, ethane, ethylene,
propane, butane and propylene. Methane gas detection
is the factory default gas type setting. Detector
programming and setup for detection of non-standard
gases is accomplished using HART, MODBUS or EQP
system software.
DETECTOR CONFIGURATION OPTIONS
A signicant number of PIRECL conguration parameters
are eld programmable including gas type, measurement
range, alarm setpoints, tag number, special notations,
password protection, etc. Details are provided within the
HART Communication Appendix within this document.
Three PIRECL eld conguration programming methods
are supported:
HART Communication
EQP System S3 Software
RS-485 MODBUS Communication
THIRD PARTY ADDRESSABLE MODULE (Optional)
Input Voltage: 30 Vdc.
Input Current: 30 mA.
SHORT CIRCUIT CURRENT*
(Non-Relay Output Versions Only)
Power Supply Short Circuit Current (Isc): 5.4 amperes.
Short Circuit Current on Fused Line: 3.1 amperes.
Power Supply Max Voltage: Um = 250V
*For installations in accordance with Increased Safety
wiring practices.
WARM-UP TIME (ALL MODELS)
Device enters normal mode after two minutes upon cold
power-up. One hour warm-up time is recommended
for optimum performance. Signal output level during
warm-up is programmable.
CURRENT OUTPUT (Standard Models Only)
Linear 4-20 mA (current source/sink, isolated/non-
isolated) rated at 600 ohms maximum loop resistance @
24 Vdc operating voltage.
VISUAL STATUS INDICATOR (All Models)
Tri-color LED:
Red = Low alarm, high alarm, or calibration.
See Table 1 for Details.
Green = Power on / OK
Yellow = Fault or warm-up.
RELAY OUTPUTS (Optional)
(Available on Ex d approved models only, not available
on Eagle Premier model).
ALARM RELAYS
Low and High
Form C Type (NO/NC).
De-Energized during Normal mode, Energized on Alarm.
Contact Rating: 5 amperes at 30 Vdc.
Programmable for Latching or Non-Latching Operation.
Setpoint Range (both): 5-60% LFL.
Note: Low alarm range for EQP model is 5-40% LFL.
Factory Default Settings:
Low: 20% LFL Non-latching
High: 50% LFL Non-latching
Alarm relay programming can be accomplished using
HART or MODBUS.
CAUTION
When the PIRECL Gas Detector is used in
conjunction with an appropriate certifed Control
Unit and confgured for a non-latching high alarm,
the control unit must always latch and require a
deliberate manual action to clear a high gas alarm.
When used as a stand alone device, the high
alarm must always be programmed for latching
operation.
FAULT RELAY
Form C Type (NO/NC). Energized during Normal mode,
De-Energized on Fault or loss of power.
Contact Rating: 5 amperes at 30 Vdc.
Non-Latching Operation only not programmable.
DIGITAL OUTPUT (Optional)
Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 kbps).
4 95-8526 8.1
CALIBRATION
All units are methane-calibrated at the factory. Field
calibration may not be required for methane detection
applications. Field selectable standard gas settings are
provided for methane, ethane, propane, butane, ethylene,
and propylene.
Field programming and full calibration is typically required
for detection of vapors other than methane. Refer to the
Calibration section of this manual for details.
Routine calibration of the PIRECL after completion of initial
commissioning is supported, but not absolutely required.
Generally, an annual gas bump test or full calibration will
ensure proper sensitivity and response.
NOTE
Frequent visual inspections of the PIRECL are
recommended to confrm that there are no external
impediments to proper detection capability.
Four methods of initiating Calibration are supported:
On-Board magnetic reed switch
HART communication
Remote calibration line for remote switch
MODBUS communication
RESPONSE TIME (With weather protectIon baffle Installed)
T50 T60 T90
Without Hydrophobic Filter: 3.8 4.2 5.4
With Hydrophobic Filter: 4.2 4.4 7.4
NOTE
Add 1 second to response ti me for EQP
compatible models.
TEMPERATURE RANGE
Operating: 40C to +75C (40F to +167F).
Storage: 55C to +85C (67F to +185F).
HUMIDITY
0 to 99% relative humidity (Det-Tronics veried).
5 to 95% relative humidity (FM/CSA/DEMKO veried).
VIBRATION
PIRECL successfully passes Sinusoidal Vibration
Testing in accordance with MIL-STD-810C, Method
514.2, Paragraph 4.5.1.3, Figure 514.2-7 Curve AW, and
C22.2 No. 152-M1984, and also DET NORSKE VERITAS
Certication Notes No. 2.4 dated May 1995.
ACCURACY
3% from 0 to 50% LFL, 5% from 51 to 100% LFL.
SELF-DIAGNOSTIC TEST
Fail-Safe operation ensured by performing all critical
tests once per second.
INGRESS PROTECTION
IP67 (DEMKO Veried).
ELECTRO-MAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
EMC Directive 2004/108/EC
EN61000-6-4 (Emissions)
EN61000-6-2 (Immunity)
EN50270 (EMC - electrical apparatus for the detection of
combustible gas).
NOTE
Shielded cable is required.
FM Approvals: Product operates properly with 5 watt
walkie talkie keyed at 1 meter.
DNV: Relevant tests according to Standard for
Certication No. 2.4.
DETECTOR HOUSING MATERIAL
316 stainless steel (CF8M).
CONDUIT ENTRY OPTIONS
Two entries, 3/4 inch NPT or 25 mm.
HART COMMUNICATION PORT (optional)
Intrinsically safe. For live maintenance, follow Control
Drawing 007283-001 in appendix F.
OPTICS PROTECTION
Three-layer weather bafe assembly is UV-resistant,
static-dissipating black Polythalimide plastic. The
standard weather bafe version recommended for
most outdoor and indoor applications includes internal
hydrophobic lter.
WIRING
Field wiring screw terminals are UL/CSA rated for up to
14 AWG wire, and are DIN/VDE rated for 2.5 mm
2
wire.
Screw terminal required torque range is 3.54.4 in.-lbs.
(0.4-0.5 Nm).
ELECTRICAL SAFETY CLASSIFICATION
Installation Category (Overvoltage Category) II
& Pollution Degree 2 per ANSI/ISA-S82.02.01,
EN 61010-1 & IEC 61010-1.
5 95-8526 8.1
CERTIFICATIONS
FM & CSA: Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C & D (T4)
with intrinsically safe output for HART
communication in accordance with
control drawing 007283-001.
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C & D (T4).
Performance veried to Methane in
accordance with FM 6310/6320, ANSI/
ISA 12.13.01, and CSA C22.2 No. 152.
Tamb = 40C to +75C.
Acidic atmospheres excluded.
Conduit seal not required.
NOTES
Approval of the Model PIRECL does not include
or imply approval of the apparatus to which the
detector may be connected and which processes
the electronic signal for eventual end use. In order
to maintain an approved system, the apparatus
to which the detector is connected must also be
approved.
This Approval does not include or imply Approval
of the communications protocol or functions
provided by the software of this instrument or of the
communications apparatus or software connected
to this instrument.
ATEX: 0539
FM
II 2 G
Ex de IIC T4-T5 Gb
-- OR --
Ex de [ib] IIC T4-T5 Gb
(with HART communication port)
DEMKO 01 ATEX 129485X.
(Performance veried to Methane in
accordance with EN 60079-29-1).
T5 (Tamb 50C to +40C)
IP67.
-- OR --
0539
FM
II 2 G
Ex d IIC T4-T5 Gb
-- OR --
Ex d [ib] IIC T4-T5 Gb
DEMKO 01 ATEX 129485X.
(Performance veried to Methane in
accordance with EN 60079-29-1).
IP67.
ATEX Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
The eld wiring terminal connections are certied
for a single wire in size from 0.2 to 2.5 mm
2
, (or
two conductors with same cross section 0.2 to 0.75
mm
2
). The screws must be tightened down with a
torque 0.4 to 0.5 Nm.
The metal housing of the Model PIRECL Gas Detector
must be electrically connected to earth ground.
The gas detector shall be protected against any
impact greater than 4 joules.
The IS Safety Output on the HART Communicator
Port is internally connected to Earth Ground.
This product is intended for use in air with normal
oxygen content (typically 21% v/v).
Alarm output latching requirement: High alarm
outputs must be latching, either as part of the
alarm operation of the gas detector itself (in
stand-alone applications), or as a function of the
high alarm indication within the controller that is
directly connected to the gas detector (for remote
applications).
Additional Safety Notes:
The following warning is on the product:
Warning: Do not open when an explosive gas
atmosphere may be present.
For ambient temperature above 60C use eld wiring
suitable for maximum ambient temperature. For
temperature below 10C use suitable eld wiring for
the lowest temperature.
The ambient temperature range is limited to 55C to
+75C (for Ex d version) or 50C to +75C (for Ex de
version).
Cable, bushings and the conduit entries shall be of
a type already certied according to relevant ATEX
standard, so the protection principle employed will
not be impaired.
Unused conduit entries shall be closed using
stop plugs certied for the conditions of use (IP67
minimum). The stop plugs should be removable only
with the aid of a tool.
The terminal compartment for Eclipse without
relays is designed for either an increased safety e
termination or a ameproof d termination of the
supply cable. If a ameproof connection is chosen,
then an ATEX certied cable entry device certied
to EN60079 must be used. The Eclipse with relays
requires Ex d cable entry devices only.
FM
APPROVED
FM
APPROVED
FM
APPROVED
6 95-8526 8.1
EN Standards: EN 50270: 2006
EN 50271: 2002
EN 60079-0: 2009
EN 60079-1: 2007
EN 60079-7: 2007
EN 60079-11: 2007
EN 60079-29-1: 2007
EN 60529: 1991+ A1 2000
CE: Conforms to:
Low Voltage Directive: 73/23/EEC,
EMC Directive: 2004/108/EC,
ATEX Directive: 94/9/EC.
IEC: IECEx ULD 04.0002X
Ex de IIC T4-T5 Gb
-- OR --
Ex de [ib] IIC T4-T5 Gb
IP67.
-- OR --
IECEx ULD 04.0002X
Ex d IIC T4-T5 Gb
-- OR --
Ex d [ib] IIC T4-T5 Gb
IP67.
SIL: IEC 61508
Certied SIL 2 Capable.
For SIL models, refer to the Safety
Reference Manual, form 95-8630.
IEC Special Conditions for Safe Use (X):
The eld wiring terminal connections are certied
for a single wire in size from 0.2 to 2.5 mm
2
, (or
two conductors with same cross section 0.2 to 0.75
mm
2
). The screws must be tightened down with a
torque 0.4 to 0.5 Nm.
The metal housing of the Model PIRECL Gas Detector
The gas detector shall be protected against any
impact greater than 4 joules.
The IS Safety Output on the HART Communicator
Port is internally connected to Earth Ground.
This product is intended for use in air with normal
oxygen content (typically 21% v/v).
IEC Standards: IEC 60079-0: 2007
IEC 60079-1: 2007-04
IEC 60079-11: 2006
IEC 60079-7: 2006-07
IEC 60529, 2.1 Edition with Corr. 1
(2003-01 + 2 (2007-10)
WARNING
Always ensure that the detector/junction box
hazardous (cl assi fi ed) l ocati on rati ngs are
applicable for the intended use.
ida e

7 95-8526 8.1
DIMENSIONS
See Figure 2.
SHIPPING WEIGHT (Approximate)
11.5 pounds (5.2 kg).
WARRANTY
Five year limited warranty from date of manufacture.
See Appendix E for details.
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTES
CAUTION
The wiring procedures in this manual are intended
to ensure proper functioning of the device under
normal conditions. However, because of the
many variations in wiring codes and regulations,
total compliance to these ordinances cannot be
guaranteed. Be certain that all wiring complies
with the NEC as well as all local ordinances. If
in doubt, consult the authority having jurisdiction
before wiring the system. Installation must be
done by a properly trained person.
CAUTION
This product has been tested and approved
for use in hazardous areas. However, it must
be properly installed and used only under the
conditions specified within this manual and
the specific approval certificates. Any device
modifcation, improper installation, or use in a faulty
or incomplete confguration will render warranty
and product certifcations invalid.
CAUTION
The detector contai ns no user servi ceabl e
components. Service or repair should never be
attempted by the user. Device repair should be
performed only by the manufacturer or trained
service personnel.
LIABILITIES
The manufacturers warranty for this product is
void, and all liability for proper function of the
detector is irrevocably transferred to the owner or
operator in the event that the device is serviced or
repaired by personnel not employed or authorized
by Detector Electronics Corporation, or if the
device is used in a manner not conforming to its
intended use.
CAUTION
Observe precautions for handling electrostatic
sensitive devices.
NOTE
The PointWatch Eclipse is intended for detection
of hydrocarbon vapors only. The device will not
detect hydrogen gas.
4.5
(11.4)
5.2
(13.2)
9.3
(23.6)
4.6
(11.7)
C2055
Figure 2Dimensions of Eclipse Detector in Inches (Centimeters)
8 95-8526 8.1
INSTALLATION
Before installing the Pointwatch Eclipse, dene the
following application details:
IDENTIFICATION OF FLAMMABLE VAPOR(S) TO
BE DETECTED
It is necessary to always identify the ammable vapor(s)
of interest at the job site in order to determine the
proper calibration gas setting for Pointwatch Eclipse. In
addition, the re hazard properties of the vapor, such as
vapor density, ashpoint, and vapor pressure should be
identied and used to assist in selecting the optimum
detector mounting location within the area.
The detector must be installed per local installation
practices. For IEC/ATEX hazardous areas, it may be
acceptable to utilize Ex e wiring practices with the Eclipse
(non-relay versions).
IDENTIFICATION OF DETECTOR MOUNTING
LOCATIONS
Identication of the most likely leak sources and leak
accumulation areas is typically the rst step in identifying
the best detector mounting locations. In addition,
identication of air current / wind patterns within the
protected area is useful in predicting gas leak dispersion
behavior. This information should be used to identify
optimum sensor installation points.
If the vapor of interest is lighter than air, place the sensor
above the potential gas leak. Place the sensor close to
the oor for gases that are heavier than air. For heavy
vapors, typically locate Pointwatch Eclipse at 2-4 cm
above grade elevation. Note that air currents may cause
a gas that is slightly heavier than air to rise under some
conditions. Heated gases may also exhibit the same
phenomenon.
The most effective number and placement of detectors
varies depending on the conditions at the job site. The
individual designing the installation must often rely on
experience and common sense to determine the detector
quantity and best locations to adequately protect the
area. Note that it is typically advantageous to locate
detectors where they are accessible for maintenance,
and also where the Eclipse status indication LED can
easily be seen. Locations near excessive heat / vibration
sources should be avoided if possible.
Final suitability of possible gas detector locations should
be veried by a job site survey. Gas detector area of
coverage is a subjective evaluation, and may require
long-term empirical data to conrm effectiveness. A
typical rule of thumb is that one detector can cover a 900
square foot area.
However, this rule of thumb is subject to change
depending upon specic application properties and
requirements.
NOTE
For additional information on determining the
quantity and placement of gas detectors in
a specific application, refer to the article titled
"The Use of Combustible Detectors in Protecting
Facilities from Flammable Hazards" contained
in the Instrumentation, Systems and Automation
Society (ISA) Transaction, Volume 20, Number 2.
PHYSICAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
Pointwatch Eclipse is provided with built-in mounting feet
that will accept 3/8 inch (M8) diameter mounting bolts.
Always ensure that the mounting surface is vibration-
free and can suitably support the total weight of the
Pointwatch Eclipse without assistance from electrical
cabling or conduit system.
The detector must be installed per local installation
practices. For IEC/ATEX hazardous areas, it may be
acceptable to utilize Ex e wiring practices with the
Eclipse.
Device Mounting Orientation
It is highly recommended that the Eclipse be installed
in the horizontal position. The detector is not position-
sensitive in terms of its ability to detect gas. However, the
weather bafe assembly provides superior performance
when the Eclipse is installed with the bafe in a horizontal
position.
LED Visibility
Select a mounting orientation where the Pointwatch
Eclipse status indication LED is visible to personnel
within the area.
CORRECT INCORRECT
Recommended Orientation of Eclipse Detector
9 95-8526 8.1
Calibration Gas Port Cover
A protective cover for the calibration gas injection port is
provided to ensure that contaminants are not accidently
introduced into the Eclipse optics. Ensure that this cover
is properly installed over the port when calibration is not
being performed.
NOTE
Failure to install the calibration gas port cover or
the use of a damaged cover may result in nuisance
faults and require cleaning the detector optics.
24 VDC POWER SUPPLY REQUIREMENTS
Calculate the total gas detection system power
consumption rate in watts from cold start-up. Select a
power supply with adequate capability for the calculated
load. Ensure that the selected power supply provides
regulated and ltered 24 Vdc output power for the entire
system. If a back-up power system is required, a oat-
type battery charging system is recommended. If an
existing source of 24 Vdc power is being utilized, verify
that system requirements are met.
WIRING CABLE REQUIREMENTS
Always use proper cabling type and diameter for input
power as well as output signal wiring. 14 to 18 AWG
shielded stranded copper wire is recommended.
Always install a properly sized, master power fuse or
breaker on the system power circuit.
NOTE
The use of shielded cable in conduit or shielded
armored cable is required. In applications where
the wiring is installed in conduit, dedicated conduit
is recommended. Avoid low frequency, high
voltage, and non-signaling conductors to prevent
nuisance EMI problems.
CAUTION
The use of proper conduit installation techniques,
breathers, glands, and seals is required to prevent
water ingress and/or maintain the explosion-proof
rating.
POWER WIRING SIZE AND MAXIMUM LENGTH
The Eclipse detector must receive 18 Vdc 1.
minimum to operate properly. 24 Vdc minimum is
recommended.
Always determine voltage drops that will occur to 2.
ensure that 24 Vdc is delivered to the Eclipse.
Normally, nothing smaller than 18 AWG (0.75 mm 3.
2
)
is recommended by Det-Tronics for Eclipse power
cabling.
Wire size requirements are dependent upon power
supply voltage and wire length.
The maximum distance between the Eclipse detector
and its power supply is determined by the maximum
allowable voltage drop for the power wiring loop. If the
voltage drop is exceeded, the device will not operate.
To determine the maximum power loop voltage drop,
subtract the minimum operating voltage for the device
(18 Vdc) from the minimum output voltage of the power
supply.
To determine the actual maximum wire length:
Divide the maximum allowable voltage drop by the 1.
maximum current draw of the Eclipse (0.31 A),
Divide by the resistance of the wire (ohms/foot value 2.
available in wire manufacturers specication data
sheet),
Divide by 2. 3.
For example: Consider an installation using 18 AWG
wiring with a power supply providing 24 Vdc.
Power supply voltage = 24 Vdc,
Eclipse minimum operating voltage = 18 Vdc
24 18 = 6 Vdc
Maximum Voltage Drop = 6
Maximum Current = 0.31 A
Wire Resistance in Ohms/Foot = 0.006523
6 0.31 0.006523 2 = 1484 feet
NOTE
For FM/CSA/ATEX Certifed systems using HART
communication, the maximum wiring distance is
2000 feet.
Maximum Voltage Drop
Maximum Current
Wire Resistance in Ohms/

Foot
2
Maximum Wire Length =
Maximum Power Loop
Voltage Drop =
Power Supply Voltage
Minus
Minimum Operating Voltage
10 95-8526 8.1
OPTIONAL RELAYS
Optional relay contacts are dry, meaning that the
installer must provide the voltage to the common terminal
of the relay output.
AC voltage should not be switched directly using the
Eclipse relays. The use of an external relay is required if
AC voltage must be switched by the Eclipse relays.
In order to change alarm relay settings from the factory
default settings, it is recommended to utilize a HART
Field Communicator. Contact the factory for further
assistance.
NOTE
Refer to Alarm Relaysin the Specifcations section
of this manual for important information regarding
alarm relays.
The relay board must temporarily be removed from
the Eclipse termination compartment to connect the
relay output eld wiring cables. After the relay wiring
is connected, re-install the relay board using the three
captive screws. Refer to Figure 3.
WIRING PROCEDURE
Ensure that all cables are terminated properly. Pointwatch
Eclipse screw terminal torque range is 3.54.4 in.-lbs.
(0.40.5 Nm).
Conductor insulation should be stripped off with a bare
conductor length of 0.2 inch (5 mm) minimum and 0.7
inch (18 mm) maximum.
Cable shield, if used, should be properly terminated. If
not terminated, clip the shield wire off short and insulate
it within the detector housing to prevent the shield wire
from accidentally contacting the detector housing or any
other wire.
Figure 4 shows the wiring terminal strip located inside the
detectors integral junction box.
Figure 5 shows the wiring terminal conguration for the
standard Eclipse without relays.
standard Eclipse with relays.
Figures 7 through 10 show the 4-20 mA output of the
Eclipse detector in various wiring schemes.
Figure 11 shows a standard Eclipse wired to a FlexVu
UD10 Universal Display Unit.
Figure 12 shows a standard Eclipse wired to a Model
U9500H Inniti Transmitter.
Figure 13 shows a standard Eclipse wired to a Model
R8471H Controller.
Eagle Quantum Premier Eclipse.
Figure 15 shows the Eclipse wired for benchtop testing/
programming using HART protocol.
NOTE
The Ecl i pse housi ng must be el ect ri cal l y
connected to earth ground. A dedicated earth
ground lug is provided for this purpose.
REMOTE CALIBRATION WIRING
If it is desired to initiate calibration using the remote
calibrate line, the use of the Det-Tronics Model PIRTB
Termination Box is highly recommended for optimum
ease of installation and calibration. The PIRTB module
includes a magnetic reed switch, indicating LED, and
wiring terminal block. Refer to Remote Calibration
Option in the Description section of this manual for
details.
Figure 16 shows the location of the wiring terminals, reed
switch and LED inside the calibration termination box.
See Figure 17 for wiring details.
WARNING
Do not attempt to physically connect or touch
the calibration lead wire to DCV common in the
field to begin calibration. This practice is often
less than precise, and may result in a spark or
other undesirable results. For optimum ease of
installation and calibration, always utilize a Det-
Tronics junction box with magnetic reed-switch,
indicating LED, and termination block (Model
PIRTB).
Figure 3Eclipse Wiring Termination Compartment
with Optional Relay Board Removed
FACTORY INSTALLED WIRING
TO RELAY BOARD
(DO NOT REMOVE)
CAPTIVE SCREWS (3)
RELAY TERMINAL BLOCK A2133
11 95-8526 8.1
EARTH GND LUG
A2084
Figure 4Terminal Strip Located Inside Wiring Compartment
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC +
24 VDC +
CALIBRATE
+ 4-20 MA
4-20 MA
RS-485 A
RS-485 B
RELAY POWER (RED)
FAULT (ORANGE)
LOW ALARM (WHITE)
HIGH ALARM (YELLOW)
LOW ALARM
RELAY
HIGH ALARM
RELAY
FAULT
RELAY
WIRING TO OPTIONAL
RELAY BOARD
NO USER CONNECTION
RELAY BOARD TERMINALS
(OPTIONAL)
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
B2054
NO
NC
C
NO
NC
C
NO
NC
C
Figure 6Wiring Terminal Identifcation
for Standard Eclipse with Relays
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC +
24 VDC +
CALIBRATE
+ 4-20 MA
4-20 MA
RS-485 A
RS-485 B
RELAY POWER
FAULT
LOW ALARM
HIGH ALARM
NO USER CONNECTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
A2054
for Standard Eclipse Without Relays
12 95-8526 8.1
24 VDC
+
+
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC +
24 VDC +
CALIBRATE
+ 4-20 MA
4-20 MA
RS-485 A
RS-485 B
RELAY POWER
FAULT
LOW ALARM
HIGH ALARM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
NO USER CONNECTION
4 to 20 MA
B2051
*
*TOTAL LOOP RESISTANCE = 250 OHMS MINIMUM, 600 OHMS MAXIMUM.
DO NOT INSTALL RESISTOR WITHIN PIRECL ENCLOSURE IN EEx e APPLICATIONS.
Figure 8Eclipse Detector Wired for Non-Isolated
4-20 mA Current Output (Sourcing)
24 VDC
+
+
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC +
24 VDC +
CALIBRATE
+ 4-20 MA
4-20 MA
RS-485 A
RS-485 B
RELAY POWER
FAULT
LOW ALARM
HIGH ALARM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
NO USER CONNECTION
4 to 20 MA
B2050
*
Figure 7Eclipse Detector Wired for Non-Isolated
4-20 mA Current Output (Sinking)
24 VDC
+
24 VDC
+
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC +
24 VDC +
CALIBRATE
+ 4-20 MA
4-20 MA
RS-485 A
RS-485 B
RELAY POWER
FAULT
LOW ALARM
HIGH ALARM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
NO USER CONNECTION
+
4 to 20 MA
B2053
*
Figure 10Eclipse Detector Wired for Isolated
4-20 mA Current Output (Sourcing)
24 VDC
+
24 VDC
+
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC +
24 VDC +
CALIBRATE
+ 4-20 MA
4-20 MA
RS-485 A
RS-485 B
RELAY POWER
FAULT
LOW ALARM
HIGH ALARM
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
NO USER CONNECTION
+
4 to 20 MA
B2052
*
Figure 9Eclipse Detector Wired for Isolated
4-20 mA Current Output (Sinking)
13 95-8526 8.1
Figure 12Standard Eclipse Wired to a Model U9500H Infniti Transmitter
A2201

F
L
T

R
E
L
A
Y

S

P
O
W
E
R
R
E
S
E
T

P
W

I
N

N
O

C
O
M

N
C

+

C
A
L

S

P
O
W
E
R

O
U
T

+

+

24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC +
24 VDC +
CALIBRATE
+ 4-20 MA
4-20 MA
RS-485 A
RS-485 B
RELAY POWER
FAULT
LOW ALARM
HIGH ALARM
NO USER CONNECTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
24 VDC
+
PIRECL
POINTWATCH ECLIPSE
U9500H
INFINITI TRANSMITTER
+
-
DCS
1
NOTES: 1 250 OHM RESISTOR REQUIRED IF USING HART PORT COMMUNICATIONS.
2 PIRECL ECLIPSE MUST BE PROGRAMMED TO PIR9400 FAULT MODE
FOR PROPER STATUS IDENTIFICATION AT THE U9500H TRANSMITTER.
Figure 11Standard Eclipse Wired to a Model UD10 Universal Display Unit
UD10 DISPLAY UNIT
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC +
24 VDC +
CALIBRATE
4-20 MA +
4-20 MA
RS-485 A
RS-485 B
RELAY POWER (RED)
FAULT (ORANGE)
LOW ALARM (WHITE)
HIGH ALARM (YELLOW)
WIRING TO OPTIONAL
RELAY BOARD
NO USER CONNECTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
MODEL PIRECL
C2404
BLACK
WHITE
RED
Sensor Connector
Power Supply Connector
Output Loop
Connector
MODBUS
Connector
R
e
l
a
y

C
o
n
n
e
c
t
o
r
P1
J2
J3
J4
P2
4-20 mA +
4-20 mA
SHIELD
COM
RS485 A
RS485 B
HIGH ALARM COM
HIGH ALARM NC
HIGH ALARM NO
AUX ALARM COM
AUX ALARM NC
AUX ALARM NO
LOW ALARM COM
LOW ALARM NC
LOW ALARM NO
FAULT COM
FAULT NC
FAULT NO
2
4
V
D
C

2
4
V
D
C

+
S
H
I
E
L
D
2
4
V
D
C

2
4
V
D
C

+
S
H
I
E
L
D
S
H
I
E
L
D
C
A
L
I
B
R
A
T
E
2
4
V
D
C

4
-
2
0

m
A
2
4
V
D
C

+
P1-3
P1-2
P1-1
J2-3
J2-2
J2-1
J4-1
J4-2
J4-3
J4-4
J4-5
J4-6
J4-7
J4-8
J4-9
J4-10
J4-11
J4-12
J
3
-
1
J
3
-
2
J
3
-
3
J
3
-
4
J
3
-
5
P
2
-
6
P
2
-
5
P
2
-
4
P
2
-
3
P
2
-
2
P
2
-
1
NOTE 1 INTERNAL JUMPER REQUIRED FOR
NON-ISOLATED CURRENT OUTPUT
(SINGLE POWER SUPPLY).
NOTE 2 UD10 HOUSING MUST BE ELECTRICALLY
CONNECTED TO EARTH GROUND.
1
14 95-8526 8.1
for Eagle Quantum Premier Eclipse
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC +
24 VDC +
24 VDC SHIELD
24 VDC SHIELD
COM 1 A
COM 1 SHIELD
COM 1 B
COM 2 A
COM 2 B
COM 2 SHIELD
CALIBRATE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
A2087
CURRENT OUTPUT
CHASSIS GROUND
POWER
SENSOR
EXTERNAL RESET
HIGH ALARM
HIGH ALARM / OC
AUX. ALARM
AUX. ALARM / OC
LOW ALARM
LOW ALARM / OC
FAULT
FAULT / OC
1
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
+
+
18 TO 32
VDC
POWER
SIGNAL
2
OC = OPEN COLLECTOR OUTPUT
(BASE MODEL ONLY)
A2202
24 VDC
24 VDC +
4-20 MA
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
R8471H CONTROLLER
PIRECL
POINTWATCH ECLIPSE
+ 4-20 MA
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC + +
2
1
NOTES:
1
INTERNAL JUMPER REQUIRED
FOR NON-ISOLATED CURRENT
OUTPUT (SINGLE POWER
SUPPLY).

2
250 OHM RESISTOR REQUIRED.
Figure 13Standard Eclipse Wired to a Model R8471H Controller
15 95-8526 8.1
CALIBRATE SWITCH
B2056
HOLD CALIBRATION MAGNET
AT OUTSIDE BASE OF JUNCTION
BOX AT THIS LOCATION
TO ACTIVATE CALIBRATION SWITCH
REMOTE LED
Figure 16Remote Calibration Switch and LED in Optional
Det-Tronics PIRTB Termination Box
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC +
24 VDC +
CALIBRATE
+ 4-20 MA
4-20 MA
RS-485 A
RS-485 B
RELAY POWER
FAULT
LOW ALARM
HIGH ALARM
NO USER CONNECTION
FACTORY WIRING ONLY
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
A2057
CAL
SIGNAL
24 VDC
SPARE
CAL
SIGNAL
24 VDC
24 VDC +
24 VDC +
24 VDC
+
MAGNETIC REED SWITCH

FOR REMOTE CALIBRATION
TYPICALLY
NO CONNECTION
NOTE: IF REQUIRED, POWER AND 4 TO 20 MA
SIGNAL OUTPUT MAY BE ROUTED
THROUGH REMOTE CALIBRATION MODULE
USING SHIELDED CABLING.
Figure 17Remote Calibration Module Wired to PointWatch Eclipse
Figure 15Wiring the Model PIRECL for Benchtop Testing/
Programming Using HART Protocol
24 VDC
24 VDC
24 VDC +
24 VDC +
CALIBRATE
+ 4-20 MA
4-20 MA
RS-485 A
RS-485 B
RELAY POWER
FAULT
LOW ALARM
HIGH ALARM
NO USER
CONNECTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
A2203
24 VDC
+
250 TO 500 OHMS

16 95-8526 8.1
DESCRIPTION
INTERNAL MAGNETIC SWITCH
An internal magnetic switch is provided for resetting
latched alarms and initiating calibration. See Figure 18
for switch location. Momentary switch activation will reset
alarms, while holding the switch closed for 2 seconds or
longer will start the calibration sequence. The switch can
also be used to enter "live" calibration mode or terminate
the calibration sequence (see "Calibration" section).
HART COMMUNICATION
An optional intrinsically safe HART communication port
provides a non-intrusive means for connecting the HART
Communicator to the Eclipse. Refer to Figure 19.
Alternatively, the HART communicator can be connected
across a 250 ohm resistor in the 4-20 mA loop.
NOTE
All Eclipse gas detectors (except EQP models) are
furnished with HART capability. However, a 250
ohm resistor must be present within the 4-20 mA
loop for HART communication to work. In many
cases, this resistor is already present in the control
panel. For a bench test or a situation where the
4-20 mA loop is not active, this resistor must still
be installed for HART communication to function
properly (see Figure 15).
If a PIRTB Remote Calibration Termination Box is utilized,
the HART Communicator can be connected at the PIRTB.
Note that this connection requires removal of the PIRTB
cover.
Connect the HART Communicator, then turn it on by
pressing the ON/OFF key. The communicator will indicate
when the connection is made. If the connection is not
made, the communicator will indicate that no device was
found. Refer to the HART appendix in this manual for
complete information.
WARNING
For Division applications, do not open cover when
explosive gas atmosphere may be present.
Refer to Appendix A in this manual for complete information
regarding HART communication with Eclipse.
CALIBRATION MAGNET
CALIBRATION NOZZLE
WEATHER BAFFLE
MULTICOLOR LED
HART COMMUNICATION PORT
(COVER INSTALLED)
PLACE CALIBRATION MAGNET
HERE TO ACTIVATE INTERNAL
REED SWITCH
C2058
EARTH GND LUG
Figure 18PointWatch Eclipse
HART COMMUNICATOR CONNECTED
TO I.S. HART PORT
I.S. HART PORT NOT PROVIDED ON THIS MODEL
A2490
Figure 19Eclipse Models with and without IS HART Port
17 95-8526 8.1
MULTICOLOR LED
An onboard multi-color LED is provided for indicating
faults, alarms, and calibration status. See Table 1. LED
operation for fault status is non-latching. LED operation
for alarms is congurable for latching/non-latching.
WEATHER BAFFLE ASSEMBLY
The black weather bafe is provided to prevent debris
and water from entering the optics, while allowing gases
and vapors to enter readily. An O-ring is provided on
the main Eclipse body to ensure a proper seal with the
weather bafe. Two weather bafe congurations are
available one with an internal hydrophobic lter and
one without the internal hydrophobic lter.
The weather bafe version without hydrophobic lter is
recommended for most outdoor and indoor applications.
It provides excellent weather protection with optimized
speed of gas alarm response. The weather bafe version
with hydrophobic lter is recommended for extremely
wet, dirty and humid applications. It provides optimum
rejection of airborne water and dirt, with a slighty slower
speed of gas alarm response.
The weather bafe assembly is not eld-serviceable,
but is easily replaceable. To remove the plastic weather
bafe from the Eclipse body, rotate it one quarter turn
counter-clockwise and pull.
The weather bafe is furnished with a calibration gas
nozzle for direct injection of gas to the sensor, allowing
the operator to apply gas to the detector without going
through the weather bafe.
NOTE
Always cover the calibration gas nozzle with the
cap during normal operation, and ensure that the
cap is not damaged.
CLOCK
An hour meter is provided to give a relative indication of
time for historical logs. The meter is zeroed at the time of
manufacture and only increments while power is applied.
HART or MODBUS communication is required to view the
running hours.
HISTORY LOGS
All history logs are saved in non-volatile memory and
retained through power cycles. HART or MODBUS
communication is required to view the history logs.
Event Log (Alarms and Faults)
An event log saves the ten most recent alarms and a
selected group of faults with an hour meter time stamp.
HART or MODBUS communication is required to view the
log. Types of logged events include:
Low Alarms
High Alarms
Optics Fault
Warm-up
Calibration Fault
Calibration Log
A log of the ten most recent calibrations with time stamp
is saved. HART or MODBUS communication is required
to view the log. Types of calibration records include:
Zero Only Calibration
Complete Calibration
Failed Calibration
Min/Max Temperature History
Ambient minimum and maximum exposed temperature
measurements are stored in non-volatile memory, and
are accessible via HART or MODBUS communication.
The measurements are time tagged with respect to total
hours of powered operation. The temperature log may
be reset, in which case all min/max exposed temperature
logs are cleared.
Table 1LED Status Indication
LED Device Status
Green Normal operation.
Red Blinking indicates Low Alarm.
On steady indicates High Alarm.
Yellow Fault condition or warmup.
18 95-8526 8.1
REMOTE CALIBRATION OPTION
In most applications, it is recommended to install the
Pointwatch Eclipse where it will contact the vapor of
interest as quickly as possible. Unfortunately, the best
location for early warning can often result in accessibility
problems for the operator when calibration is required.
In these applications, the Model PIRTB Termination Box
is highly recommended to provide the ability to calibrate
the Pointwatch Eclipse from a remote location.
The PIRTB consists of a termination/circuit board, housed
within an explosion-proof junction box. The circuit board
contains a magnetic reed switch for initiating calibration,
an indicating LED to signal the operator when to apply
and remove the calibration gas, and a wiring terminal
block. The junction box cover is furnished with a small
viewing window that enables calibration to be performed
without hazardous area de-classication. The PIRTB may
be installed up to 100 feet away from the Eclipse. Refer
to Figure 20 for remote calibration conguration options.
NOTE
The remote calibration switch is intended for
initiating calibration only. Resetting latching alarm
outputs using the remote calibration switch cannot
be accomplished without entering the Calibration
mode.
The following recommendations are provided to enhance
operator ease and convenience of remote calibration
congurations:
Install the Eclipse in such a manner that the onboard 1.
LED is visible whenever possible. This will aid in
checking device status "at a glance."
The Eclipse is provided with a calibration gas nozzle 2.
on the weather bafe, which allows the use of
permanently attached calibration gas delivery tubing
(either polyethylene or stainless steel). The tubing is
typically routed in parallel with the remote calibration
cabling to the same location as the PIRTB termination
box. This arrangement enables a technician to
initiate calibration and deliver the calibration gas to
the Eclipse from a single location.
When permanently installed calibration gas tubing is 3.
utilized, always install a shut-off valve at the open end
to prevent unwanted vapors or debris from entering
the tubing.
Always purge the permanent tubing with clean, 4.
dry compressed air prior to and immediately after
calibration to ensure that residual combustible
gases are cleared. Always close the shutoff valve
after post-calibration purging is complete. This will
ensure that all hydrocarbon vapors are eliminated
from the Eclipse optics.
Note that permanently installed calibration gas tubing 5.
will increase the calibration gas consumption rate as
a function of total tubing length.
Other methods of remote Eclipse calibration include
utilizing HART or MODBUS communications. Refer to
the HART and MODBUS appendices for details.
SPECIAL APPLICATIONS
The standard Pointwatch Eclipse is intended for
open area combustible gas detection applications.
However, special detector congurations are available
for applications such as duct-mounting and sample
extraction. Contact Detector Electronics Corporation for
information on these special device congurations.
19 95-8526 8.1
WRONG
HAZARDOUS LOCATION NON-HAZARDOUS LOCATION
24 VDC +
24 VDC
4-20 MA SIGNAL
24 VDC +
24 VDC
4-20 MA SIGNAL
24 VDC +
24 VDC
4-20 MA SIGNAL
24 VDC +
24 VDC
+ 4-20 MA
4-20 MA
PIRECL
PIRECL
HART
COMMUNICATOR
HART
COMMUNICATOR
HART
COMMUNICATOR
HART
COMMUNICATOR
PIRTB
PIRTB
D2060
NOTE: THE TOTAL WIRING DISTANCE FROM THE HART COMMUNICATOR
THROUGH THE POINTWATCH ECLIPSE TO THE SIGNAL RECEIVER
MUST NOT EXCEED 2000 FEET (610 METERS).
CAL GAS
24 VDC, CAL
PIRECL
PIRTB ISOLATED 4-20 MA
CAL GAS
PIRECL
PIRTB NON-ISOLATED 4-20 MA
NON-ISOLATED 4-20 MA
NON-ISOLATED 4-20 MA
Figure 20Remote Calibration Confguration Options
20 95-8526 8.1
OPERATION
FACTORY DEFAULT SETTINGS
The Pointwatch Eclipse is shipped from the factory
pre-calibrated and set for detection of 0-100% LFL
methane. Detection of gases other than methane will
require changing the factory gas setting and performing
eld calibration of the device. HART or MODBUS
communication is required to change the factory default
settings. Refer to the HART Communications Appendix
within this document for additional guidance.
OPERATING MODES
The Eclipse has three operating modes: warm-up,
normal, and calibrate.
Warm-up
Warm-up mode is entered upon application of 24 Vdc
operating power. During warm-up, the 4-20 mA current
loop output will indicate warm-up, the indicating LED is
yellow, and the alarm outputs are disabled. The warm-up
mode lasts nominally two (2) minutes after power-up.
Normal
After warm-up mode is completed, the device
automatically enters the Normal mode, and all analog
and alarm outputs are enabled.
Calibrate
Calibration of the Eclipse is normally not required; however,
the user has the option to verify proper calibration or to
perform calibration procedures if necessary. Guidelines
for when to perform a calibration or a response test are
listed in Table 2. The user has the choice of three methods
to place the device into the Calibrate mode. Refer to the
"Calibration" section in this manual for details.
4-20 MA CURRENT LOOP OUTPUT
Eclipse provides an isolated, linear current loop output
that is proportional to the detected gas level. Fault and
calibration status are also indicated by this output.
The factory default for full-scale 100% LFL output is 20
mA. Other full scale values (from 20 to 100% LFL) can
be selected using HART or MODBUS communication.
HART and MODBUS interfaces also have the ability to
calibrate the 4 mA and 20 mA levels.
When the default setting is selected, the LFL percentage
for a given current reading can be calculated using the
formula:
% LFL = (X 4) 0.16 X = Current reading
in milliamperes
Example: Device reads 12 mA.
12 4 = 8
8 0.16 = 50
50% LFL is indicated.
Normally, the current loop output is proportional to the
selected standard gas type only. Refer to Appendix C
within this document for information on non-standard gas
detection.
Table 2Calibration or Response Test
Function Calibration Response
Test
Startup X
Gas selection changed X
Non-standard gas
(using linearization other than methane)
X
Replace any part X
Constant zero offset X
Periodic Functional Testing
(at least once a year)
X
21 95-8526 8.1
FAULT INDICATION
There are three modes of signaling faults using the 4-20
mA analog signal output:
PIR9400 (Factory default setting, used for retrot
applications of the PIR9400 detector)
Eclipse
User Dened
Fault signaling mode can be selected using the HART or
MODBUS interface. Table 3 shows the current levels for
each fault mode.
PIR9400 Fault Mode
This mode is provided for compatibility with existing
Det-Tronics PointWatch gas detectors. The fault and
calibration levels are identical to existing PIR9400 units,
which makes the Eclipse compatible with the U9500
Inniti Transmitter. As with the PIR9400 detector, live
and suppressed signal during calibration modes are
available.
Eclipse Fault Mode
Eclipse mode follows conventional fault signaling practice.
The current loop output indicates the presence of a fault,
but does not attempt to identify a specic fault with a
specic current output value. Identication of a specic
fault type is done through the HART Communicator or
MODBUS.
User Defned Fault Mode
This mode is intended for users who wish to program
unique current levels for faults and calibration signals.
User dened current levels can be set from 0.0 to 24.0
mA. and can be programmed from HART or MODBUS
interfaces. Four unique current levels are available:
warm-up, general fault, calibration, and blocked optics.
Table 3Output Levels of 4-20 mA Current Loop and Corresponding Status Indications
Condition PIR9400 Fault Mode Eclipse Fault Mode User Defned Fault Mode
Gas Level (-10% to 120% Full scale) 2.4 to 23.20 2.4 to 23.20 2.4 to 23.20
Warm-up 0.00 1.00 Warm-up
Reference Sensor Saturated 0.20 1.00 General Fault
Active Sensor Saturated 0.40 1.00 General Fault
Calibration line active on power-up 0.60 1.00 General Fault
Low 24 volts 0.80 1.00 General Fault
Dirty Optics 1.00 2.00 Blocked Optics
Calibration Fault 1.60 1.00 General Fault
Calibration complete 1.80 1.00 Calibration
Span calibration, apply gas 2.00 1.00 Calibration
Zero calibration in progress 2.20 1.00 Calibration
Negative signal output fault 2.40 1.00 General Fault
Flash CRC 1.20 1.00 General Fault
Ram Error 1.20 1.00 General Fault
EEPROM Error 1.20 1.00 General Fault
IR Source Failure 1.20 1.00 General Fault
22 95-8526 8.1
STARTUP
When the Eclipse is installed and wired as described in
the Installation section, it is ready for commissioning.
If the application requires that specic changes be
made to the factory settings, HART, MODBUS or EQP
communication will be required. Refer to the appropriate
Appendix for details.
NOTE
Ensure that controller alarm outputs are inhibited
for a minimum of 10 seconds after system power-up
to prevent unwanted output actuation.
NOTE
The safet y function (gas input-to-actuation/
noti fi cati on) must al ways be veri fi ed upon
completion of installation and/or modifcation.
PIRECL STARTUP/COMMISSIONING CHECKLISTS
Electrical Checklist
All 24 Vdc power conductors are properly sized and
are properly terminated.
The 24 Vdc power supply provides sufcient load
capacity for all gas detectors.
Using a DC voltmeter, 24 Vdc has been measured at
the detector.
All signal output conductors are properly terminated,
and the jumper wire is installed if a non-isolated
signal output is desired.
All relay contact output signal conductors are
properly terminated if applicable.
All screw terminals have been tightened and all wires
pull-tested to conrm proper termination has been
accomplished.
Mechanical Checklist
PIRECL detector is mounted to a solid surface not
prone to high vibration, shock, traumatic impact or
other undesirable condition.
PIRECL detector is installed in proper orientation
(horizontal).
PIRECL detector is installed to achieve weatherproof
status, e.g. conduit seals or cable glands have been
properly installed. If there is an unused conduit entry,
this entry has been sealed with a weathertight plug.
PIRECL detector threaded covers are tightened to
engage all O-rings.
The hex head set screw is tightened to secure the
cover and prevent access to the wiring compartment
without the use of a tool.
Gas Detection and Measurement Checklist
Vapor(s) to be detected have been identied, and
appropriate calibration gas setting for the PIRECL
has been conrmed.
Area(s) of coverage have been identied, and
optimum detector locations for installation are
documented.
Detector installation location is suitable for intended
purpose, e.g. no obvious impediments to contact
with the gas or vapor of interest exist or are likely to
exist.
Proper calibration gas(es) are available to perform
proof of response test or calibration during
commissioning.
HART communicator or similar eld communicator
is available if eld programming is expected or
required.
Calibration magnet is available to initiate quick
calibration or reset.
23 95-8526 8.1
CALIBRATION
CALIBRATION OVERVIEW
Although routine calibration of the Pointwatch Eclipse is
normally not required, the device supports non-intrusive
eld calibration capability. Two (2) calibration procedure
options are provided:
Normal Calibration 1. is a two-step process consisting
of clean air (zero) condition and mid-scale (span)
adjustment. Calibration gas must be applied by
the operator to enable span adjustment. Normal
calibration is required whenever the gas type setting
has been changed from the factory-default methane
setting. Purge the Eclipse optics with clean, dry air
prior to calibration initiation to ensure that an accurate
zero (clean air) condition is present.
The following Normal Calibration guidelines always
apply:
The Eclipse is factory set for detection of A.
methane. If the gas setting is changed (using
HART, MODBUS or EQP communication), the
Eclipse must be re-calibrated (normally with the
matching gas type).
The calibration gas type normally should match B.
the selected gas setting for the Eclipse. Different
calibration gas types are selectable using HART,
MODBUS or EQP communication. The factory
default calibration gas is methane.
The recommended calibration gas concentration C.
is 50% LFL, although other calibration
concentrations may be utilized if previously
dened in the Eclipse using HART, MODBUS or
EQP communication.
2. Zero Only Calibration is a one-step process
consisting of clean air (zero) condition adjustment
only, which is performed automatically by the device.
This procedure adjusts the "clean air" signal output
only, and is normally used if the 4 milliampere signal
level has drifted. The cause of drift is typically due to
the presence of background gas during calibration.
Purge the Eclipse optics with clean, dry compressed
air prior to calibration initiation to ensure an accurate
zero (clean air) condition is present.
ADDITIONAL CALIBRATION NOTES
IMPORTANT
Always ensure that the correct gas type is used for
calibration. (2.5 LPM fow rate is recommended.)
NOTE
Ensure that the detector has been operating for at
least two hours before calibrating.
NOTE
Always ensure that the Eclipse optics are totally
free of all hydrocarbons before initiating calibration.
This may require purging of the Eclipse with pure
air prior to initiating calibration.
NOTE
Under very windy conditions, it may not be
possible to successfully calibrate the Eclipse. This
situation is easily corrected by using the Eclipse
Calibration Bag (P/N 006672-002), available from
Det-Tronics.
NOTE
Al ways pl ace the protecti ve cap back on
the calibration nozzle after completion of span
calibration.
24 95-8526 8.1
CALIBRATION INITIATION
Eclipse calibration may be initiated by any of the following
means:
The onboard magnetic calibration switch
The magnetic calibration switch in the remote
termination box
HART communication.
Calibration using Magnetic Switch
Onboard Switch and LED 1.
The Pointwatch Eclipse provides an onboard
magnetic calibration/reset switch for non-intrusive
calibration capability. The magnetic switch is
located on the device bulkhead. See Figure 18 for
switch location. An onboard tri-color LED is also
provided to signal the operator when to apply and
remove calibration gas.
Remote Switch and Indicating LED 2.
A special Remote Termination Box (Model PIRTB)
is available for initiating calibration from a remote
location. The PIRTB provides an internal magnetic
switch and indicating LED (LED is on/off only, not tri-
color). The PIRTB is provided with a clear window
on the cover, enabling non-intrusive calibration
capability.
Either magnetic switch must be actuated for 2 seconds
using a calibration magnet to initiate Eclipse calibration.
Upon initiation, the Eclipse automatically performs
the zero calibration adjustment, and then signals the
operator when it is time to apply calibration gas. Upon
completion of the span adjustment, the Eclipse returns
to normal mode after the calibration gas has cleared.
The indicating LED (either onboard LED or PIRTB LED,
if used) provides visual signals to the operator regarding
the proper time to apply and remove the calibration gas.
For Zero Only Calibration, the operator must re-actuate
the magnetic switch upon LED signal to apply calibration
gas. This action instructs the Eclipse to utilize the
previous span setting, and return to normal mode without
requiring application of calibration gas.
Digital Communication Calibration
HART, MODBUS or EQP communication may be utilized
to initiate Eclipse calibration. Refer to the appropriate
appendix for details.
DETAILED CALIBRATION PROCEDURE USING
MAGNETIC SWITCH
Refer to Tables 4 and 5 for a quick summary of the
standard calibration sequence.
Apply magnet for 2 seconds minimum to initiate 1.
calibration.
The onboard LED turns to steady red. A.
The LED within the PIRTB (if used) turns on. B.
The Eclipse current output decreases from 4 C.
mA to 1 mA when the default Eclipse calibration
routine is used.
2. When Zero Calibration is complete:
The onboard LED changes from steady red to A.
ashing red.
The LED within the PIRTB (if used) begins B.
ashing.
The Eclipse current output does not change C.
from the 1 mA level when the default Eclipse
calibration routine is used.
The operator should now apply the appropriate D.
calibration gas to the Eclipse if conducting
Normal Calibration.
If conducting Zero Only Calibration, the operator E.
should re-apply the magnet to the switch. This will
conclude the Zero Only calibration sequence.
3. When Span Calibration is complete:
The onboard LED changes from ashing red to A.
off.
The operator should now close the valve and B.
remove the calibration gas from the Eclipse.
NOTE
It is normal for the Eclipse LED to go off or turn
blank (no color displayed) until the calibration gas
is cleared from the optics chamber. Remove the
weather baffle if necessary to clear residual gas.
The LED within the PIRTB (if used) changes to C.
steady on.
The Eclipse current output does not change D.
from the 1 mA level when the default Eclipse
calibration routine is used.
25 95-8526 8.1
4. Return to Normal is complete when:
The onboard LED changes from off to steady A.
green.
The LED within the PIRTB (if used) turns off. B.
The Eclipse current output returns to 4 mA after C.
detected calibration gas level drops below 5%
LFL or the calibration abort signal is provided.
TIME OUT
If calibration is not completed within 10 minutes, a
calibration-failed fault is generated, and the unit returns to
normal operation using the previous calibration values.
NOTE
Under normal conditions, span calibration is
typically completed in 3 minutes or less.
CALIBRATION ABORT
Calibration can be aborted at any time after zero
calibration is completed. This is done by activating the
onboard or PIRTB magnetic switch, or by a command
from the HART, MODBUS or EQP interface. If calibration
is terminated, the new zero point is retained, and a zero
calibration code is saved in the calibration history buffer.
The unit will immediately return to normal operation.
Table 5Quick Reference Guide for Zero Only Calibration Procedure Using Magnetic Switch
Table 4Quick Reference Guide for Normal Calibration Procedure Using Magnetic Switch
Description Indicating LED
(on-board/PIRTB)
Current Output
(default setting)
Operator Action
Normal-ready to calibrate steady green/off 4 mA Purge with clean air if required
Initiate Calibration steady red/on-steady 1 mA Apply Magnet for 2 seconds min.
Zero Calibration complete ashing red/on-ashing 1 mA Apply Calibration Gas to device
Span Calibration in progress ashing red/on-ashing 1 mA Continue cal gas ow
Span Calibration complete off/on-steady 1 mA Remove Calibration Gas
Output Returns to Normal steady green/off 4 mA Calibration Completed
Normal Operation steady green/off 4 mA None
Description Indicating LED
(on-board/PIRTB)
Current Output
(default setting)
Operator Action
Normal-ready to calibrate steady green/off 4 mA Purge with clean air if required
Initiate Calibration steady red/on-steady 1 mA Apply Magnet for 2 seconds min.
Zero Calibration complete ashing red/on-ashing 1 mA Re-initiate magnetic switch
to terminate calibration
Return to Normal Mode steady green/off 4 mA Zero Calibration Completed
26 95-8526 8.1
HYDROPHOBIC FILTER
DIFFUSION PATHS INTO MEASUREMENT CHAMBER
MIRROR
IR SOURCE LAMP
AND WINDOW
O-RING
C2059
Figure 21PointWatch Eclipse with Baffle Removed
MAINTENANCE
ROUTINE INSPECTION
The PointWatch Eclipse detector should be inspected
periodically to ensure that external obstructions such as
plastic bags, mud, snow, or other materials do not block
the weather bafe, thereby impairing the performance
of the device. In addition, the weather bafe assembly
should be removed and inspected to ensure that the
diffusion paths into the measurement chamber are clear.
See Figure 21.
WEATHER BAFFLE CLEANING
Remove the weather bafe assembly and clean with a
soft brush and soap and water. Rinse and allow to dry.
Replace the weather bafe if damaged or if fouling of the
bafe vents is evident.
NOTE
Solvents may damage the weather baffle assembly.
If contamination is not removed using soap and
water, then replacement of the baffle may be
required.
OPTICS CLEANING
Cleaning of the Eclipse optical surfaces is normally
required only if an optical fault is indicated.
Thoroughly douse the mirror and window using a liberal
amount of isopropyl alcohol to clear away contaminant
particles. Repeat the alcohol ush to remove any
remaining contaminants. Allow the assembly to air-dry in
a dust-free location.
O-RING
Periodically the O-ring should be inspected for breaks,
cracks and dryness. To test the ring, remove it from the
enclosure and stretch it slightly. If cracks are visible,
it should be replaced. If it feels dry, a thin coating of
lubricant should be applied. See Spare Parts section
for recommended lubricant. When re-installing the ring,
be sure that it is properly seated in the groove.
PROTECTIVE CAPS AND COVERS
The calibration nozzle cap must always be installed,
except while performing calibration. Also ensure that
the HART Communication Port cover and the wiring
compartment cover are installed and fully engaged.
27 95-8526 8.1
TROUBLESHOOTING
A Fault status is indicated by a yellow LED and also by
the 4-20 mA outout. Refer to Table 6 to identify the fault
type using the 4-20 mA output. (The operator must know
which fault signaling mode has been programmed.)
Refer to Table 7 for assistance in correcting malfunctions
with the PointWatch Eclipse Detector.
DEVICE REPAIR AND RETURN
The Pointwatch Eclipse IR Hydrocarbon Gas Detector is
not designed to be repaired in the eld. If a problem
should develop, rst carefully check for proper wiring,
programming and calibration. If it is determined that the
problem is caused by an electronic failure, the device
must be returned to the factory for repair.
Prior to returning devices or components, contact the
nearest local Detector Electronics ofce so that a Service
Order number can be assigned. A written statement
describing the malfunction must accompany the returned
device or component to expedite nding the cause of the
failure.
Return all equipment transportation prepaid to the factory
in Minneapolis.
Table 6Using the 4-20 mA Output Level to Identify a Fault Condition
Condition PIR9400 Fault Mode Eclipse Fault Mode User Defned Fault Mode
Gas Level (-10% to 120% Full scale) 2.4 to 23.20 2.4 to 23.20 2.4 to 23.20
Warm-up 0.00 1.00 Warm-up
Reference Sensor Saturated 0.20 1.00 General Fault
Active Sensor Saturated 0.40 1.00 General Fault
Calibration line active on power-up 0.60 1.00 General Fault
Dirty Optics 1.00 2.00 Blocked Optics
Calibration Fault 1.60 1.00 General Fault
Calibration complete 1.80 1.00 Calibration
Span calibration, apply gas 2.00 1.00 Calibration
Zero calibration in progress 2.20 1.00 Calibration
Negative signal output fault 2.40 1.00 General Fault
Flash CRC 1.20 1.00 General Fault
Ram Error 1.20 1.00 General Fault
EEPROM Error 1.20 1.00 General Fault
IR Source Failure 1.20 1.00 General Fault
28 95-8526 8.1
ORDERING INFORMATION
POINTWATCH ECLIPSE DETECTOR
When ordering, please refer to the PIRECL Model
Matrix.
CALIBRATION EQUIPMENT
Pointwatch Eclipse calibration kits consist of a sturdy
carrying case containing two 3.6 cubic foot (103 liter)
cylinders of specied gas, a regulator and pressure
indicator, three feet of tubing, barbed nozzle for direct
application to the device, and a calibration wind shield to
contain the gas in high wind applications.
Methane, 50% LFL, 2.5% by volume 006468-001
Ethane, 50% LFL, 1.5% by volume 006468-002
Ethylene, 50% LFL, 1.35% by volume 006468-003
Propane, 50% LFL, 1.1% by volume 006468-004
Propylene, 50% LFL, 1% by volume 006468-005
PointWatch Eclipse Regulator 162552-002
Eclipse Calibration Bag 006672-002
Table 7Troubleshooting Guide
Fault Condition Corrective Action
Low 24 volts 24 vdc operating voltage is out of range. Verify proper wiring to the detector and correct
voltage output from the power source. Power supply faults are self-clearing when the
condition is corrected. If the fault does not clear, consult the factory.
Dirty Optics Perform cleaning procedure, then recalibrate as required. (Refer to Maintenance for
details.)
Calibration Fault If the calibration process is allowed to time-out, the fault is set and can only be reset
with a successful calibration. Check the gas bottle to ensure that there is enough gas to
complete the calibration. Are conditions too windy for a successful calibration? If so, use
a PointWatch Eclipse Calibration Bag (P/N 006672-002). Always calibrate with a Det-
Tronics calibration kit for Eclipse with correct regulator. Be sure that the calibration gas
being used matches the congured setting. If the fault is still present, perform cleaning
procedure, then recalibrate.
Negative Signal Output This fault is indicated when the signal output drops below 3% LFL. Normally detection
capability is not compromised in this condition. The device was probably zero calibrated
with background gas present. If the condition persists, purge with clean air and repeat the
zero calibration.
Calibration line active at start-up The only way to clear this fault is to correct the wiring and reapply power. Be sure that the
calibration line is not shorted and that the calibration switch is open. If the fault does not clear,
consult the factory.
Other Faults Consult the factory.
29 95-8526 8.1
SPARE PARTS
Weather Bafe with Inlet Nozzle, 007165-002
with Hydrophobic Filter
Weather Bafe with Inlet Nozzle, 007165-001
without Hydrophobic Filter
Weather Bafe w 1/16 NPT cal 007165-004
gas inlet, with Hydrophobic Filter
Weather Bafe w 1/16 NPT cal 007165-003
gas inlet, without Hydrophobic Filter
Calibration Port Cover 009192-001
Calibration Magnet 102740-002
Silicone Free Grease 005003-001
O-Ring, 3.75 i.d., for wiring 107427-040
compartment cover
O-Ring, 3.25 i.d., for front 107427-053
ange (internal)
O-Ring, 2.44 i.d., for weather bafe 107427-052
ASSISTANCE
For assistance in ordering a system to meet the needs of
a specic application, contact:
Detector Electronics Corporation
6901 West 110th Street
Minneapolis, Minnesota 55438 USA
Operator: (952) 941-5665 or (800) 765-FIRE
Customer Service: (952) 946-6491
Fax: (952) 829-8750
Web site: www.det-tronics.com
E-mail: det-tronics@det-tronics.com
PIRECL MODEL MATRIX
MODEL DESCRIPTION
PIRECL Point Infrared Eclipse Gas Detector
TYPE THREAD TYPE
A 3/4 NPT
B M25
TYPE OUTPUT & MEASUREMENT OPTIONS
1 4-20 mA with HART protocol & RS-485: 0-100% LFL Full Scale Range
4 Eagle Quantum Premier (EQP): 0-100% LFL Full Scale Range
TYPE OPTIONAL OUTPUTS
A HART Communication Port
B HART Communication Port and Relay Board (Not compatible with EQP) Ex d only
D No Optional Outputs
E Relay Board (Not compatible with EQP) Ex d only
TYPE WEATHER PROTECTION
1 Weather Baffle with Hydrophobic Filter
2 Weather Baffle without Hydrophobic Filter
3 Weather Baffle with Hydrophobic Filter and 1/16 Threaded Calibration Port
4 Weather Baffle without Hydrophobic Filter and 1/16 Threaded Calibration Port
5 No Weather Protection Installed
TYPE APPROVALS
A FM/CSA
B Brazil
BT Brazil/SIL
R Russia
T SIL/FM/CSA/ATEX/CE
U Ukraine
W FM/CSA/ATEX/CE
Y China
TYPE CLASSIFICATION*
1 Division/Zone Ex de
2 Division/Zone Ex d
*Detectors are always Class I, Div. 1.
A-1 95-8526 8.1
APPENDIX A
HART COMMUNICATION
Digital communication with the Pointwatch Eclipse is necessary to monitor internal status and to modify the factory
settings. This appendix provides guidance on establishing HART communication, and describes the communication
menu structure when using the Eclipse with the HART Handheld Communicator.
ESTABLISHING LOCAL HART COMMUNICATION WITH POINTWATCH ECLIPSE
Unscrew the protective cap from the HART communication port on the side of the Eclipse gas detector. Connect the
HART Communicator test probes to the two terminals inside the port (non-polarized). Press the "on" key to switch on
the HART Handheld Communicator. The Online menu is the rst menu to appear when the Communicator is properly
connected to the Eclipse. This menu is structured to provide important information about the connected device. The
HART protocol incorporates a concept called the "Device Description Language" (DDL) that enables HART instrument
manufacturers to dene and document their product in a consistent format. This format is readable by handheld
communicators, PC's and other process interface devices that support DDL.
NOTES
Proper analog signal output termination and minimum loop resistance must be completed in all cases to enable
HART communication. Failure to provide proper analog signal output loop resistance will preclude all HART
communication.
It is possible to establish HART Communication with the PIRECL in Generic HART communication mode. In
this mode, HART communication with the PIRECL detector will be established, but the Communicator will not
recognize the PIRECL as a gas detector. Generic HART communication will not provide access to the PIRECL
DDL menu and important set-up, diagnostics or operation functions, including gas type selection.
PROCEDURE TO DETERMINE IF ECLIPSE DDL IS PRESENT IN YOUR COMMUNICATOR
From the Main menu, select the Ofine menu. 1.
From the Ofine menu, select New Congurations to access the list of device descriptions programmed into your 2.
HART Communicator. The Manufacturer menu displays a list of each manufacturer with available DDLs.
Select a manufacturer, and the display will show the list of available device types. 3.
If you cannot nd the Eclipse device on your Communicator, the specic DDL is not programmed into the Memory 4.
Module. Your HART Communicator will require a DDL upgrade in order to access all Eclipse DDL functions.
The HART Communication Foundation (www.hartcomm.org) manages the HCF Approved DDL Library and programming
sites for HCF Approved eld communicators. A complete listing of the DD Library is available for download and
provides manufacturer and device type le identication.
A-2 95-8526 8.1
ECLIPSE HART MENU STRUCTURE
This section displays the menu trees for the Pointwatch Eclipse. The Menu tree shows the primary commands and
options available when using menu selections.
1 Device Setup
2 Gas xxxxxxx
3 PV xxx %LEL
4 PV AO xxx mA
5 PV URV xxx % LEL
1 Process Variables
2 Diag/Service
3 Basic Setup
4 Detailed Setup
5 Review
1 Reference xxxx
2 Snsr Temp xxxx
3 Operating Mode
4 Calibration
5 xmtr flt 1
6 xmtr flt 2
7 xmtr status 1
8 xmtr status 2
1 Zero Trim
2 Calibrate Sensor
3 Cal Date 12/2/2000
4 D/A Trim
1 4 mA
2 20 mA
3 Other
4 End
1 Self Test
2 Response Test
3 Reset
1 Gas xxxxxxxx
2 Conc 0.0% LEL
3 AO 4.00 mA
1 Running hrs xxxx
2 Max Temperatures
3 Min Temperatures
4 Cal Log
5 Event Log
% LEL
ppm
Vol %
1 URV 20-100% LEL
2 LRV 0% LEL
3 USL 100% LEL
4 LSL 0% LEL
1 Tag xxxxxx
2 Date: 6/30/2000
3 Descriptor
4 Message
5 Model: Eclipse
6 Write Protect xx
7 Revision #'s
8 Final Assembly #
9 Dev id xxxxxx
1 PV USL xxxx unit
2 Active xxxx
3 Reference xxxx
4 Ratio xxxx
5 Absorption xxxx%
6 Span Factor xxxxx
7 Snsr Temp xx degC
8 Vol % @ 100% LEL
9 Coefficient A
Coefficient B
Coefficient C
Coefficient D
Coefficient E
Spcl
Methane
Ethane
Propane
Ethylene
Propylene
Butane
Spare 6
Spare 7
Spare 8
1 Config Gas Alarms
2 Config Fault Out
3 Hart Output
4 Com Port
1 Password
2 Set Write Protect
3 Write Protect xx
Disable
Enable
Change Password
1 Protocol xxxxx
2 Poll Addr xxx
3 Baud Rate xxxx
4 Parity xxxx
1 EQ DIP Switch xxx
1 Poll Addr xx
2 Num Req preams x
1 Analog Fault Codes
2 Analog Code Values
1 High Alarm Level
2 High Alarm Latch
3 Low Alarm Level
4 Low Alarm Latch
Spcl Gas Coef A
Spcl Gas Coef B
Spcl Gas Coef C
Spcl Gas Coef D
Spcl Gas Coef E
Spcl Gas Vol %
1 Universal Rev 5
2 Fld Dev Rev 1
3 Software Rev xxx
Running Hrs xxxxx
Event History
(Event)
xxxxx Hrs
1 Previous
2 Next
3 Exit
Running Hrs xxxxx
Calibration History
(Event)
xxxxx Hrs
1 Previous
2 Next
3 Exit
Running Hrs xxxxx
Minimum Temperature
xxxx Deg C xxxx Hours
Min Temp Since Reset
Reset Min & Max Temp?
ABORT OK
Running Hrs xxxxx
Maximum Temperature
Max Temp Since Reset
Reset Min & Max Temp?
ABORT OK
1 Calibrate
2 Cal Conc xxxx
3 Cal Gas xxxx
4 Gas Type xxxx
5 Calib Type xxxx
6 Cuvette Length
Same
Methane
Propane
Std
Cuvette
Eclipse
PIR 9400
User Defined
1 Warm Up
2 Blocked Optics
3 Calibration
4 Fault
Modbus
ASCII
1200
2400
4800
9600
19.2K
None
Even
Odd
1 Test Device
2 Loop Test
3 Calibration
4 Status
5 History
1 Tag xxxxxx
2 PV Unit xxxxxx
3 Range Values
4 Device Information
5 Gas xxxxxxxx
1 Sensor Information
2 Gas Type xxxxx
3 Output Condition
5 Write Protect
NOTE
Refer to Alarm Relays in the
Specifications section of this
manual for important information
regarding alarm relays.
A-3 95-8526 8.1
CONNECTIONS AND HARDWARE
The HART Communicator can interface with the Eclipse from the onboard I.S. communication port, from the control room,
or any wiring termination point in the analog output signal loop. To communicate, connect the HART communicator in
parallel with the Eclipse analog signal or load resistor. The connections are non-polarized.
NOTE
The HART Communicator needs a minimum of 250 ohms resistance in the loop to function properly. The HART
Communicator does not measure loop resistance. Any external ohmmeter is required.
COMMONLY USED HART COMMANDS
The most commonly used HART commands for the PIRECL are:
Performing basic setup functions such as: 1.
Assigning a tag number to the detector
Assigning unit of measure (%LEL, PPM, % Vol)
Performing detailed setup functions such as: 2.
Assigning a special gas type
Conguring Gas Alarm Levels (Low & High threshold)
Conguring Fault Codes (analog signal output levels during various fault conditions)
Conguration of HART and MODBUS communication protocols
Write-protecting the HART programming, or assigning a password to protect the setup.
Performing Diagnostic and Service functions such as: 3.
Reset Alarms or Faults
Performing a signal loop output test
Performing a Calibration
Monitoring detector history/data logs
It is important for the user to understand how to correctly operate the HART Field Communicator, and how to navigate
through the various programming options and either select or de-select the desired parameters. This document does
NOT cover this fundamental information on the HART Field Communicator. Please refer to the Field Communicator
instruction manual for specic guidance on how to operate the communicator.
A-4 95-8526 8.1
TYPICAL SETUP OF A PIRECL
After HART communication has been established with the PIRECL, the following operational parameters are generally
veried:
Inspect the Root menu to conrm that the gas type selected is proper for the gas hazard to be detected. Methane 1.
gas is the factory default gas type. If methane is not the desired gas type, then change the setting using the
detailed setup programming option, and perform a eld calibration using the same gas type as is selected. Refer
to the Calibration section of this manual.
Inspect the Gas Alarm level thresholds and Fault output signals using the Detailed setup option, and modify these 2.
settings if required.
Enter a device Tag number and/or descriptor for future traceability and guidance. 3.
While these three operations are typical, these steps may not be satisfactory for your application.
The following data provides basic guidance on HART menu navigation. Refer to the HART Field Communicator manual
for additional guidance.
ONLINE MENU
When HART communication is established with the PIRECL, the rst menu displayed is the Root menu:
To select any of the 5 menu options shown, highlight the desired option using the up/down
arrow key, and then press the right arrow key.
1 Device Setup
Press to access the Device Setup menu from the Online menu. The Device Setup menu
accesses every congurable parameter of the connected device. Refer to the Device Setup
SubMenu for more information.
2 Gas
This shows gas type selected for detection. Factory default setting is methane.
3 PV (Primary Variable)
This shows the gas concentration being detected in %LEL.
4 PV AO (Analog Output)
This shows the Analog output level in selected units, typically milliamperes.
5 PV URV (Upper Range Value)
Select URV to view the upper range value and related engineering units.
1 Device Setup
2 Gas xxxxx
3 PV xxx %LEL
4 PV AO xxx mA
5 PV URV xxx %LEL
A-5 95-8526 8.1
DEVICE SETUP SUBMENU
The Device Setup menu accesses every congurable parameter of the connected device.
The rst accessible setup parameters include:
1 Process Variables
Selecting this menu item will list all process variables and their values.
These process variables are continuously updated, and include:
Gas xxxxx (gas type being detected).
Conc 0.0 % (concentration of gas in % full scale).
AO 4.00 mA (analog output of device).
2 Diag/Service Menu
Selecting this menu offers device and loop tests, calibration, and status/history options.
Refer to the Diag/Service Submenu for more information.
3 Basic Setup
This menu provides quick access to a number of congurable parameters including tag, unit, range values, device
information, and gas type. Refer to the Basic Setup Submenu for additional information.
The options available in the Basic Setup menu are the most fundamental tasks that can be performed with a given
device. These tasks are a subset of the options available under the Detailed Setup menu.
4 Detailed Setup
Press to access the Detailed setup menu.
This menu provides access to:
1 Sensor information
2 Gas Type
3 Output Condition
4 Device information
5 Write protect
Refer to the Detailed Setup Submenu for additional information.
5 Review
Press to access the Review menu. This menu lists all of the parameters stored in the connected device, including
information about the measuring element, signal condition, and output. It also includes stored information about the
connected device such as tag, materials of construction, and device software revision.
1 Process Variables
2 Diag/Service
3 Basic Setup
4 Detailed Setup
5 Review
A-6 95-8526 8.1
DIAGNOSTICS/SERVICE MENU
The specic diagnostic and/or service functions available are:
1 Test Device
1 Self-test. Internal tests are performed and any problems are reported in
xmtr flt 1 and xmtr flt 2.
2 Response Test. The analog output is held at 4 mA to prevent the alarm relays
from activating when gas is applied. Gas response is indicated
by the PV.
3 Reset. Latched relay outputs are reset.
2 Loop Test
This test allows the operator to manually set the analog signal output to a selected constant
value.
3 Calibration
This menu option initiates the calibration routine and is used to set device calibration preferences.
Calibration Submenus include:
1 Zero Trim. The current sensor input is used as the new zero reference.
2 Calibrate Sensor. This is the command used to calibrate the Eclipse Detector. Submenus include:
1 Calibrate. Zero and span calibrations are performed.
2 Cal Concentration. The output will be set to this value when gas is applied during calibration.
3 Cal Gas
4 Gas Type. Submenu includes optional gases:
Methane
Propane
5 Calibration Type. Submenu includes options:
Standard
Cuvette
6 Cuvette Length (in millimeters)
3 Calibration Date (CalDate). Shows date of last calibration
4 D/A trim (internal use only).
4 Status
This menu option shows extensive status information about the detector. Data available includes:
1 Reference xxxx (output value of the reference sensor).
2 Snsr temp xxxx (temperature of the sensor that is making the process measurement).
3 Operating mode (calibration, normal, reset)
4 Calibration
5 xmtr flt 1. Xmtr flt and xmtr status provide status information relating to failures, warnings and status
of processes.
6 xmtr flt 2
7 xmtr status 1
8 xmtr status 2
1 Test Device
2 Loop Test
3 Calibration
4 Status
5 History
A-7 95-8526 8.1
5 History
This menu option shows extensive historical information about the detector. Data available includes:
1 Running hrs xxxx (the number of hours the unit has been powered).
2 Max temperatures (the maximum temperatures recorded in the device).
See max temperature submenu below.
3 Min temperatures (the minimum temperatures recorded in the device).
See min temperature submenu below.
4 Cal log (data regarding stored calibrations). The most recent calibration is shown rst.
Calibrations are recorded as zero only cal, cal OK (zero and span were successfully completed),
and cal failed. See cal log submenu below.
5 Event log (data regarding stored events). The most recent event is shown rst.
Recorded events include blocked optics, warm-up, zero drift, low alarms and high alarms.
See event log submenu below.
Max Temperature Submenu:
Running hrs xxxx
Maximum Temperature
xxxx degC xxxx hours
Max temp since reset
Reset min&max temp?
ABORT OK
Min Temperature Submenu:
Running hrs xxxx
Minimum Temperature
Min temp since reset
Reset min&max temp?
ABORT OK
Cal Log Submenu:
Running hrs xxxx
Calibration history
(Event)
xxxxx Hrs
1 Previous
2 Next
3 Exit
Event Log Submenu:
Running hrs xxxx
Event history
(Event)
xxxx Hrs
1 Previous
2 Next
3 Exit
A-8 95-8526 8.1
BASIC SETUP SUBMENU
The tag number identies a specic device. Changing units affects the engineering units
that are displayed. Re-ranging changes the analog output scaling.
1 Tag
Press to access the Tag number menu. Enter the device tag number as desired.
2 PV Unit
Press to access PV Unit submenu. Select %LEL for standard combustible applications.
% LEL
ppm
Vol %
3 Range Values
Press to access Range Values submenu.
1 URV 60% LEL (upper range value).
2 LRV 5.0% LEL (lower range value).
3 USL 60% LEL (upper sensor limit).
4 LSL 5.0% LEL (lower sensor limit).
Press to access device information submenu:
1 Tag xxxx
2 Date 6/30/2000
3 Descriptor (text associated with the field device that can be used by the operator in any way).
4 Message (text associated with the field device that can be used by the operator in any way).
5 Model: Eclipse
6 Write protect xx. This indicates whether variables can be written to the device, or whether commands
that cause actions to be performed in the device can or cannot occur.
7 Revision #s. See Revision #s submenu below.
8 Final asmbly num
9 Dev id xxxx (a number is used to identify a unique field device).
Revision # submenu
offers selection options for:
1 Universal rev
2 Fld dev rev
3 Software rev xx
5 Gas
Type of gas being detected.
1 Tag
2 PV Unit xxxxx
3 Range Values
5 Gas xxxxxx
A-9 95-8526 8.1
DETAILED SETUP MENU
This menu provides detailed information on the internal detector operations. Submenu
options include:
1 PV USL xxxx. The upper sensor limit value denes the maximum usable
value for the upper range of the sensor.
2 Active xxxx (output value of the active sensor).
3 Reference xxxx (output value of the reference sensor).
4 Ratio xxxx (the ratio of the active sensor over the reference sensor).
5 Absorption xxxx % (the gas absorption expressed in percent).
6 Span Factor xxxx (the number used in calibrating this specic device).
7 Snsr temp xx degC (the temperature of the sensor that is making
the process measurement).
8 Vol % @ 100%LEL (the % volume of gas equal to 100% LEL).
9 Coefcient A
Coefcient B
Coefcient C
Coefcient D
Coefcient E
2 Gas Type
Select the gas to be detected here. Submenu options include:
Spcl
Spcl Gas Coef A
Spcl Gas Coef B
Spcl Gas Coef C
Spcl Gas Coef D
Spcl Gas Coef E
Spcl Gas Vol %
Methane
Ethane
Propane
Ethylene
Propylene
Butane
Spare 6
Spare 7
Spare 8
2 Gas Type xxxxx
3 Output Condition
5 Write Protect
A-10 95-8526 8.1
3 Output Condition
Select and congure the output signal options for the Eclipse detector. Submenu options:
1 Config Gas Alarms. Submenu options inlcude:
1 High Alarm Level. The high alarm level cannot be set higher than 60% LEL or lower than the
low alarm level.
2 High Alarm Latch
3 Low Alarm Level. The low alarm level cannot be set lower than 5% LEL or higher than the
high alarm level.
4 Low Alarm Latch
NOTE
Refer to Alarm Relaysin the Specifcations section of this manual for important information regarding alarm relays.
2 Config fault out. Submenu options include:
1 Analog fault codes. This programs the analog output used to indicate faults. Submenu options
include:
Eclipse
PIR 9400
User defined
2 Analog code values. Submenu options include:
1 Warm up
2 Blocked Optics
3 Calibration
4 Fault
3 Hart output. Submenu options include:
1 Poll addr xx (address used by the host to identify a field device).
2 Num req preams x (Number of Request Preambles).
4 Com Port. Submenu options include:
1 EQ DIP switch xxx (used with Eagle Quantum systems only).
1 Protocol xxxx (protocol for RS-485 communications). Submenu options:
Modbus
ASCII
2 Poll addr xxx (polling address for RS-485 communications).
3 Baud Rate xxxx (baud rate for RS-485 communications). Submenu options include:
1200
2400
4800
9600
19.2k
4 Parity xxxx (parity for RS-485 communications). Submenu options include:
None
Even
Odd
A-11 95-8526 8.1
Press to access device information submenu:
1 Tag xxxx
2 Date 6/30/2000
3 Descriptor (text associated with the field device that can be used by the operator in any way).
4 Message (text associated with the field device that can be used by the operator in any way).
5 Model: Eclipse
6 Write protect xx. This indicates whether variables can be written to the device, or whether commands
that cause actions to be performed in the device can or cannot occur.
7 Revision #s. See Revision #s submenu below.
8 Final asmbly num
9 Dev id xxxx (a number used to identify a unique field device).
Revision # submenu
offers selection options for:
1 Universal rev
2 Fld dev rev
3 Software rev xx
5 Write Protect
Enable/disable password and write protection capability. Submenu options include:
1 Password. A password is required to enable writing to the device.
2 Set Write Protect
Disable
Enable
Change Password
3 Write Protect xx. This indicates whether variables can be written to the eld device or whether
commands that cause actions to the performed in the device can or cannot occur.
B-1 95-8526 8.1
APPENDIX B
MODBUS COMMUNICATION
OVERVIEW
This appendix outlines the communication protocol and related memory structures that dene the interface between
PointWatch Eclipse Gas Detector and a system MODBUS Master. The system MODBUS Master is dened as any
device capable of reading and writing to the holding register area of a MODBUS slave device. This includes proprietary
software, HMI systems such as Wonderware and The FIX, PLCs and DCSs.
The Eclipse will respond as a slave device to a MODBUS Master, allowing the master to control data ow. A MODBUS
memory map is dened, which divides memory into functional blocks consisting of: factory constants, conguration
information, real time status, control and device dened information. Each block is then subdivided into individual
variables that may be simple integers or oating point numbers.
WIRING
Typical RS-485/Modbus communication architecture is indicated in the diagram below. Eclipse units act as slave
devices to a Modbus Master. Multiple Eclipse units are daisy-chained for RS-485 communication. If long cable runs
are used, 120 Ohm end-of-line termination resistors may be required.
Individual Eclipse units are wired as shown below. Note the inclusion of the end-of-line termination resistor.
For more information, refer to the EIA RS-485-A standard.
A2341
24 VDC
24 VDC
+24 VDC
+24 VDC
CALIBRATE
+ 4-20 MA
4-20 MA
RS-485 A
RS-485 B
RELAY POWER
FAULT
LOW ALARM
HIGH ALARM
NO USER CONNECTION
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
24 VDC
POWER SUPPLY
+
MODBUS
MASTER
GND
A
B
PIRECL
120 OHM TERMINATION RESISTOR
ON MASTER AND LAST SLAVE IN DAISY CHAIN
A2340
MODBUS
MASTER
GND
A
B
ECLIPSE
SLAVE #1
ECLIPSE
SLAVE #2
ECLIPSE
SLAVE #N
B-2 95-8526 8.1
HARDWARE LAYER
RS-485 is used for the hardware interface layer. The output drivers are capable of driving at least 32 devices. The
device RS-485 output is tri-stated until a command address matches the programmed address. Default serial settings
are MODBUS protocol, address 1, 9600 baud, 1 stop bit, and no parity.
MODBUS FUNCTION CODES
MEMORY MAP
ECLIPSE MEMORY MAP
Factory Constants
This area holds values determined at the time of manufacture. Device type and rmware version is determined when
the program is compiled and cant be changed. The serial number and manufacture date is written as part of the
manufacturing process.
Supported Modbus Functions
Function Number Defnition
3 Read holding registers
6 Preset single registers
16 Preset multiple registers
Description Starting Address Ending Address Size in Words Access Memory Type
Factory Constants 40001 40100 100 Read/Write at Factory Flash/EEprom
Device Conguration 40101 40200 100 Read/Write EEprom
Status Information 40201 40300 100 Read Only Ram
Control Words 40301 40400 100 Write Only Pseudo RAM
Event Logs 40401 40430 30 Read Only EEprom
Calibration Logs 40431 40460 30 Read Only EEprom
Raw Signal Buffer 40500 40979 480 Read Only Ram
Eclipse Factory Constants
Description Address Value
Device Type 40001 3 (Eclipse)
Firmware Version 40003 00.00..99.99
Serial Number 40004
40005
Unsigned Long LSW
Unsigned Long MSW
Year (Manufacture Date) 40006 1999
Month 40007 1..12
Day 40008 1..31
Reserved 40009
to
40010
B-3 95-8526 8.1
Device Confguration: (Read/Write)
This area of memory holds eld adjustable parameters for the device. The Hart conguration changed bit will be set
on writes to this area.
Eclipse Device Confguration
Modbus Polling Address 40101 1..247
Baud Rate Code 40102 See Codes
Parity Code 40103 See Codes
Gas Type 40104 See Codes
Calibration Gas Type 40105 See Codes
Calibration Method 40106 See Codes
Calibration Cuvette Length
(1.0 to 150.0 mm)
40107 Float LSW
40108 Float MSW
Analog Fault Code 40109 See Codes
4 to 20 Range
(20 to 100% LEL)
40110 Float LSW
40111 Float MSW
Cal Gas Concentration
(20 to 100% LEL)
40112 Float LSW
40113 Float MSW
Warmup Fault Level
(0.0 to 24.0 mA)
40114 Float LSW
40115 Float MSW
Blocked Optics Fault Level
(0.0 to 24.0 mA)
40116 Float LSW
40117 Float MSW
Calibration Current Level
(0.0 to 24.0 mA)
40118 Float LSW
40119 Float MSW
General Fault Current Level
(0.0 to 24.0 mA)
40120 Float LSW
40121 Float MSW
Volume at LEL
(Special Gas Type)
40122 Float LSW
40123 Float MSW
Gas Coefcient a
(Special Gas Type)
40124 Float LSW
40125 Float MSW
Gas Coefcient b
(Special Gas Type)
40126 Float LSW
40127 Float MSW
Gas Coefcient c
(Special Gas Type)
40128 Float LSW
40129 Float MSW
Gas Coefcient d
(Special Gas Type)
40130 Float LSW
40131 Float MSW
Gas Coefcient e
(Special Gas Type)
40132 Float LSW
40133 Float MSW
Low Alarm Level
(5 to 60% LEL)
40134 Float LSW
40135 Float MSW
High Alarm Level
(5 to 60% LEL)
40136 Float LSW
40137 Float MSW
Low Alarm Latch 40138 See Codes
High Alarm Latch 40139 See Codes
Reserved 40140
NOTE
Ref er t o Al ar m Rel ays i n t he
Specifcations section of this manual for
important information regarding alarm
relays.
B-4 95-8526 8.1
Device Status (Read only)
This area of memory holds real time status information.
Eclipse Status Information
General Status Bits 40201 Bit Values (See below)
Fault Status Bits 40202 Bit Values (See below)
Gas Level in LEL 40203 Float LSW
40204 Float MSW
Calibration Step 40205 See Codes
Active Sensor Signal 40206 Float LSW
40207 Float MSW
Reference Sensor Signal 40208 Float LSW
40209 Float MSW
Sensor Ratio 40210 Float LSW
40211 Float MSW
Sensor Absorption 40212 Float LSW
40213 Float MSW
Temperature (C) 40214 Float LSW
40215 Float MSW
Hour Meter 40216 Unsigned Long LSW
40217 Unsigned Long MSW
Max Temperature 40218 Float LSW
40219 Float MSW
Max Temp Hour 40220 Unsigned Long LSW
Max Temp (Since Reset) 40222 Float LSW
40223 Float MSW
Max Temp Hour (Since Reset) 40224 Unsigned Long LSW
Ram Error Code 40226 Unsigned Integer
Volume at LEL
(Current Gas Type)
40227 Float LSW
40228 Float MSW
Gas Coefcient a
(Current Gas Type)
40229 Float LSW
40230 Float MSW
Gas Coefcient b
(Current Gas Type)
40231 Float LSW
40232 Float MSW
Gas Coefcient c
(Current Gas Type)
40233 Float LSW
40234 Float MSW
Gas Coefcient d
(Current Gas Type)
40235 Float LSW
40236 Float MSW
Gas Coefcient e
(Current Gas Type)
40237 Float LSW
40238 Float MSW
B-5 95-8526 8.1
General Status Bits
These bits are used to signal the current operating mode of the device.
Eclipse Status Information (continued)
Min Temperature 40239 Float LSW
40240 Float MSW
Min Temp Hour 40241 Unsigned Long LSW
Min Temp (Since Reset) 40243 Float LSW
40244 Float MSW
Min Temp Hour (Since Reset) 40245 Unsigned Long LSW
Fixed 4 to 20 mA Value 40247 Float LSW
40248 Float MSW
Reserved 40249
Reserved 40250
Reserved 40251
Reserved 40252
Zero Ratio 40253 Float LSW
40254 Float MSW
Span Factor 40255 Float LSW
40256 Float MSW
5 Volt Power Supply Value
(As read by ADC)
40257 Float LSW
40258 Float MSW
(As read by ADC)
40259 Float LSW
40260 Float MSW
(As read by ADC)
40261 Float LSW
40262 Float MSW
Name Bit Description
Device Fault (any fault) 0 Set for all fault conditions
Calibration Active 1 Set during calibration
Warm up Mode 2 Set during warm-up
Low Alarm Active 3 Set while alarm is active
High Alarm Active 4 Set while alarm is active
Output Current Fixed 5 Set when output current is xed
Modbus Write Protect 6 0 = Locked 1 = Unlocked
Calibration Input Active 7 True while the cal line is active
Magnetic Switch Active 8 True while the onboard magnetic switch is active
Hart Initiated Self Test 9 True when self test is initiated from the Hart interface
Reserved 10
Response Test Active 11 True during the gas response test.
Manual Self Test Active 12 True during manual self test
B-6 95-8526 8.1
Fault Status Word
These bits are used to signal the active faults of the device.
Control Words
Setting values in this area of memory initiates action in the device. For example, it may start a calibration sequence.
The device automatically clears command word bits after the function is performed.
Name Bit
Calibration Fault 0
Dirty Optics 1
Open Lamp 2
Cal Active at start 3
EE Error 1 4
EE Error 2 5
Ref ADC Saturated 6
Active ADC Saturated 7
Bad 24 volts 8
Bad 12 volts 9
Bad 5 volts 10
Zero Drift 11
Flash CRC Error 12
Ram Error 13
Eclipse Control Words
Command Word 1 40301 See below
Command Word 2 (Reserved) 40302
Reserved 40303
to
40306
B-7 95-8526 8.1
Command Word 1
Event Logs
Fault and calibration logs are held in this area of memory.
Description Bit
Start Calibration 0
Abort Calibration 1
Warm up Mode 2
Low Alarm Active 3
High Alarm Active 4
Output Current Fixed 5
Modbus Write Protect 6
Calibration Input Active 7
Magnetic Switch Active 8
Hart Initiated Self Test 9
Reserved 10
Response Test Active 11
Manual Self Test Active 12
End Response Test 13
Reserved 14
Start Manual Self Test 15
Eclipse Event Logs
Description Address Value Notes
Event Hour 40401 Unsigned Long LSW 1 of 10 logs
Event ID 1 40403 See Codes
Event Hour 40428 Unsigned Long LSW Last of 10
Event ID 10 40430 See Codes
Event Hour 40431 Unsigned Long LSW 1 of 10 logs
Calibration Event ID 1 40433 See Codes
Event Hour 40458 Unsigned Long LSW Last of 10
Calibration Event ID 10 40460 See Codes
B-8 95-8526 8.1
VALUE CODES
Baud Rate Code
Parity Code
Gas Type
Description Code
1200 0
2400 1
4800 2
9600 (Default) 3
19200 4
Description Code
Methane 0
Ethane 1
Propane 2
Ethylene 3
Propylene 4
Butane 5
Reserved 6
Reserved 7
Reserved 8
Special 9
Description Code
None (Default) 0
Even 1
Odd 2
B-9 95-8526 8.1
Calibration Gas Type
Calibration Method
Analog Fault Code
Calibration Step
Description Code
Waiting to Start 0
Waiting for Zero 1
Waiting for Signal 2
Waiting for Gas 3
Waiting for Span 4
Waiting for End 5
Calibration Terminated 6
Calibration Complete 7
Description Code
Same as Measured 0
Methane 1
Propane 2
Description Code
Eclipse 0
PIR 9400 1
User Dened 2
Description Code
Standard 0
Cuvette 1
B-10 95-8526 8.1
Alarm Latch Confguration
NOTE
Refer to Alarm Relaysin the Specifcations section of this manual for important information regarding alarm relays.
Event Log ID Codes
Calibration Log ID Codes
ASCII PROTOCOL
The RS485 serial port can be congured for ASCII protocol, which is intended for applications that dont require custom
software on the host side. Off the shelf terminal emulation software can be used to receive messages from the device.
Percent LEL and sensor readings are sent once per second and user prompt messages are sent during the calibration
process to guide the user at each step. Default serial settings are 9600 baud, 1 stop bit, and no parity. Protocol and
serial parameters should be selected with the HART handheld communicator.
Description Code
Non-Latching 0
Latching 1
Description Code
Empty 0
Blocked Beam 1
Warm-up 2
Zero Drift 3
Low Alarm 4
High Alarm 5
Description Code
Empty 0
Zero Cal 1
Zero and Span 2
Failed Cal 3
C-1 95-8526 8.1
APPENDIX C
EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER COMPATIBLE ECLIPSE
INSTALLATION AND WIRING
The Eagle Quantum Premier (EQP) version of the Model PIRECL PointWatch Eclipse uses the identical installation
procedure, device location guidelines, and power supply requirements as described in the Installation section of this
manual. Refer to the EQP version wiring diagram for specic wiring termination guidance.
An important difference in EQP applications is that LON network cabling will be routed both in and out from the the EQP
Eclipse enclosure, so this requirement should be anticipated and planned for during EQP Eclipse installation.
IMPORTANT
Det-Tronics recommends the use of shielded cable (required by ATEX) to prevent external electromagnetic
interference from affecting feld devices.
IMPORTANT
For best fault isolation performance, the maximum LON wiring length should not exceed 1600 feet (500 meters).
IMPORTANT
Be sure that selected cable meets all job specifcations. The use of other cable types can degrade system
operation. If necessary, consult factory for further suggested cable types.
Table C-1LON Maximum Cable Lengths
Note: *Use the same type of cable in each wiring segment between
network extenders.
**Maximum wire lengths represent the linear wire distance of
LON communications wiring between network extenders.
The maximum wire lengths given in Table C-1 are based upon
the cables physical and electrical characteristics.
LON Cable
(Manufacturer and Part No.)*
Maximum Length**
Feet Meters
Belden 8719 6,500 2,000
Belden 8471 6,500 2,000
FSI 0050-000006-00-NPLFP 6,500 2,000
Technor BFOU 4,900 1,500
Level IV, 22 AWG 4,500 1,370
C-2 95-8526 8.1
CONFIGURATION AND OPERATION
Conguration of the EQP Eclipse is accomplished using Det-Tronics Safety System Software (S3) that is running on the
EQP Operator Interface Station (OIS).
ONBOARD HART PORT
The on-board HART port is functional on the EQP Eclipse, however, it should not be used for device conguration
purposes. All EQP device conguration should be performed using the S3 program.
MULTI-COLORED LED
Operation of the status indicating LED is identical to all other PIRECL versions.
REMOTE CALIBRATION OPTION
Operation of the remote calibration option is identical to all other PIRECL versions.
ANALOG OUTPUT
A 4-20 mA analog current output is not available with EQP PIRECL.
RS-485 COMMUNICATION
RS-485 communication is not available with EQP PIRECL.
CALIBRATION ROUTINE
The calibration procedure for the EQP PIRECL (normal and zero calibration) is identical to all other PIRECL versions.
NOTE
For complete information regarding installation, confguration or operation of the Eagle Quantum Premier system,
refer to form 95-8533 (Eagle Quantum Premier hardware manual) or form 95-8560 (Safety System Software
manual).
ECLIPSE OPERATION WITH EAGLE QUANTUM PREMIER
Table C-2Typical Update Rate for PIRECL in an EQP System
Field Device Transmit time to Controller (sec)
PIRECL
Gas Alarms
Gas Level
Immediate
1
Device Fault 1
C-3 95-8526 8.1
SETTING NETWORK ADDRESSES
Overview of Network Addresses
Each PIRECL IR gas detector on the EQP LON must be assigned a unique address. Addresses 1 to 4 are reserved for
the EQP controller. Valid addresses for eld devices including PIRECL gas detectors are from 5 to 250.
IMPORTANT
If the address is set to zero or an address above 250, the system will ignore the switch setting and the device.
The LON address is programmed by setting rocker switches on an 8 switch DIP Switch located within the PIRECL
housing. The address number is binary encoded with each switch having a specic binary value with switch 1 being
the LSB (Least Signicant Bit). (See Figure C-1.) The devices LON address is equal to the added value of all closed
rocker switches. All Open switches are ignored.
Example: for node No. 5, close rocker switches 1 and 3 (binary values 1 + 4); for node No. 25, close rocker switches
1, 4 and 5 (binary values 1 + 8 + 16).
NOTE
For convenience in setting LON address switches, a Rocker Switch Table is included in the EQP System
manual (form 95-8533, Appendix D).
Table C-4PIRECL Faults and Fixed Logic System Outputs
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128
ON
NODE ADDRESS EQUALS THE ADDED VALUE
OF ALL CLOSED ROCKER SWITCHES
A2190
BINARY
VALUE
CLOSED = ON
OPEN = OFF
Figure C-1PIRECL Address Switches
Table C-3PIRECL Fixed Alarm Logic (Thresholds Programmed Using S3 Confguration Software)
Field Device Fire
Alarm
High Gas
Alarm
Low Gas
Alarm
Trouble Supervisory
PIRECL (Point IR Eclipse)
High Alarm X
Low Alarm X
Field Device VFD Faults Trouble
LED
Trouble
Relay
Calibration Fault X X
Dirty Optics X X
C-4 95-8526 8.1
Do not assign duplicated addresses. Duplicated addresses are not automatically detected. Modules given the same
address will use the number given and report to the controller using that address. The status word will show the latest
update, which could be from any of the reporting modules using that address.
After setting address switches, record the address number and device type on the Address Identication Chart (form
95-8487). Post the chart in a convenient location near the Controller for future reference.
IMPORTANT
The PIRECL sets the LON address only when power is applied to the device. Therefore, it is important to set the
switches before applying power. If an address is ever changed, system power must be cycled before the new
address will take effect.
PIRECL Address Switches
Address switches for PIRECL are located within the device enclosure. Refer to Figure C-2 for switch location.
WARNING
Disassembly of the PIRECL housing and removal of the front electronics module from the bulkhead is required to
gain access to the network address switches. Power should be removed from the detector before disassembly.
If disassembly is performed in a hazardous areas, the area must be de-classifed before starting disassembly.
WARNING
Disassembly of the PIRECL detector should only be performed with proper electrostatic discharge grounding
protection. A controlled lab or shop setting is recommended for device programming.
The PIRECL detector contains semiconductor devices that are sensitive to electrostatic discharge (ESD).
Damage caused by electrostatic discharge can be virtually eliminated if the equipment is handled only in a
static safeguarded work area and protective measures against static electricity discharge are employed during
the disassembly process. Since a static safeguarded work area is usually impractical in most feld installations,
handle the device by the housing, taking care not to touch electronic components or terminals. Use a wrist
grounding strap or similar method at all times to control accidental ESD when disassembling, programming, or
reassembling the PIRECL gas detector.
Figure C-2Location of PIRECL Address Switches
ADDRESS SWITCHES
ELECTRONIC MODULE
REMOVED FROM HOUSING
A2192
C-5 95-8526 8.1
Switch Access Procedure
NOTE
It is strongly recommended to document all PIRECL gas detector network addresses as well as the addresses
of all other LON devices on the Address Identifcation Chart before disassembling and programming the
PIRECL gas detectors.
Removal of four stainless steel ange bolts and the front electronic module of the PIRECL IR gas detector from the
bulkhead is required in order to gain access to the network address DIP switch. Tools required for this procedure
include a 4mm hex wrench and a torque wrench capable of accurately measuring 40 inch-pounds.
1. Remove 24 Vdc power from the PIRECL detector. Remove the weather baffle from the detector.
2. Remove the four stainless steel flange bolts using a 4mm hex wrench. Take care to properly support the
electronic module as the last flange bolt is removed.
3. Carefully remove the electronic module by extracting it straight out from the bulkhead.
4. Set the network address switches.
5. Ensure that the module O-ring is intact and undamaged.
6. Reinstall the electronic module by inserting it straight into the bulkhead.
NOTE
Take care to properly align the modules electrical connector with the bulkhead connector before attempting to
fully insert the module. Failure to do so may result in damage to the module and/or bulkhead.
7. Insert and tighten the four flange bolts in an opposing consecutive order in two stages first partially tighten
all four bolts equally, and then fully tighten each bolt in an opposing order to 40 inch-pounds of torque.
8. Apply power after all network addresses have been programmed and all field enclosures are properly
installed.
TYPICAL APPLICATIONS
Figure C-3 is a simplied drawing of a typical EQP system. This system includes an EQP Controller, DCIO and various
LON eld devices.
C-6 95-8526 8.1
E
Q
P
2
5
0
0
A
R
M
2
4

V
D
C

1
3
1
4
2
4

V
D
C

+
1
1
1
2
B
6
1
0
A
5
9
2
+
3
4
+
1
S
H
I
E
L
D
7
8
C
O
M
2
C
O
M
1
E
Q
P

E
C
L
I
P
S
E
S
H
I
E
L
D
6
3
2
4

V
D
C

4
1
2
4

V
D
C

+
5
2
B
1
1
8
A
1
0
7
C
A
L
I
B
R
A
T
E
1
3
S
H
I
E
L
D
1
2
9
C
O
M
2
C
O
M
1
E
Q
P
2
2
0
0
D
C
U
2
4

V
D
C

1
3
1
4
2
4

V
D
C

+
1
1
1
2
B
6
1
0
A
5
9
4
T
O

2
0

M
A

I
N
2
3
+
4
P
O
I
N
T
W
A
T
C
H
C
A
L
I
B
R
A
T
E
1
S
H
I
E
L
D
7
8
C
O
M
2
C
O
M
1
E
Q
P
2
4
0
1
N
E
S
H
I
E
L
D
4
9
2
4

V
D
C

6
7
2
4

V
D
C

+
5
8
B
1
1
3
A
1
0
2
S
H
I
E
L
D
1
2
1
C
O
M
2
C
O
M
1
E
Q
P
2
5
0
0
S
A
M
2
4

V
D
C

1
3
1
4
2
4

V
D
C

+
1
1
1
2
B
6
1
0
A
5
9
O
U
T
P
U
T

1

2
O
U
T
P
U
T

2

+
3
O
U
T
P
U
T

2

4
O
U
T
P
U
T

1

+
1
S
H
I
E
L
D
7
8
C
O
M
2
C
O
M
1
E
Q
P
2
2
0
0
U
V
I
R
2
4

V
D
C

3
4
2
4

V
D
C

+
1
2
B
9
6
A
8
5
S
H
I
E
L
D
1
0
7
C
O
M
2
C
O
M
1
E
Q
P
X
3
3
0
1
S
H
I
E
L
D
1
3
3
2
4

V
D
C

1
1
1
2
4

V
D
C

+
1
2
2
B
1
4
4
A
1
5
5
S
H
I
E
L
D
1
6
6
C
O
M
2
C
O
M
1
E
Q
P
2
2
0
0
I
D
C
2
4

V
D
C

1
3
1
4
2
4

V
D
C

+
1
1
1
2
B
6
1
0
A
5
9
C
I
R
C
U
I
T

1

2
C
I
R
C
U
I
T

2

+
3
C
I
R
C
U
I
T

2

4
C
I
R
C
U
I
T

1

+
1
S
H
I
E
L
D
7
8
C
O
M
2
C
O
M
1
E
Q
P
2
1
0
0
P
S
M
S
H
I
E
L
D
4
9
2
4

V
D
C

6
7
2
4

V
D
C

+
5
8
B
1
1
3
A
1
0
2
B
234
C
1
S
H
I
E
L
D
1
2
1
C
O
M
2
C
O
M
1
E
Q
P
2
2
0
0
U
V
2
4

V
D
C

3
4
2
4

V
D
C

+
1
2
B
9
6
A
8
5
S
H
I
E
L
D
1
0
7
C
O
M
2
C
O
M
1
B
U
S

B
A
R
P
3
A
C

L
I
N
E
NH
SINGLE SOLENOID
DUAL SOLENOIDS
E
Q
P
3
7
0
0
D
C
I
O
S
H
I
E
L
D
6
3
2
4

V
D
C

5
2
2
4

V
D
C

+
4
1
B
5
2
A
4
1
S
H
I
E
L
D
6
3
C
O
M
2
C
O
M
1
P
1
P
2
P
3
P
4
I
N
/
O
U
T
+
B
B
C
O
M
M
O
N
C
C
+

S
U
P
P
L
Y
A
A
CH 1
CH 5
I
N
/
O
U
T
+
B
B
C
O
M
M
O
N
C
C
+

S
U
P
P
L
Y
A
A
CH 2
CH 6
I
N
/
O
U
T
+
B
B
C
O
M
M
O
N
C
C
+

S
U
P
P
L
Y
A
A
CH 3
CH 7
I
N
/
O
U
T
+
B
B
C
O
M
M
O
N
C
C
+

S
U
P
P
L
Y
A
A
CH 4
CH 8
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
2
4

V
D
C

4
2
2
4

V
D
C

+
3
1
B
5
2
4
9
A
5
3
5
0
T
x
D
A
5
9
5
6
R
x
D
B
5
8
5
5
G
N
D
G
N
D
5
7
5
4
S
H
I
E
L
D
5
1
4
8
C
O
M
2
C
O
M
1
P
1
P
7
P
9
P
8
P
4
P
5
1
+
5
+
5
1
3
1
6
1
4
2
+
6
+
7
1
5
2
8
1
6
3
+
7
+
9
1
7
3
1
0
1
8
4
+
8
+
1
1
1
9
4
1
2
2
0
P
2
P
3
C
4
5
N
O
4
6
N
C
4
7
P
6
F
A
U
L
T
G
N
D

5
R
X
D

2
T
X
D

3
D
B
-
9
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
T
O

C
O
M

P
O
R
T
O
F

P
C
DIGITAL INPUTS
C
C
2
1
3
3
N
O
N
O
2
2
3
4
N
C
N
C
2
3
3
5
RELAY 1
RELAY 5
C
C
2
4
3
6
N
O
N
O
2
5
3
7
N
C
N
C
2
6
3
8
RELAY 2
RELAY 6
C
C
2
7
3
9
N
O
N
O
2
8
4
0
N
C
N
C
2
9
4
1
RELAY 3
RELAY 7
C
C
3
0
4
2
N
O
N
O
3
1
4
3
N
C
N
C
3
2
4
4
RELAY 4
RELAY 8
S
E
N
S
O
R
P
O
W
E
R
2
4

V
D
C
S
U
P
P
L
Y
+
2
4

V
D
C
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
+
H
N
A
C

L
I
N
E
P
O
W
E
R
D
I
S
T
R
I
B
U
T
I
O
N
++
+
+
+ +
+
A
2
1
0
0
F
i
g
u
r
e

C
-
3
A

T
y
p
i
c
a
l

S
y
s
t
e
m
D-1 95-8526 8.1
APPENDIX D
DETECTION OF OTHER GASES
Pointwatch Eclipse is provided with eld-selectable "standard gas" signal processing program settings. These settings
are provided for detection and measurement of methane, ethane, propane, ethylene, and propylene gases, and are
dened as linearized gas measurement outputs. This means that the Eclipse is capable of providing an analog signal
output that is directly proportional to the %LFL concentration for these gases, provided the proper gas setting has
been selected, and the Eclipse has been calibrated with the proper calibration gas type. The factory default gas
setting is methane gas. The HART Communicator is required to conrm the current setting and change it if required.
In addition to the ve standard gases mentioned, the Eclipse is capable of detecting and measuring many other
hydrocarbon gases and vapors. Eclipse can be congured to provide a linear output for detection of non-standard
gases. For detection of many commonly encountered gases, one of the standard settings will usually sufce. Please
consult the factory for details.
Methane Calibrated PointWatch - Response to Standard Gases
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
% LFL Gas
P
o
i
n
t
W
a
t
c
h

O
u
t
p
u
t

(
%

L
F
L
)
Methane
Ethylene
Ethane
Propylene
Propane
Butane
D-2 95-8526 8.1
Ethane Calibrated PointWatch - Response to Standard Gases
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
% LFL Gas
P
o
i
n
t
W
a
t
c
h

O
u
t
p
u
t

(
%

L
F
L
)
Methane
Ethylene
Ethane
Propylene
Propane
Butane
Propane Calibrated PointWatch - Response to Standard Gases
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
% LFL Gas
P
o
i
n
t
W
a
t
c
h

O
u
t
p
u
t

(
%

L
F
L
)
Methane
Ethylene
Ethane
Propylene
Propane
Butane
D-3 95-8526 8.1
Propylene Calibrated PointWatch - Response to Standard Gases
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
% LEL Gas
P
o
i
n
t
W
a
t
c
h

O
u
t
p
u
t

(
%

L
E
L
)
Methane
Ethylene
Ethane
Propylene
Propane
Butane
Ethylene Calibrated PointWatch - Response to Standard Gases
0
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80
90
100
0 10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
% LFL Gas
P
o
i
n
t
W
a
t
c
h

O
u
t
p
u
t

(
%

L
F
L
)
Methane
Ethylene
Propylene
Propane
Ethane
Butane
E-1 95-8526 8.1
APPENDIX E
WARRANTY
Detector Electronics Corporation products are manufactured from high quality components and the completed device is
rigorously inspected and tested before shipment; however, any electronic device is subject to failure beyond the control
of the manufacturer. To ensure system reliability, it is important for the user to maintain the system as recommended
by the instruction manuals and to determine the frequency of functional checking of the system required for each
specic installation. The more frequent the checking, the greater the system reliability. For the highest reliability, a
completely redundant system is necessary. The manufacturer warrants the PointWatch Eclipse against defective parts
and workmanship, and will replace or repair equipment returned to the manufacturer for these reasons within ve years
after purchase date. See manufacturers Standard Terms and Conditions on the invoice for complete details. Please
note that no other warranties, written or implied, will be honored by the manufacturer.
CAUTION
The detector contains no user serviceable components. Service or repair should never be attempted by the
user. The manufacturers warranty for this product is void, and all liability for proper function of the detector is
irrevocably transferred to the owner or operator in the event that the device is serviced or repaired by personnel
not employed or authorized by Detector Electronics Corporation, or if the device is used in a manner not
conforming to its intended use.
F-1 95-8526 8.1
APPENDIX F
CONTROL DRAWING
Minneapolis, MN 55438 USA
T: 952.941.5665 or 800.765.3473
F: 952.829.8750
W: http://www.det-tronics.com
E: det-tronics@det-tronics.com

X3301 Multispectrum
IR Flame Detector
PointWatch Eclipse

IR Combustible Gas Detector
Eagle Quantum Premier

Safety System
Eagle Logic Solver
Safety System
Det-Tronics, the DET-TRONICS logo, Eagle Quantum Premier, and Eclipse are registered trademarks or trademarks of Detector Electronics
Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.
Copyright Detector Electronics Corporation 2010. All rights reserved.
95-8526
ANEXOS
5
1.2 Detector de llama
Instructions 95-8527
ProtectIR
Multispectrum IR Flame Detector

X3301
12.1 3/10 95-8527
Table Of Contents
DESCRIPTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Optical Integrity (oi) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Communication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Data Logging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Integral Wiring Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
GENERAL APPLICATION INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Response Characteristics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
Important Application Considerations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Detector Positioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Detector Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Protection Against Moisture Damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Wiring Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5
Setting Device Network Addresses (EQP Model Only) . . . . . . . . . 12
STARTUP PROCEDURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
Fire Alarm Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
TROUBLESHOOTING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
MAINTENANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Cleaning Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Oi Plate Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14
Periodic Checkout Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Clock Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
FEATURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
REPLACEMENT PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
DEVICE REPAIR AND RETURN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
ORDERING INFORMATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
APPENDIX A . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
APPENDIX B . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30
IMPORTANT
Be sure to read and understand the entire
instruction manual before installing or operating
the fame detection system. Any deviation from
the recommendations in this manual may impair
system performance and compromise safety.
ATTENTION
The X3301 includes the Automatic Optical Integrity
(oi ) feature a calibrated performance test that
is automatically performed once per minute to
verify complete detector operation capabilities. No
testing with an external test lamp is required.
DESCRIPTION
The X3301 ProtectIR
is a multispectrum infrared (IR)

flame detector. It provides unsurpassed detection of
fires from light to heavy hydrocarbon fuels combined
with the highest degree of false alarm rejection. The
detector has Division and Zone explosion-proof
ratings and is suitable for use in indoor and outdoor
applications.
The X3301 contains three IR sensors with their
associated signal processing circuitry. The standard
output configuration includes fire, fault and auxiliary
relays. Output options include:
0 to 20 mA output (in addition to the three relays)
Pulse output for compatibility with existing controller
based systems (with fre and fault relays)
Eagle Quantum Premier (EQP) compatible model (no
analog or relay outputs).
HART communication.
A multi-color LED on the detector faceplate indicates
detector status condition.
Microprocessor controlled heated optics increase
resistance to moisture and ice.
The X3301 housing is available in copper-free aluminum
or stainless steel, with NEMA 4X and IP66 rating.
OUTPUTS
Relays
The standard detector is furnished with fire, fault and
auxiliary relays. All three relays are rated 5 amperes
at 30 Vdc.
The Fire Alarm relay has redundant terminals and
normally open / normally closed contacts, normally
de-energized operation, and latching or non-latching
operation.
The Fault relay has redundant terminals and normally
open contacts, normally energized operation, and
latching or non-latching operation.
INSTRUCTIONS
ProtectIR

Multispectrum IR Flame Detector
X3301
12.1 Detector Electronics Corporation 2010 3/10 95-8527
* oi is Detector Electronics' Trademark for its patented Optical Integrity
Systems, U.S. Patent 3,952,196, United Kingdom Patent 1,534,969,
Canada Patent 1,059,598.
X3301 technology advancements are covered under the following
U.S. Patents: 5,995,008, 5,804,825 and 5,850,182.
95-8527 2 12.1
The Auxiliary relay has normally open / normally
closed contacts, and is configurable for energized or
de-energized operation, and latching or non-latching
operation.
0 to 20 mA Output
A 0 to 20 mA output is available as an option (in
addition to the three relays). This option provides a
0 to 20 mA dc current output for transmitting detector
status information to other devices. The circuit can be
wired in either an isolated or non-isolated configuration
and can drive a maximum loop resistance of 500
ohms from 18 to 19.9 volts dc and 600 ohms from 20
to 30 volts dc. Table 1 indicates the detector status
conditions represented by the various current levels.
The output is calibrated at the factory, with no need for
field calibration. A model with relays and 0-20 mA with
HART is also available. Refer to Addendum number
95-8577 for complete details.
NOTE
The output of the 0 to 20 mA current loop is not
monitored by the fault detection circuitry of the
X3301. Therefore, an open circuit on the loop will
not cause the fault relay to change state or the
detector status LED to indicate a fault. The status of
the LED always follows the status of the relays.
An alarm condition will normally over-ride a fault
condition, unless the nature of the fault condition impairs
the ability of the detector to generate or maintain an
alarm output, i.e. loss of operating power.
LON/SLC Output
The EQP model is designed for use exclusively with
the Det-Tronics Eagle Quantum Premier system. The
detector communicates with the system controller over
a digital communication network or LON/SLC (Local
Operating Network / Signalling Line Circuit). The LON/
SLC is a fault tolerant, two wire digital communication
network arranged in a loop configuration. Analog and
relay outputs are not available on this model.
LED
A tricolor LED on the detector faceplate indicates
normal, fire alarm and fault conditions. Table 2 indicates
the condition of the LED for each status.
OPTICAL INTEGRITY (Oi)
Automatic oi
The X3301 includes the Automatic Optical Integrity
(oi) feature a calibrated performance test that
is automatically performed once per minute to
verify complete detector operation capabilities. No
testing with an external test lamp is required. The
detector automatically performs the same test that a
maintenance person with a test lamp would perform
once every minute, 60 times per hour. However,
a successful automatic oi test does not produce an
alarm condition.
The ProtectIR signals a fault condition when less than
half of the detection range remains. This is indicated
by the Fault relay and is evident by the yellow color
of the LED on the face of the detector. See the
"Troubleshooting" section for further information.
Magnetic oi / Manual oi
The detector also incorporates both magnetic oi and
manual oi features that provide the same calibrated test
as the automatic oi, and in addition actuates the Alarm
relay to verify output operation for preventive maintenance
requirements. These features can be performed at
any time and eliminate the need for testing with a non-
calibrated external test lamp.
CAUTION
These tests require disabling of all extinguishing
devi ces to avoi d rel ease resul ti ng from a
successful test.
Table 1Detector Status Conditions Indicated by Current Level
Table 2Detector Status Indicator
Current Level (0.3 mA) Detector Status
0 mA Power Fault
1 mA General Fault
2 mA Oi Fault
3 mA Hi Background IR
4 mA Normal Operation
20 mA Fire Alarm
Detector Status LED Indicator
Power On/Normal Operation
(no fault or fire alarm)
Green
Fault Yellow
Fire (Alarm) Red
Low Sensitivity
One Yellow Flash
During Power-up
Medium Sensitivity
Two Yellow Flashes
During Power-up
Very High Sensitivity
Four Yellow Flashes
During Power-up
3 95-8527 12.1
The magnetic oi test is performed by placing a magnet
by the marked location (mag oi) on the outside of
the detector. The manual oi test is accomplished by
connecting the oi lead (terminal 22) to power supply
minus via an external switch. The magnet or switch
must be held in place for a minimum of 6 seconds
to complete the test. Either of these test methods
activates the calibrated IR emitters. If the resulting
signal meets the test criteria, indicating that greater
than half of the detection range remains, the Alarm
relay changes state, the indicating LED changes to
red, and the 0-20 mA current output goes to 20 mA.
This condition remains until the magnet is removed or
the switch is released, regardless of whether the relays
are set for latching or non-latching operation.
If less than half of the detection range remains, no
alarm is produced and a fault is generated. The fault
indication can be reset by momentarily applying the
magnet or manual o
i
switch.
NOTE
Refer to Appendix A for FM verifcation of
Det-Tronics patented Optical Integrity oi function.
COMMUNICATION
The X3301 is furnished with an RS-485 interface for
communicating status and other information with
external devices. The RS-485 supports MODBUS
protocol, with the detector configured as a slave
device.
NOTE
The EQP model uses LON/SLC communication.
RS-485 communication is not available on the
EQP model.
DATA LOGGING
Data logging capability is also provided. Status
conditions such as normal, power down, general and
oi faults, pre-alarm, fire alarm, time and temperature
are recorded. Each event is time and date stamped,
along with the temperature and input voltage. Event
data is stored in non-volatile memory when the event
becomes active, and again when the status changes.
Data is accessible using the RS-485 port or the EQP
controller.
INTEGRAL WIRING COMPARTMENT
All external wiring to the device is connected within
the integral junction box. The screw terminals accept
wiring from 14 to 24 AWG. The detector is furnished
with four conduit entries, with either 3/4 inch NPT or 25
mm threads.
GENERAL APPLICATION
INFORMATION
RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
Response is dependent on distance, type of fuel,
temperature of the fuel, and time required for the fire to
come to equilibrium. As with all fire tests, results must
be interpreted according to an individual application.
See Appendix A for fire test results.
IMPORTANT APPLICATION CONSIDERATIONS
In applying any type of sensing device as a fire
detector, it is important to know of any conditions that
can prevent the device from responding to fire, and
also to know what other sources besides fire can cause
the device to respond.
Welding
Arc welding should not be performed within 40 feet of
the very high sensitivity detector, 10 feet of the medium
sensitivity detector, or 5 feet of the low sensitivity
detector. It is recommended that the system be
bypassed during welding operations in situations where
the possibility of a false alarm cannot be tolerated.
Gas welding mandates system bypass, since the gas
torch is an actual fire. Arc welding rods can contain
organic binder materials in the flux that burn during the
welding operation and are detectable by the X3301.
Welding rods with clay binders do not burn and will not
be detected by the X3301. However, system bypass is
always recommended, since the material being welded
may be contaminated with organic substances (paint,
oil, etc.) that will burn and possibly trigger the X3301.
Artifcial Lighting
The X3301 should not be located within 3 feet of
artificial lights. Excess heating of the detector could
occur due to heat radiating from the lights.
EMI/RFI Interference
The X3301 is resistant to interference by EMI and RFI,
and is EMC Directive compliant. It will not respond to a
5 watt walkie-talkie at distances greater than 1 foot. Do
not operate a walkie-talkie within 1 foot of the X3301.
Non-Carbon Fires
The X3301 is a multiple spectrum IR device with
detection limited to carbonaceous fuels. It should not
be used to detect fires from fuels that do not contain
carbon, such as hydrogen, sulfur and burning metals.
95-8527 4 12.1
IMPORTANT SAFETY NOTES
WARNING
Do not open the detector assembly in a hazardous
area when power is applied. The detector contains
limited serviceable components and should never
be opened. Doing so could disturb critical optical
alignment and calibration parameters, possibly
causing serious damage. This type of damage
could be undetected and could result in failure to
see a fre and/or false alarm.
CAUTION
The wiring procedures in this manual are intended
to ensure proper functioning of the device under
normal conditions. However, because of the
many variations in wiring codes and regulations,
total compliance to these ordinances cannot be
guaranteed. Be certain that all wiring complies
with the NEC as well as all local ordinances. If
in doubt, consult the authority having jurisdiction
before wiring the system. Installation must be
done by a properly trained person.
CAUTION
To prevent unwanted act uat i on or al arm,
extinguishing devices must be disabled prior to
performing system tests or maintenance.
ATTENTION
Remove the protective cap from the front of the
detector before activating the system.
ATTENTION
Observe precautions for handling electrostatic
sensitive devices.
INSTALLATION
DETECTOR POSITIONING
Detectors should be positioned to provide the best
unobstructed view of the area to be protected.
The following factors should also be taken into
consideration:
Identify all high risk fre ignition sources.
Be sure that enough detectors are used to adequately
cover the hazardous area.
Be sure that the unit is easily accessible for cleaning
and other periodic servicing.
Locate and position the detector so that the fre
hazard(s) are within both the feld of view and
detection range of the device. Refer to Appendix A
for specifc information.
The detector should be aimed downward at least 10
to 20 degrees to allow lens openings to drain. See
Figure 1. The detector should be positioned so
that its feld of view does not cover areas outside
the hazardous area. This will minimize the possibility
of false alarms caused by activities outside the area
requiring protection.
For best performance, the detector should be
mounted on a rigid surface in a low vibration area.
Dense fog, rain or ice can absorb IR radiation and
reduce the sensitivity of the detector.
Although IR detectors are less affected by smoke
than other detectors, the X3301 should not be placed
where rising combustion products can obscure
its vision. If smoke is expected before fre, smoke
or other alternative detectors should be used in
conjunction with the X3301. For indoor applications,
if dense smoke is expected to accumulate at the
onset of a fre, mount the detector on a side wall at
least a few feet (approximately 1 meter) down from
the ceiling.
If possible, fre tests should be conducted to verify
correct detector positioning and coverage.
For ATEX installations, the X3301 detector housing
CENTER AXIS
OF DETECTOR
FIELD OF VIEW
CENTER AXIS
OF DETECTOR
FIELD OF VIEW
INCORRECT
CORRECT
NOTE: DETECTOR MUST ALWAYS BE AIMED
DOWNWARD AT LEAST 10 TO 20 DEGREES.
B1974
Figure 1Detector Orientation Relative to Horizon
5 95-8527 12.1
DETECTOR ORIENTATION
Refer to Figure 2 and ensure that the oi plate will be
oriented as shown when the X3301 is mounted and
sighted. This will ensure proper operation of the oi
system and will also minimize the accumulation of
moisture and contaminants between the oi plate and
the viewing windows. The oi plate includes an arrow,
which should be pointed in the up direction, indicating
that the oi plate and detector are correctly oriented.
IMPORTANT
The oi plate must be securely tightened to ensure
proper operation of the oi system (40 oz./inches
recommended).
PROTECTION AGAINST MOISTURE DAMAGE
It is important to take proper precautions during
installation to ensure that moisture will not come in
contact with the electrical connections or components
of the system. The integrity of the system regarding
moisture protection must be maintained for proper
operation and is the responsibility of the installer.
If conduit is used, we recommend installing drains,
according to local codes, at water collection points
to automatically drain accumulated moisture. It is
also recommended to install at least one breather,
according to local codes, at upper locations to provide
ventilation and allow water vapor to escape.
Conduit raceways should be inclined so that water will
flow to low points for drainage and will not collect inside
enclosures or on conduit seals. If this is not possible,
install conduit drains above the seals to prevent the
collection of water or install a drain loop below the
detector with a conduit drain at the lowest point of the
loop.
Conduit seals are not required for compliance with
explosion-proof installation requirements, but are highly
recommended to prevent water ingress in outdoor
applications. Units with M25 thread must use an IP66
washer to prevent water ingress.
WIRING PROCEDURE
Wire Size and Type
The system should be wired according to local codes.
The wire size selected should be based on the number
of detectors connected, the supply voltage and the
cable length. Typically 14 AWG (2.08 mm
2
) or 16 AWG
(1.31 mm
2
) shielded cable is recommended. Wires
should be stripped 3/8 inch (9 mm). A minimum input
voltage of 18 Vdc must be present at the X3301.
NOTE
Refer to Power Consumptionin the Specifcations
section of this manual.
The use of shielded cable is required to protect against
interference caused by EMI and RFI. When using
cables with shields, terminate the shields as shown
in Figures 7 through 12, and Figure 14. Consult the
factory if not using shielded cable.
In applications where the wiring cable is installed in
conduit, the conduit must not be used for wiring to other
electrical equipment.
If disconnection of power is required, separate
disconnect capability must be provided.
CAUTION
Installation of the detector and wiring should be
performed only by qualifed personnel.
Detector Mounting
Install the swivel mounting bracket assembly on the wall.
The installation surface should be free of vibration and
suitable to receive 1/4 inch (M6) screws with a length of
at least 1 inch (25 mm), and have suffcient capacity to
hold the detector and bracket weight. Refer to Figure 3
for dimensions.
VIEWING WINDOW (3)
O
i
PLATE
DETECTOR
STATUS INDICATOR E2068
PLACE MAGNET
HERE TO INITIATE
MAGNETIC O
i
O
i
MAGNET
Figure 2Front View of the X3301
95-8527 6 12.1
Relay and 0-20 mA Output Models
Follow the instructions below to install the X3301.
Make feld connections following local ordinances 1.
and guidelines in this manual.
Figure 4 shows the wiring terminal strip located
inside the detectors integral junction box.
Figure 5 shows the wiring terminal identifcation for
the X3301 detector.
Figure 6 shows an EOL resistor installed within the
integral wiring compartment of the detector (refer to
EOL Resistors for details).
Figures 7 and 8 provide examples of typical
installations with a X3301 wired to a fre alarm
panel.
If the detector is equipped with a 0 to 20 mA output,
refer to Figures 9 through 12.
Check all feld wiring to be sure that the proper 2.
connections have been made.
IMPORTANT
Do not test any wiring connected to the detector
with a meg-ohmmeter. Disconnect wiring at
the detector before checking system wiring for
continuity.
Make the fnal sighting adjustments and ensure that 3.
the mounting bracket hardware is tight.
EOL Resistors (Not Used with EQP Model)
To ensure that the insulating material of the wiring
terminal block will not be affected by the heat generated
by EOL resistors, observe the following guidelines
when installing the resistors.
Required EOL resistor power rating must be 5 1.
watts minimum.
NOTE
EOL resistors must be ceramic, wirewound
type, rated 5 watts minimum, with actual power
dissipation not to exceed 2.5 watts.
Resistor leads should be cut to a length of 2.
approximately 1 1/2 inches (40 mm).
Bend the leads and install the EOL resistor as 3.
shown in Figure 6.
Maintain a 3/8 inch (10 mm) minimum gap between 4.
the resistor body and the terminal block or any
other neighboring parts.
NOTE
All cable entry devices and blanking elements shall
be certifed to E-generation or ATEX standards,
in type of explosion protection increased safety
e or flameproof enclosure d (as applicable),
suitable for the conditions of use and correctly
installed. They shall maintain the degree of
ingress protection IP66 for the apparatus. Unused
apertures shall be closed with suitable blanking
elements.
13.1
(33.4)
10.6
(27.0)
4.0
(10.2)
4.0
(10.2)
3.0
(7.6)
3.0
(7.6)
4X 0.42
(1.1)
E2069
NOTE: THIS ILLUSTRATION SHOWS THE
DETECTOR MOUNTED AT THE 10 MINIMUM.
THESE DIMENSIONS WILL CHANGE BASED
ON THE DETECTORS MOUNTING ANGLE.
Figure 3Q9033 Mounting Bracket Dimensions in Inches (cm)
(See Figure 1 for Correct Detector Orientation.)
7 95-8527 12.1
Figure 4X3301 Terminal Block
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
4-20 mA +
4-20 mA
4-20 mA + REF
4-20 mA REF
COM FIRE COM FIRE
N.O. FIRE N.O. FIRE
N.C. FIRE N.C. FIRE
COM FAULT COM FAULT
N.O. FAULT N.O. FAULT
24 VDC + 24 VDC +
24 VDC 24 VDC 24 VDC
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
SPARE
SPARE
COM AUX
N.O. AUX
N.C. AUX
RS-485 A
RS-485 B
MAN O
i
B2061
Figure 5X3301 Wiring Terminal Identifcation
11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19
BULKHEAD
3/8 INCH (10 MM) GAP MINIMUM
A2126
Figure 6EOL Resistor Installation (For Ex d Wiring only)
95-8527 8 12.1
B2107
FIRE ALARM PANEL
X3301 DETECTOR
ALARM
24 VDC
+
WIRING NOTES:
1 IN NORMAL OPERATION WITH NO FAULTS OCCURRING, THE FAULT RELAY COIL IS ENERGIZED AND
THE NORMALLY OPEN (N.O.) AND COMMON (COM) CONTACTS ARE CLOSED.
2 ALARM RELAY IS NORMALLY DE-ENERGIZED WITH NO ALARM CONDITION PRESENT.
3 INDIVIDUAL MANUAL oi TEST SWITCHES CAN BE INSTALLED REMOTELY OR A DETECTOR SELECTOR AND
ACTIVATION SWITCH CAN BE INSTALLED AT THE FIRE PANEL. TEST SWITCHES ARE NOT SUPPLIED.
4 REFER TO SPECIFICATIONS SECTION FOR EOL RESISTOR VALUES. REFER TO EOL RESISTORS SECTION
FOR INSTALLATION DETAILS.
E.O.L.
DEVICE
4
oi TEST
3
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
COM FIRE
2
COM FIRE
N.O. FIRE
2
N.O. FIRE
N.C. FIRE
2
N.C. FIRE
COM FAULT
1
COM FAULT
N.O. FAULT
1
N.O. FAULT
24 VDC + 24 VDC +
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
SPARE
SPARE
RS-485 A
RS-485 B
MAN Oi
4-20 mA + 4-20 mA
4-20 mA + REF 4-20 mA REF
COM AUX
N.O. AUX
N.C. AUX
Figure 7Ex d Wiring Option
B2109
FIRE ALARM PANEL
X3301 DETECTOR
ALARM
ALARM
24 VDC
+
WIRING NOTES:
1 IN NORMAL OPERATION WITH NO FAULTS OCCURRING, THE FAULT RELAY COIL IS ENERGIZED AND
THE NORMALLY OPEN (N.O.) AND COMMON (COM) CONTACTS ARE CLOSED.
2 ALARM RELAY IS NORMALLY DE-ENERGIZED WITH NO ALARM CONDITION PRESENT.
3 INDIVIDUAL MANUAL oi TEST SWITCHES CAN BE INSTALLED REMOTELY OR A DETECTOR SELECTOR AND
ACTIVATION SWITCH CAN BE INSTALLED AT THE FIRE PANEL. TEST SWITCHES ARE NOT SUPPLIED.
4 EOL RESISTOR SUPPLIED BY PANEL.
EOL
DEVICE
4
oi TEST
3
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
COM FIRE
2
COM FIRE
N.O. FIRE
2
N.O. FIRE
N.C. FIRE
2
N.C. FIRE
COM FAULT
1
COM FAULT
N.O. FAULT
1
N.O. FAULT
24 VDC + 24 VDC +
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
SPARE
SPARE
RS-485 A
RS-485 B
MAN Oi
4-20 mA + 4-20 mA
4-20 mA + REF 4-20 mA REF
COM AUX
N.O. AUX
N.C. AUX
Figure 8Ex de Wiring Option
9 95-8527 12.1
24 VDC
4 TO 20 mA
PLC
+
600 MAX
AT 24 VDC
+
D2063
Oi TEST
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
4-20 mA + 4-20 mA
4-20 mA + REF 4-20 mA + REF
24 VDC +
24 VDC
24 VDC +
24 VDC 24 VDC
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
MAN Oi
X3301 IR DETECTOR
SPARE
SPARE
RS-485 A
RS-485 B
COM AUX
N.O. AUX
N.C. AUX
COM FIRE
N.O. FIRE
N.C. FIRE
COM FIRE
N.O. FIRE
N.C. FIRE
COM FAULT
N.O. FAULT
COM FAULT
N.O. FAULT
Figure 9X3301 Detector Wired for Non-Isolated 0 to 20 mA Current
Output (Sourcing)
24 VDC
4 TO 20 mA
PLC
+
600 MAX
AT 24 VDC
+
D2064
Oi TEST
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
X3301 IR DETECTOR
4-20 mA +
4-20 mA + REF
24 VDC +
24 VDC
COM FIRE
N.O. FIRE
N.C. FIRE
COM FAULT
N.O. FAULT
COM FIRE
N.O. FIRE
N.C. FIRE
COM FAULT
N.O. FAULT
24 VDC +
24 VDC
MAN Oi
SPARE
SPARE
RS-485 A
RS-485 B
COM AUX
N.O. AUX
N.C. AUX
4-20 mA
4-20 mA + REF
Figure 10X3301 Detector Wired for Non-Isolated 0 to 20 mA Current
Output (Sinking)
24 VDC
4 TO 20 mA
PLC
+
600 MAX
AT 24 VDC
+
D2065
Oi TEST
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
X3301 IR DETECTOR +
24 VDC
4-20 mA +
4-20 mA + REF
24 VDC +
24 VDC
COM FIRE
N.O. FIRE
N.C. FIRE
COM FAULT
N.O. FAULT
COM FIRE
N.O. FIRE
N.C. FIRE
COM FAULT
N.O. FAULT
4-20 mA
4-20 mA + REF
24 VDC +
24 VDC
MAN Oi
SPARE
SPARE
RS-485 A
RS-485 B
COM AUX
N.O. AUX
N.C. AUX
Figure 11X3301 Detector Wired for Isolated 0 to 20 mA
Current Output (Sourcing)
24 VDC
4 TO 20 mA
PLC
+
600 MAX
AT 24 VDC
+
D2066
Oi TEST
1
9
8
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
19
18
17
16
15
14
13
12
11
29
28
27
26
25
24
23
22
21
X3301 IR DETECTOR
+
24 VDC
4-20 mA +
4-20 mA + REF
24 VDC +
24 VDC
COM FIRE
N.O. FIRE
N.C. FIRE
COM FAULT
N.O. FAULT
4-20 mA
4-20 mA + REF
COM FIRE
N.O. FIRE
N.C. FIRE
COM FAULT
N.O. FAULT
24 VDC +
24 VDC 24 VDC
MAN Oi
SPARE
SPARE
RS-485 A
RS-485 B
COM AUX
N.O. AUX
N.C. AUX
Figure 12X3301 Detector Wired for Isolated 0 to 20 mA
Current Output (Sinking)
NOTES: 1. INDIVIDUAL MANUAL o
i
TEST SWITCHES CAN BE
INSTALLED REMOTELY OR A DETECTOR SELECTOR AND
ACTIVATION SWITCH CAN BE INSTALLED AT THE FIRE
PANEL. TEST SWITCHES ARE NOT SUPPLIED.
95-8527 10 12.1
EQP Model
Connect external wires to the appropriate terminals 1.
inside the device junction box. (See Figure 13 for
terminal identifcation.)
Connect the shield of the power cable to earth 2.
ground at the power source.
Connect shields for the LON cable as indicated. See 3.
Figure 14.
NOTE
DO NOT ground any shields at the detector
housing.
Set the device network address. (See Setting 4.
Device Network Addresses section of this manual
for switch setting procedure.)
Check all feld wiring to be sure that the proper 5.
connections have been made.
Replace the device cover. 6.
Make the fnal sighting adjustments and ensure that 7.
the mounting bracket hardware is tight.
NOTE
Refer to the Eagle Quantum Premier system manual
(number 95-8533) for information regarding power
and network communication cable requirements.
A2089
COM 2 B
24 VDC
24 VDC +
POWER SHIELD
COM SHIELD
COM 2 A
COM 1 B
24 VDC
24 VDC +
POWER SHIELD
COM SHIELD
COM 1 A
12
11
13
14
15
16
2
1
3
4
5
6
Figure 13Wiring Terminal Identifcation for X3301 EQP Model
11 95-8527 12.1
E
Q
P
2
1
0
0
P
S
M
S
H
I
E
L
D
4
9
2
4

V
D
C

6
7
2
4

V
D
C

+
5
8
B
1
1
3
A
1
0
2
B
234
C
1
S
H
I
E
L
D
1
2
1
C
O
M
2
C
O
M
1
B
U
S

B
A
R
P
3
A
C

L
I
N
E
NH
E
Q
P
X
3
3
0
1
S
H
I
E
L
D
1
3
3
2
4

V
D
C

1
1
1
2
4

V
D
C

+
1
2
2
B
1
4
4
A
1
5
5
S
H
I
E
L
D
1
6
6
C
O
M
2
C
O
M
1
E
Q
P
X
3
3
0
1
S
H
I
E
L
D
1
3
3
2
4

V
D
C

1
1
1
2
4

V
D
C

+
1
2
2
B
1
4
4
A
1
5
5
S
H
I
E
L
D
1
6
6
C
O
M
2
C
O
M
1
E
Q
P
X
3
3
0
1
S
H
I
E
L
D
1
3
3
2
4

V
D
C

1
1
1
2
4

V
D
C

+
1
2
2
B
1
4
4
A
1
5
5
S
H
I
E
L
D
1
6
6
C
O
M
2
C
O
M
1
E
Q
P
X
3
3
0
1
S
H
I
E
L
D
1
3
3
2
4

V
D
C

1
1
1
2
4

V
D
C

+
1
2
2
B
1
4
4
A
1
5
5
S
H
I
E
L
D
1
6
6
C
O
M
2
C
O
M
1
E
Q
P
3
7
0
0
D
C
I
O
S
H
I
E
L
D
6
3
2
4

V
D
C

5
2
2
4

V
D
C

+
4
1
B
5
2
A
4
1
S
H
I
E
L
D
6
3
C
O
M
2
C
O
M
1
P
1
P
2
P
3
P
4
I
N
/
O
U
T
+
B
B
C
O
M
M
O
N
C
C
+

S
U
P
P
L
Y
A
A
CH 1
CH 5
I
N
/
O
U
T
+
B
B
C
O
M
M
O
N
C
C
+

S
U
P
P
L
Y
A
A
CH 2
CH 6
I
N
/
O
U
T
+
B
B
C
O
M
M
O
N
C
C
+

S
U
P
P
L
Y
A
A
CH 3
CH 7
I
N
/
O
U
T
+
B
B
C
O
M
M
O
N
C
C
+

S
U
P
P
L
Y
A
A
CH 4
CH 8
C
O
N
T
R
O
L
L
E
R
2
4

V
D
C

4
2
2
4

V
D
C

+
3
1
B
5
2
4
9
A
5
3
5
0
T
x
D
A
5
9
5
6
R
x
D
B
5
8
5
5
G
N
D
G
N
D
5
7
5
4
S
H
I
E
L
D
5
1
4
8
C
O
M
2
C
O
M
1
P
1
P
7
P
9
P
8
P
4
P
5
1
+
5
+
5
1
3
1
6
1
4
2
+
6
+
7
1
5
2
8
1
6
3
+
7
+
9
1
7
3
1
0
1
8
4
+
8
+
1
1
1
9
4
1
2
2
0
P
2
P
3
C
4
5
N
O
4
6
N
C
4
7
P
6
F
A
U
L
T
G
N
D

5
R
X
D

2
T
X
D

3
D
B
-
9
C
O
N
N
E
C
T
I
O
N
T
O

C
O
M

P
O
R
T
O
F

P
C
DIGITAL INPUTS
C
C
2
1
3
3
N
O
N
O
2
2
3
4
N
C
N
C
2
3
3
5
RELAY 1
RELAY 5
C
C
2
4
3
6
N
O
N
O
2
5
3
7
N
C
N
C
2
6
3
8
RELAY 2
RELAY 6
C
C
2
7
3
9
N
O
N
O
2
8
4
0
N
C
N
C
2
9
4
1
RELAY 3
RELAY 7
C
C
3
0
4
2
N
O
N
O
3
1
4
3
N
C
N
C
3
2
4
4
RELAY 4
RELAY 8
2
4

V
D
C
S
U
P
P
L
Y
+
2
4

V
D
C
B
A
T
T
E
R
Y
+
H
N
A
C

L
I
N
E
P
O
W
E
R
D
I
S
T
R
I
B
U
T
I
O
N
++
+
+
+ +
+
A
2
2
0
7
F
i
g
u
r
e

1
4
A

T
y
p
i
c
a
l

E
Q
P

S
y
s
t
e
m
95-8527 12 12.1
SETTING DEVICE NETWORK ADDRESSES
(EQP Model Only)
Overview of Network Addresses
Each device on the LON must be assigned a unique
address. Addresses 1 to 4 are reserved for the
controller. Valid addresses for field devices are from
5 to 250.
IMPORTANT
If the address is set to zero or an address above
250, the switch setting will be ignored.
Duplicated addresses are not automatically detected.
Modules given the same address will use the number
given and report to the controller using that address.
The status word will show the latest update, which
could be from any of the reporting modules using that
address.
Setting Field Device Addresses
Selection of the node address is done by setting rocker
switches on an 8 switch DIP Switch Assembly within
the detectors housing. Refer to Figure 15 for switch
location.
WARNING
The network address switches are located within
the detector housing. Disassembly of the detector
head that contains powered electrical circuits is
required to gain access to the network address
switches. For hazardous areas, the area must be
de-classifed before attempting disassembly of the
device. Always observe precautions for handling
electrostatic sensitive devices.
The address number is binary encoded with each
switch having a specific binary value with switch 1
being the LSB (Least Significant Bit). (See Figure 16)
The devices LON address is equal to the added value
of all closed rocker switches. All Open switches are
ignored.
Example: for node No. 5, close rocker switches 1 and
3 (binary values 1 + 4); for node No. 25, close rocker
switches 1, 4 and 5 (binary values 1 + 8 + 16).
NOTE
The feld device sets the LON address only when
power is applied to the device. Therefore, it is
important to set the switches before applying
power. If an address is ever changed, system
power must be cycled before the new address will
take effect.
After setting address switches, record the address
number and device type.
ADDRESS SWITCHES SENSOR MODULE
REMOVED FROM HOUSING
A2191
Figure 15Location of Address Switches
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
1 2 4 8 16 32 64 128
ON
NODE ADDRESS EQUALS THE ADDED VALUE
OF ALL CLOSED ROCKER SWITCHES
A2190
BINARY
VALUE
CLOSED = ON
OPEN = OFF
Figure 16Address Switches for X3301
13 95-8527 12.1
STARTUP PROCEDURE
When installation of the equipment is complete, perform
the Fire Alarm Test below.
FIRE ALARM TEST
Disable any extinguishing equipment that is 1.
connected to the system.
Apply input power to the system. 2.
Initiate an 3. oi test. (See Magnetic oi / Manual oi
under Optical Integrity in the Description section of
this manual.)
Repeat this test for all detectors in the system. If 4.
a unit fails the test, refer to the Troubleshooting
section.
Verify that all detectors in the system are properly 5.
aimed at the area to be protected. (The Det-Tronics
Q1201C Laser Aimer is recommended for this
purpose.)
Enable extinguishing equipment when the test is 6.
complete.
TROUBLESHOOTING
WARNING
The sensor module (front half of the detector)
contai ns no user servi ceabl e components
and should never be opened. The terminal
compartment is the only part of the enclosure that
should be opened by the user in the feld.
Disable any extinguishing equipment that is 1.
connected to the unit.
Inspect the viewing windows for contamination 2.
and clean as necessary. The detector is relatively
insensitive to airborne contaminants, however, thick
deposits of ice, dirt, or oil will reduce sensitivity.
(Refer to the Maintenance section for complete
information regarding cleaning of the detector
viewing windows.)
Check input power to the unit. 3.
If the fre system has a logging function, check the 4.
fre panel log for output status information. See Table
3 for information regarding 0 to 20 mA output.
Turn off the input power to the detector and check all 5.
wiring for continuity. Important: Disconnect wiring
at the detector before checking system wiring for
continuity.
If all wiring checks out and cleaning of the 6. oi plate/
window did not correct the fault condition, check for
high levels of background IR radiation by covering
the detector with the factory supplied cover or
aluminum foil. If the fault condition clears within 6
minutes or less, extreme background IR is present.
Re-adjust the view of the detector away from the IR
source or relocate the detector.
If none of these actions corrects the problem, return the
detector to the factory for repair.
NOTE
It is highly recommended that a complete spare
be kept on hand for feld replacement to ensure
continuous protection.
Table 3Current Level Output Troubleshooting Guide
1
If fault continues, return device to factory for repair.
2
See Maintenance section for cleaning procedure.
Current Level
(0.3 mA) Status Action
0 mA Power Fault Check system wiring.
1 mA General Fault Cycle power.
1
2 mA
oi Fault
Clean windows.
2
3 mA Hi Background IR
Remove IR source or
aim detector away
from IR source.
4 mA Normal Operation
20 mA Fire Alarm
95-8527 14 12.1
MAINTENANCE
IMPORTANT
Per i odi c f l amepat h i nspect i ons are not
recommended, since the product is not intended
to be serviced and provides proper ingress
protection to eliminate potential deterioration of the
famepaths.
WARNING
The sensor module (front half of the detector)
contai ns no user servi ceabl e components
and should never be opened. The terminal
compartment is the only part of the enclosure that
should be opened by the user in the feld.
To maintain maximum sensitivity and false alarm
resistance, the viewing windows of the X3301 must be
kept relatively clean. Refer to the procedure below for
cleaning instructions.
CLEANING PROCEDURE
CAUTION
Disable any extinguishing equipment that is
connected to the unit to prevent unwanted
actuation.
To clean the windows and oi plate, use Det-Tronics
window cleaner (part number 001680-001) and a soft
cloth, cotton swab or tissue and refer to the following
procedure.
1. Disable any extinguishing equipment that is
2. Since the X3301 is less affected by contamination
than other detectors, removal of the oi plate is needed
only under extreme conditions. In addition, it is not
necessary to achieve perfect cleanliness, because
IR is not signifcantly absorbed by slight flms of oil
and/or salt. If a fault condition is still indicated after
cleaning, remove and clean the oi plate using the
following procedure.
3. In cold or oily environments clean all three viewing
windows and refector surfaces thoroughly. Use a
clean cloth, cotton swab or tissue and Det-Tronics
window cleaning solution. Isopropyl alcohol may be
better suited for cold environments.
Oi PLATE REMOVAL
1. Disable any extinguishing equipment that is
2. Loosen the two captive screws, then grasp the oi
plate by the visor and remove it from the detector.
See Figure 17.
3. Thoroughly clean the oi plate refective surfaces,
holding it by its edges to avoid leaving fngerprints
on the inside refective surface.
4. Re-install the oi plate. Ensure that the plate is at
on the detector surface. Tighten the oi plate screws
securely (40 oz/inches).
NOTE
If the oi plate is removed, be sure to install
the ori gi nal oi pl ate. Oi pl ates are not
interchangeable and should not be mixed with
oi plates from other detectors. If corrosive
contaminants in the atmosphere cause the oi
plate surface to deteriorate to the extent that it is no
longer possible to restore it to its original condition,
it must be replaced. Consult factory for oi plate
replacement procedure.
LOOSEN TWO CAPTIVE SCREWS
GRASP VISOR AND
REMOVE Oi PLATE
A2106
Figure 17Oi Plate Removal
15 95-8527 12.1
PERIODIC CHECKOUT PROCEDURE
A checkout of the system using the manual or magnetic
oi feature should be performed on a regularly
scheduled basis to ensure that the system is operating
properly. To test the system, perform the Fire Alarm
Test as described in the Startup Procedure section
of this manual.
CLOCK BATTERY
(Not used with EQP Model)
The real time clock has a backup battery that will operate
the clock with no external power for nominally 10 years.
It is recommended that the battery be replaced every
7 years. Return the device to the factory for battery
replacement.
NOTE
If the backup battery is depleted, there is no effect
on the operation of the fame detector, but the time
stamping of the data log may be affected.
FEATURES
Long detection range to carbonaceous fres.
Unequaled false alarm rejection.
Responds to a fre in the presence of modulated
blackbody radiation (i.e. heaters, ovens, turbines)
without false alarm.
Microprocessor controlled heated optics for
increased resistance to moisture and ice.
Automatic, manual or magnetic optical integrity ( oi)
testing.
Easily replaceable oi plate.
Fire, fault and auxiliary relays standard.
0 to 20 mA isolated output (optional).
Eagle Quantum Premier LON/SLC output (optional).
Tricolor LED indicates normal operation, fre and fault
conditions.
Operates under adverse weather conditions and in
dirty environments.
Mounting swivel allows easy sighting.
Integral wiring compartment for ease of installation.
Explosion-proof/fame-proof detector housing.
Meets FM, CSA, ATEX Directive and CE certifcation
requirements.
Class A wiring per NFPA-72.
Meets NFPA-33 response requirement for under 0.5
second (available when model selected).
5 year warranty.
RFI and EMC Directive compliant.
ASSOCIATED MANUALS
List of X3301 related manuals:
TITLE FORM NUMBER
Pulse 95-8528
EQP 95-8533
SIL 2 95-8582
HART Addendum 95-8577
Automotive Addendum 95-8534
Hangar 95-8548
95-8527 16 12.1
SPECIFICATIONS
OPERATING VOLTAGE
24 volts dc nominal (18 Vdc minimum, 30 Vdc maximum).
Maximum ripple is 2 volts peak-to-peak.
POWER CONSUMPTION
Without heater: 4 watts at 24 Vdc nominal;
5.2 watts at 24 Vdc in alarm.
4.5 watts at 30 Vdc nominal;
6.5 watts at 30 Vdc in alarm.
Heater only: 8 watts maximum.
Total power: 17 watts at 30 Vdc with EOL resistor installed
and heater on maximum.
EOL resistor must be ceramic, wirewound type, rated
5 watts minimum, with actual power dissipation not to
exceed 2.5 watts.
For HART model, refer to Addendum number 95-8577.
POWER UP TIME
Fault indication clears after 0.5 second; device is ready
to indicate an alarm condition after 30 seconds.
OUTPUT RELAYS
Fire Alarm relay, Form C, 5 amperes at 30 Vdc:
The Fire Alarm relay has redundant terminals and
normally open / normally closed contacts, normally
de-energized operation, and latching or non-
latching operation.
Fault relay, Form A, 5 amperes at 30 Vdc:
The Fault relay has redundant terminals and normally
open contacts, normally energized operation, and
latching or non-latching operation.
Auxiliary relay, Form C, 5 amperes at 30 Vdc:
The auxiliary relay has normally open/normally
closed contacts, normally energized or de-energized
operation, and latching or non-latching operation.
CURRENT OUTPUT (OPTIONAL)
0 to 20 milliampere (0.3 mA) dc current, with a maximum
loop resistance of 500 ohms from 18 to 19.9 volts dc and
600 ohms from 20 to 30 volts dc.
LON OUTPUT
Digital communication, transformer isolated (78.5 kbps).
TEMPERATURE RANGE
Operating: 40F to +167F (40C to +75C).
Storage: 67F to +185F (55C to +85C).
Hazardous location ratings from 55C to +125C.
HUMIDITY RANGE
0 to 95% relative humidity, can withstand 100%
condensing humidity for short periods of time.
CONE OF VISION
The detector has a 90 cone of vision (horizontal) with
the highest sensitivity lying along the central axis.
Unlike conventional detectors, the X3301 provides full
coverage at a minimum of 70% of the maximum detection
distance.
Perfect cone of vision for methane fire detection 100
feet on and off axis on very high setting.
Refer to Appendix A for FM Approved cone of vision
data.
RESPONSE TIME
Typical response times are under 10 seconds. Models are
available that can respond to automotive paint gun fires
in under 0.5 seconds. See Appendix A and Automotive
Addendum (form number 95-8534) for actual response
times.
DIMENSIONS
See Figure 18.
ENCLOSURE MATERIAL
Copper-free aluminum (red-painted) or 316 stainless
steel.
VIBRATION
Conformance per FM 3260: 2000, MIL-STD 810C (Curve
AW), DNV Note 2.4 (Class B).
10.0
(25.4)
4.8
(12.2)
4.7
(11.9)
B2067
Figure 18X3301 Dimensions in Inches (cm)
17 95-8527 12.1
WIRING
Field wiring screw terminals are UL/CSA rated for up to
14 AWG wire, and are DIN/VDE rated for 2.5 mm
2
wire.
Screw terminal required torque range is 3.54.4 in.-lbs.
(0.4-0.5 Nm).
14 AWG (2.08 mm
2
) or 16 AWG (1.31 mm
2
) shielded
cable is recommended.
Important: 18 Vdc minimum must be available at the
detector. For ambient temperatures below 10C and
above +60C use field wiring suitable for both minimum
and maximum ambient temperature.
THREAD SIZE
Conduit connection: Four entries, 3/4 inch NPT or M25.
Conduit seal not required.
SHIPPING WEIGHT (Approximate)
Aluminum: 6 pounds (2.7 kilograms).
Stainless Steel: 10 pounds (4.5 kilograms).
Swivel Mount (AL): 6 pounds (2.75 kilograms).
Swivel Mount (SS): 14 pounds (6.4 kilograms).
WARRANTY PERIOD
5 years.
CERTIFICATION

Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C and D (T4A);
Class II, Div. 1, Groups E, F, and G (T4A);
Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C and D (T3C);
Class II, Div. 2, Groups F and G (T3C);
Class III.
Enclosure NEMA/Type 4X.
For complete FM certification details, refer to Appendix A.
CSA hazardous location testing has been successfully
completed over an ambient temperature range of 55
to +125; however, the detector label marking indicates
40 to +75.
ULC Listed for models with relay outputs and HART model.
FM
APPROVED
Increased Safety Model Flameproof Model

0539
FM
II 2 GD 0539
FM
II 2 GD
EEx de IIC T5T6 EEx d IIC T4T6
DEMKO 01 ATEX 130204 DEMKO 01 ATEX 130204
T6 (T
amb
= 55C to +60C). T6 (T
amb
= 55C to +60C).
T5 (T
amb
= 55C to +75C). T5 (T
amb
= 55C to +75C).
IP66. T4 (T
amb
= 55C to +125C).
IP66.
NOTE
Operational performance verified from 40C to
+75C.
NOTE
An optional third party addressable module can
only be used within the EEx d fameproof model
unless the addressable module is component
certified as EEx e for use within the EEx de
increased safety model.
NOTE
Refer to EOL Resistors section for installation
details. All cable entry devices and blanking
elements shall be certified to E-generation or
ATEX standards, in type of explosion protection
increased safety eor fameproof enclosure d(as
applicable), suitable for the conditions of use and
correctly installed. They shall maintain the degree
of ingress protection IP66 for the apparatus.
Unused apertures shall be closed with suitable
blanking elements.
NOTE
For ATEX installations, the X3301 detector housing
EC-Certifcate of Conformity
08 0786 CPD 20453
EN54-10 Flame detectors - Point detectors.
VdS
Performance per EN54-10,
Certificate of Approval G-202136.
For complete VdS certification details, refer to Appendix B.
DNV
Type Approval Certificate No. A-11022.
Lloyd's Register
Type Approval Certificate No. 09/00027.
IECEx
Certificate of Conformity
IECEx ULD 06.0017X
Ex d IIC T6 or Ex de IIC T6
T6 (T
amb
= 55C to +60C).

IEC 61508
Certified SIL 2 Capable.
Applies to specific models refer to the SIL 2 Certified
X3301 manual (95-8582) for details.
FM
APPROVED
ida e

18 95-8527 12.1
REPLACEMENT PARTS
The detector is not designed to be repaired in the feld.
If a problem should develop, refer to the Troubleshooting
section. If it is determined that the problem is caused by
an electronic defect, the device must be returned to the
factory for repair.
DEVICE REPAIR AND RETURN
Prior to returning devices, contact the nearest local
Detector Electronics office so that a Return Material
Identification (RMI) number can be assigned. A
written statement describing the malfunction must
accompany the returned device or component to
assist and expedite fnding the root cause of the
failure.
Pack the unit properly. Always use sufficient packing
material. Where applicable, use an antistatic bag as
protection from electrostatic discharge.
NOTE
Inadequate packaging that ultimately causes
damage to the returned device during shipment
will result in a service charge to repair the damage
incurred during shipment.
Return all equipment transportation prepaid to the factory
in Minneapolis.
NOTE
It is highly recommended that a complete spare
be kept on hand for feld replacement to ensure
continuous protection.
ORDERING INFORMATION
When ordering, please specify:
X3301 IR Flame Detector
Refer to the X3301 Model Matrix for details
Q9033 mount is required:
Q9033A for aluminum detectors only.
Q9033B for aluminum and stainless steel detectors.
X-SERIES FLAME DETECTOR ACCESSORIES
Part Number Description
000511-029 Converter RS485 to RS232
001680-001 Window cleaner (6 pack)
005003-001 1 oz grease for detectors (non-silicon)
006097-001 Q1201 Laser
007240-001 Q1116A1001, Air Shield (AL)
007255-001 Q1201C1001 X-Series Laser Holder (AL/Plastic)
007290-001
Q9033B Stainless Steel Swivel Mount Assembly is for
aluminum and stainless steel detectors
007290-002
Q9033A Aluminum Swivel Mount Assembly is for aluminum
detectors only
007307-001 o
i
plate for X3301 (requires inspector connector to calibrate)
007307-002
o
i
plate for X52/X22/X98 (requires inspector connector to
calibrate)
007307-003 o
i
plate for X3302 (requires inspector connector to calibrate)
007338-001 Q2000A1001 X-Series Weather Shield (AL)
007338-010 Q2033A10R X3301/X3302 FOV Limiter 10 (AL)
007739-001 Magnet and Extension Pole
007818-001 Q1118A1001 Aluminum Air Shield/Flange Mount (AL)
007818-002 Q1118S1001 Stainless Steel Air Shield/Flange Mount (SS)
007819-001
W6300B1002 Inspector Connector (Inspector Monitor
software included)
007912-010 Spare Restrictor Plate 10 (AL)
009177-001 Q1120A1001 Paint shield mounting ring (AL)
009199-001 Q1198A1001 Dual Air Shield/Flange Mount (X9800 only)/(AL)
009207-001 Inspector Monitor CD
009208-001 o
i
kit (5 plates) with Inspector Connector and Monitor X3301
009208-002
o
i
kit (5 plates) with Inspector Connector and Monitor X52/
X22/X98
101197-003 Stop Plug, SS, IP66, Ex de, M25 (SS)
102740-002 Magnet
102871-001 Laser Battery, 3V Lithium (laser)
103346-007 Model 375 HART Communicator
103363-001 14mm Hex Wrench (Steel)
103406-001 Screwdriver
103517-001 Stop Plug, AL, IP66, Ex de, M25 (AL)
107427-040 O-ring - Rear Cover (Viton)
19 95-8527 12.1
*The LON output (Type 14) is not part of the ULC approval.
**Detectors are always Class I, Div. 1.
X3301 MODEL MATRIX
MODEL DESCRIPTION
X3301 Multispectrum IR Flame Detector
TYPE MATERIAL
A Aluminum
S Stainless Steel (316)
TYPE THREAD TYPE
4M 4 PORT, METRIC M25
4N 4 PORT, 3/4" NPT
TYPE OUTPUTS
11 Relay
13 Relay and 4-20 mA
14 Eagle Quantum Premier
15 Relay and Pulse
16 Addressable Module Only (Third Party Type)
21 Relay-Automotive
23 Relay, 4-20 mA and HART
TYPE APPROVAL AGENCY
A FM/CSA
T SIL Certifcation
W FM/CSA/ULC*/ATEX/CE
TYPE CLASSIFICATION**
1 Division/Zone Ex de
2 Division/Zone Ex d
20 95-8527 12.1
APPENDIX A
FM Approvals Description and Performance Report
THE FOLLOWING ITEMS, FUNCTIONS AND OPTIONS DESCRIBE THE FM APPROVAL:
Explosion-proof for Class I, Div. 1, Groups B, C and D (T4A) Hazardous (Classifed) Locations per FM 3615.
Dust-ignition proof for Class II/III, Div. 1, Groups E, F and G (T4A) Hazardous (Classifed) Locations per FM 3615.
Nonincendive for Class I, Div. 2, Groups A, B, C and D (T3C) Hazardous (Classifed) Locations per FM 3611.
Nonincendive for Class II, Div. 2, Groups F and G (T3C) Hazardous (Classifed) Locations per FM 3611.
Enclosure rating NEMA/Type 4X per NEMA 250.
Ambient Temperature Limits: 40F to +167F (40C to +75C).
Automatic Fire Alarm Signaling Performance verifed per FM 3260 (2000).
The following performance criteria were verified:
OPTICAL INTEGRITY TEST:
The detector generated an optical fault in the presence of contamination on any single or combination of lens surfaces
resulting in a loss of approximately 50% of its detection range, verifying that the detector performs a calibrated
Automatic Optical Integrity (oi) test for each sensor. Upon removal of the contamination, the detector fault was cleared
and the detector was verifed to detect a fre.
The Manual / Magnetic oi performs the same calibrated test as the Automatic oi, and additionally actuates the alarm
relay to verify output operation. If there is a 50% loss of its detection range, an alarm signal is not generated.
21 95-8527 12.1
RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS
FM Approvals Description and Performance Report Continued
* Outdoor test condition.
** Pre-burn from ignition.
*** Add 2 seconds for EQP Model.
Medium Sensitivity
Fuel Size Distance feet (m) Average Response Time (seconds)***
n-Heptane 1 x 1 foot 210 (64)* 11
n-Heptane** 1 x 1 foot 210 (64)* 6
n-Heptane 1 x 1 foot 100 (30.5) 3
n-Heptane 6 in. x 6 in. 80 (24.4) 3
Isopropanol 6 in. x 6 in. 70 (21.3) 4
Diesel** 1 x 1 foot 150 (45.7)* 14
Ethanol 1 x 1 foot 210 (64) 11
Methanol 6 in. x 6 in. 40 (12.2) 3
Methanol 1 x 1 foot 150 (45.7)* 18
Methanol** 1 x 1 foot 150 (45.7)* 7
Methane 30 inch plume 100 (30.5) 3
JP-5** 1 x 1 foot 150 (45.7)* 2
JP-5** 2 x 2 feet 210 (64)* 4
JP-5** 2 x 2 feet 100 (30.5) 2
Offce Paper 0.5 lb. 19" x 19" x 8" 100 (30.5) 4
Corrugated Panel 18" x 36" 100 (30.5) 8
n-Heptane 1 x 1 foot 100 (30.5) 12
n-Heptane 1 x 1 foot 50 (15.2) 2
Diesel** 1 x 1 foot 70 (21.3) 4
Ethanol 1 x 1 foot 85 (25.9) 13
Methanol 1 x 1 foot 70 (21.3) 10
JP-5** 2 x 2 feet 100 (30.5) 3
Offce Paper 0.5 lb. 19" x 19" x 8" 50 (15.2) 6
Corrugated Panel 18" x 36" 50 (15.2) 2
Low Sensitivity
n-Heptane 1 x 1 foot 50 (15.2) 10
Methanol 1 x 1 foot 20 (6.1) 10
22 95-8527 12.1
RESPONSE CHARACTERISTICS IN THE PRESENCE OF FALSE ALARM SOURCES
Medium Sensitivity
* Fire was verified with very high sensitivity only.
False Alarm Source
Distance
feet (m)
Fire Source
Distance
feet (m)
Average Response Time
(seconds)***
Sunlight, direct, modulated, reflected 6-inch propane 6 (1.8) < 10
Vibration N/A 3-inch propane 10.5 (3.2) < 10
Radio frequency interference 1 (0.3) 3-inch propane 12 (3.7) < 10
Arc welding, #7014 40 (12.2) 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 40 (12.2) 4
6 kw heater, modulated 80 (24.4) 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 80 (24.4) 2
6 kw heater, unmodulated 10 (3) 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 80 (24.4) 3
250 w vapor lamp, modulated 3 (0.9) 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 80 (24.4) 2
300 w incandescent lamp, modulated 3 (0.9) 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 80 (24.4) 7
500 w shielded quartz halogen lamp, modulated 8 (2.4) 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 80 (24.4) 2
500 w unshielded quartz halogen lamp, modulated 8 (2.4) 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 80 (24.4) 3
1500 w electric radiant heater, modulated 10 (3) 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 80 (24.4) 5
Two 34 w fluorescent lamps, modulated 3 (0.9) 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 80 (24.4) 3
False Alarm Source
Distance
feet (m)
Fire Source
Distance
feet (m)
(seconds)***
Sunlight, direct, modulated, reflected 6-inch propane 6 (1.8) < 4
Vibration* N/A N/A N/A N/A
Radio frequency interference 1 (0.3) 6-inch propane 6 (1.8) < 1
Arc welding, #7014 10 (3) 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 40 (12.2) 4
6 kw heater, modulated 60 (18.3) 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 60 (18.3) 2
6 kw heater, unmodulated 10 (3) 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 60 (18.3) 2
500 w shielded quartz halogen lamp, modulated 8 (2.4) 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 60 (18.3) 1
500 w unshielded quartz halogen lamp, modulated 8 (2.4) 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 60 (18.3) 1
23 95-8527 12.1
Low Sensitivity
* Outdoor test conditions.
False Alarm Source
Distance
feet (m)
Fire Source
Distance
feet (m)
(seconds)***
Sunlight, direct, unmodulated, reflected* 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 35 (10.7) < 13
Sunlight, direct, modulated, reflected* 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 15 (4.6) < 14
Arc welding, steady, #7014 5 (1.5) 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 50 (15.2) 11
Arc welding, modulated, #7014 5 (1.5) 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 30 (9.1) 10
70 w sodium vapor, modulated 3 (0.9) 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 50 (15.2) 16
500 w shielded quartz halogen lamp, unmodulated 3 (0.9) 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 50 (15.2) 12
500 w shielded quartz halogen lamp, modulated 10 (3) 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 50 (15.2) 11
1500 w electric radiant heater, unmodulated 3 (0.9) 1 x 1 foot n-Heptane 50 (15.2) 12
24 95-8527 12.1
FALSE ALARM IMMUNITY
Medium Sensitivity
Low Sensitivity
False Alarm Source
Distance
feet (m)
Modulated Response Unmodulated Response
Sunlight, direct, reflected No alarm No alarm
Vibration N/A No alarm N/A
Radio frequency interference 1 (0.3) No alarm (keyed) No alarm (steady)
Arc welding 40 (12.2) No alarm No alarm
6 kw heater 3 (0.9) No alarm No alarm
250 w vapor lamp 3 (0.9) No alarm No alarm
300 w incandescent lamp 3 (0.9) No alarm No alarm
500 w unshielded quartz halogen lamp 8 (2.4) No alarm No alarm
500 w shielded quartz halogen lamp 8 (2.4) No alarm No alarm
1500 w electric radiant heater 3 (0.9) No alarm No alarm
Two 34 w fluorescent lamps 3 (0.9) No alarm No alarm
False Alarm Source
Distance
feet (m)
Vibration N/A No alarm N/A
Radio frequency interference 1 (0.3) No alarm (keyed) No alarm (steady)
Arc welding 10 (3) No alarm No alarm
500 w unshielded quartz halogen lamp 8 (2.4) No alarm No alarm
False Alarm Source
Distance
feet (m)
Vibration No alarm No alarm
Radio frequency interference N/A No alarm N/A
Arc welding 5 (1.5) No alarm No alarm
25 95-8527 12.1
FIELD OF VIEW
* Outdoor test condition.
Fuel Size
Distance
feet (m)
Horizontal
(degrees)
Avg. Horiz.
Response Time
(seconds)***
Vertical
(degrees)
Avg. Vert.
Response Time
(seconds)***
n-Heptane 1 x 1 foot
150*
(45.7)
+45
-45
12
14
+45
-30
13
5
100
(30.5)
+45
-45
6
3
+45
-30
3
2
n-Heptane 6 in. x 6 in.
80
(24.4)
+45
-45
5
6
+45
-30
4
4
Isopropanol 6 in. x 6 in.
70
(21.3)
+45
-45
5
5
+45
-30
4
6
Diesel** 1 x 1 foot
100
(30.5)
+45
-45
2
3
+45
-30
4
3
Ethanol 1 x 1 foot
150
(45.7)
+45
-45
13
10
+45
-30
10
8
Methanol 6 in. x 6 in.
40
(12.2)
+45
-45
4
6
+45
-30
3
3
Methanol 1 x 1 foot
110
(33.5)
+45
-45
9
7
+45
-30
9
3
Methane
30 inch
plume
100
(30.5)
+45
-45
7
3
+45
-30
2
2
JP-5** 1 x 1 foot
100
(30.5)
+45
-45
2
4
+45
-30
3
2
JP-5** 2 x 2 feet
180*
(54.9)
+45
-45
2
5
+45
-30
3
2
JP-5** 2 x 2 feet
90
(27.4)
+45
-45
2
3
+45
-30
1
2
Offce Paper 0.5 lb. 19" x 19" x 8"
80
(24.4)
+45
-45
4
2
+45
-30
2
1
Corrugated Panel 18" x 36"
80
(24.4)
+45
-45
1
1
+45
-30
3
2
26 95-8527 12.1
Medium Sensitivity
Low Sensitivity
Fuel Size
Distance
feet (m)
Horizontal
(degrees)
Avg. Horiz.
Response Time
(seconds)***
Vertical
(degrees)
Avg. Vert.
Response Time
(seconds)***
75
(22.9)
+45
-45
9
6
+45
-30
10
7
50
(15.2)
+45
-45
4
3
+45
-30
3
3
Diesel** 1 x 1 foot
60
(18.3)
+45
-45
4
4
+45
-30
4
2
Ethanol 1 x 1 foot
60
(18.2)
+45
-45
12
9
+45
-30
12
9
Methanol 1 x 1 foot
50
(15.2)
+45
-45
9
3
+45
-30
9
1
Methane 32 inch plume
45
(13.7)
+45
-45
3
3
+45
-30
7
1
JP-5** 2 x 2 feet
90
(27.4)
+45
-45
4
2
+45
-30
2
2
Offce Paper 0.5 lb. 19" x 19" x 8"
40
(12.2)
+45
-45
2
1
+45
-30
1
1
Corrugated Panel 18" x 36"
40
(12.2)
+45
-45
2
1
+45
-30
1
1
Fuel Size
Distance
feet (m)
Horizontal
(degrees)
Avg. Horiz. Response
Time (seconds)***
Vertical
(degrees)
Avg. Vert. Response Time
(seconds)***
35
(10.7)
+45
-45
13
13
+45
-30
9
18
Methanol 1 x 1 foot
15
(4.6)
+45
-45
14
12
+45
-30
10
8
Methane 32 inch plume
15
(4.6)
+45
-45
10
11
+45
-30
8
10
27 95-8527 12.1
0
15
30
45
15
30
45
80 ft
80 ft
50 ft
50 ft
40 ft
40 ft
30 ft
20 ft
10 ft
0
15
45
15
30
30
DETECTOR VERTICAL
FIELD OF VIEW
WITH DETECTOR AT
45 FROM HORIZONTAL.
70 ft
70 ft
60 ft
60 ft
30 ft
20 ft
10 ft
Field of View at Indicated Distance in Feet for
n-Heptane at Very High Sensitivity (6 in. x 6 in.)
0
15
45
15
30
30
DETECTOR VERTICAL
FIELD OF VIEW
WITH DETECTOR AT
45 FROM HORIZONTAL.
0
15 15
30
45
30
45
50 ft
50 ft
40 ft
40 ft
30 ft
30 ft
20 ft
10 ft
20 ft
10 ft
70 ft
70 ft
60 ft
60 ft
Isopropanol at Very High Sensitivity (6 in. x 6 in.)
HIGH RESOLUTION FIELD OF VIEW
0
15
45
15
30
30
DETECTOR VERTICAL
FIELD OF VIEW
WITH DETECTOR AT
45 FROM HORIZONTAL.
0
15 15
30
45
30
45
150 ft
150 ft
120 ft
120 ft
90 ft
90 ft
60 ft
60 ft
30 ft
210 ft
210 ft
180 ft
180 ft
0
15
30
45
15
30
45
150 ft
135 ft
120 ft
75 ft
60 ft
45 ft
30 ft
15 ft
105 ft
90 ft
Diesel at Very High Sensitivity (1 x 1 foot)
n-Heptane at Very High Sensitivity (1 x 1 foot)
28 95-8527 12.1
0
15
30
45
15
30
45
40 ft
40 ft
25 ft
25 ft
20 ft
20 ft
15 ft
10 ft
5 ft
0
15
45
15
30
30
DETECTOR VERTICAL
FIELD OF VIEW
WITH DETECTOR AT
45 FROM HORIZONTAL.
35 ft
35 ft
30 ft
30 ft
15 ft
10 ft
5 ft
Methanol at Very High Sensitivity (6 in. x 6 in.)
0
15
30
45
15
30
45
150 ft
135 ft
120 ft
75 ft
60 ft
45 ft
30 ft
15 ft
105 ft
90 ft
Methanol at Very High Sensitivity (1 x 1 foot)
JP-5 at Very High Sensitivity (2 x 2 feet)
0
15 15
30
45
30
45
150 ft
120 ft
90 ft
60 ft
30 ft
210 ft
180 ft
0
15
30
45
15
30
45
100 ft
90 ft
90 ft
80 ft
80 ft
50 ft
50 ft
40 ft
40 ft
30 ft
20 ft
10 ft
0
15
45
15
30
30
DETECTOR VERTICAL
FIELD OF VIEW
WITH DETECTOR AT
45 FROM HORIZONTAL.
70 ft
70 ft
60 ft
60 ft
100 ft
30 ft
20 ft
10 ft
Methane at Very High Sensitivity (30 inch plume)
0
15
45
15
30
30
DETECTOR VERTICAL
FIELD OF VIEW
WITH DETECTOR AT
45 FROM HORIZONTAL.
0
15 15
30
45
30
45
150 ft
150 ft
120 ft
120 ft
90 ft
90 ft
60 ft
60 ft
30 ft
210 ft
210 ft
180 ft
180 ft
Ethanol at Very High Sensitivity (1 x 1 foot)
29 95-8527 12.1
NOTE
FM Approvals minimum requirements are response
distance measurements at 0 (on axis) and the
limits of the feld of view. These high resolution
field of view diagrams show the measured
response distances at all the indicated angles in
the horizontal plane.
0
15
30
45
15
30
45
100 ft
90 ft
80 ft
50 ft
40 ft
30 ft
20 ft
10 ft
70 ft
60 ft
n-Heptane at Medium Sensitivity (1 x 1 foot)
Methane at Medium Sensitivity (30 inch plume)
0
15 15
30
45
30
45
50 ft
40 ft
30 ft
20 ft
10 ft
65 ft
60 ft
Methanol at Medium Sensitivity (1 x 1 foot)
0
15 15
30
45
30
45
50 ft
40 ft
30 ft
20 ft
10 ft
70 ft
60 ft
0
15
30
45
15
30
45
100 ft
90 ft
80 ft
50 ft
40 ft
30 ft
20 ft
10 ft
70 ft
60 ft
JP-5 at Medium Sensitivity (2 x 2 foot)
0
15
30
45
15
30
45
85 ft
80 ft
75 ft
45 ft
35 ft
25 ft
15 ft
5 ft
65 ft
55 ft
Ethanol at Medium Sensitivity (1 x 1 foot)
Diesel at Medium Sensitivity (1 x 1 foot)
0
15 15
30
45
30
45
50 ft
40 ft
30 ft
20 ft
10 ft
70 ft
60 ft
30 95-8527 12.1
APPENDIX B
VdS Schadenverhtung GmbH
Approval Description
SUBJECT MATTER OF THE APPROVAL:
IR Flame Detector Type X3301 for use in Automatic Fire Detection and Fire Alarm Systems.
BASIS OF APPROVAL:
DIN EN 54, Part 10 (05/02) - Flame Detectors.
INSTRUCTIONS FOR THE APPLICATION OF THE APPROVAL COMPONENT/SYSTEM:
The Installation shall take into account, that the orientation arrow on the flame detector is directed upwards, as the view
angle in this direction is <90.
The IR-flame detector corresponds to class 1.
Minneapolis, MN 55438 USA
T: 952.941.5665 or 800.765.3473
F: 952.829.8750
W: http://www.det-tronics.com
E: det-tronics@det-tronics.com

X3301 Multispectrum
IR Flame Detector
PointWatch Eclipse

IR Combustible Gas Detector
Eagle Quantum Premier

Safety System
Eagle Logic Solver
Safety System
Det-Tronics, the DET-TRONICS logo, ProtectIR, and Automatic Optical Integrity (oi) are registered trademarks or trademarks of Detector Electronics
Corporation in the United States, other countries, or both. Other company, product, or service names may be trademarks or service marks of others.
Copyright Detector Electronics Corporation 2010. All rights reserved
95-8527
ANEXOS
6
1.3 Detector de derrame
ANEXOS
7
1.4 Pulsador de emergencia
MANUAL CALL POINT
EExed, Intrinsically Safe (EExia), Weatherproof
BG2 Range
Zone 0, Zone 1 and Zone 2 use.
EExed, EExia or weatherproof.
ATEX approved Ex II 1G (EExia)
Ex II 2G (EExed)
BASEEFA certifed.
IP66 and IP67.
Certifed temperature -40C to +50C*.
Corrosion resistant red GRP.
Retained stainless steel cover screws.
Optional lift fap.
Key operated test facility.
Lightweight and robust.
Breakglass hammer available.
*Model dependent.
Introduction
This manual fre alarm call point has been
designed for use in fammable atmospheres
and harsh environmental conditions. The
GRP enclosure is suitable for use offshore or
onshore where light weight combined with a
high level of corrosion resistance is required.
MEDC Ltd, Colliery Road, MEDC International, 5829 West Sam Houston Parkway, MEDC Norway, Auglaendsmyraa 6,
Pinxton, Nottingham NG16 6JF, UK. North, Suite 1005, Houston, Texas 77041, USA. 4016, Stavanger, Norge.
Tel: +44 (0)1773 864100 Tel: +1 (713) 937 9772 Tel: +47 913 92 289
Fax: +44 (0)1773 582800 Fax: +1 (713) 937 9773 Fax: +47 914 46 030
Sales Enq. Fax: +44 (0)1773 582830 Sales Orders Fax: +44 (0)1773 582832
E-Mail: sales@medc.com Web: www.medc.com
6DS029/I
ATEX
1 2 3 4 5 6
3. In Line Resistor/Diode
R2/D2
ALL CIRCUITS SHOWN WITH GLASS INTACT
1. Switch Only
1 2 3 4 5 6
All the above specifcations, dimensions, weights and tolerances are nominal (typical) and MEDC reserve
the right to vary all data without prior notice. No liability is accepted for any consequence of use.
06/04
Technical Specifcation
MODEL BG2W BG2E BG2I

Dust-tight and
Explosion Protected Explosion Protected
PROTECTION
Weatherproof
EExed EExia
(Increased Safety) (Intrinsically Safe)
CERTIFICATION Not Applicable CENELEC EN50014, 018, 019, 028 CENELEC EN50014, 020
Cert. No. BAS02ATEX2105X Cert. No. Baseefa03ATEX0084X
EExedIICT6 (switch only) EExia IIC T4
EExedmIICT4 (other versions) Suitable for use in
Suitable for use in Zones 0, 1 & 2
Zones 1 & 2

VOLTAGE Up to 254V
Up to 250V (Switch only)
Up to 28V (IS)
Up to 24V (Resistors & Switch)
CERTIFIED TEMPERATURE 40C to +55C 20C to +50C 40C to +50C
INGRESS PROTECTION IP66 & 67.
BRITISH STANDARD
BS 5839 : Part 2 : 1983 (BG).
FOR CALL POINTS
TERMINALS 6 x 2.5mm
2
.
DC: 0-30V 5A (resistive) or 3A (inductive)
SWITCH RATINGS 30V-50V 1A resistive or inductive NOT APPLICABLE
AC: 0-254V 5A resistive or inductive
RESISTOR VALUES 270R Minimum 470R Minimum, 39k Maximum 470R Minimum
CABLE ENTRIES 2 x M20 bottom.
WEIGHT 1.2 Kg.
MATERIAL U.V. resistant glass reinforced polyester.

FINISH
Self coloured red.
Note: Natural red GRP may fade with exposure to sunlight. Specify painted fnish if unit to be used outdoors
Lift Flap Code
Fitted F
Not Fitted N
Model/Voltage Code
BG2W AC or DC BG2WNN
BG2I Up to 28V (I.S.) BG2INN
BG2E DC BG2EDC
BG2E AC BG2EAC
Ordering Requirements
The following code is designed to help in the selection of the correct unit. Build up the reference number by inserting the code for each
component into the appropriate box. For standard products, available ex-stock, contact sales offce for details.
The MEDC BG Range of
Manual Alarm Call Points
caters for numerous
options such as variety of
colours, LED indication,
earth continuity, double
switch, etc. See separate
catalogue sheet for details.
1 2 3 4 5 6
4. In Line & End of Line
Resistors/Diodes
R1/D1
R2/D2
Finish Code
Natural Red* N
Red Painted R
Note: Natural red GRP may
fade with exposure to sun-
light. Specify painted fnish
if unit to be used outdoors.
Wiring Diagram (as above) Code
Switch only 1
End of line resistor 2*
In line resistor 3*
In line and end of line resistor 4*
Diode (specify location & value) 5
*(Specify resistor values)
2. End of Line Resistor/Diode
1 2 3 4 5 6
R1/D1
ANEXOS
8
1.5 Lmpara de emergencia

_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
European Safety Systems Ltd. Impress House, Mansell Road, Acton, London W3 7QH sales@e-2-s.com Tel: +44 (0)208 743 8880
www.e-2-s.com Fax: +44 (0)208 740 4200
Document No. IS 2432-P Issue B 17-04-02 Sheet 1 of 4

INSTRUCTION MANUAL (ATEX)
BExBG15D and BExBG10D
Flameproof Xenon Beacons
1) Introduction

The BExBG15D and BExBG10D are second generation
flameproof beacons which are certified to the European
Standards EN 50014: 1992 and EN 50018: 1994 and meet
the requirements of the ATEX directive 94/9/EC. The
beacons produce synchronised visual warning signals and
can be used in hazardous areas where potentially flammable
atmospheres may be present. The BExBG15D has a 15 joule
output and the BExBG10D has a 10 joule output. Both
beacons can be used in Zone 1 and Zone 2 areas with gases
in groups IIA, IIB and IIC and Temperature Classifications of
T1, T2, T3 and T4. The beacons can also be used in a
temperature classification T5, if the upper ambient
temperature is restricted to +40C.

2) Marking

All units have a rating label, which carries the following
important information:-

Unit Type No. BExBG15D or BExBG10D

Input Voltage: DC Units 24V or 48V or 12V (10J only)
AC Units 230V or 115V

Code: EEx d IIC T4 (Tamb. 50 to +55C)
EEx d IIC T5 (Tamb. 50 to +40C)

Certificate No. KEMA 00ATEX2006 X

Warnings: DO NOT OPEN WHEN AN EXPLOSIVE
GAS ATMOSPHERE IS PRESENT

COVER BOLTS CLASS A4-80

USE HEAT RESISTING CABLES AND CABLE GLANDS
(Rated 95C) AT AMB. TEMPERATURES OVER 40C

Year of Construction/ i.e. 02 / 1B22000001
Serial No.

3) Type Approval Standards

The beacons have an EC Type examination certificate issued
by KEMA and have been approved to the following
standards:-

EN 50014 : 1992 + prA1 General Requirements
EN 50018 : 1994 + prA1 + prA2 + prA3 Flameproof Enclosure d

4) Installation Requirements

The beacons must be installed in accordance with the latest
issues of the relevant parts of the BS EN 60079
specifications or the equivalent IEC specifications
Selection, Installation and maintenance of electrical
apparatus for use in potentially explosive atmospheres (other
than mining applications or explosive processing and
manufacture):-

BS EN 60079-14 : 1997 Electrical Installations in Hazardous
Areas (other than mines)
BS EN 60079-10 : 1996 Classification of Hazardous Areas

The installation of the units must also be in accordance with
any local codes that may apply and should only be carried
out by a competent electrical engineer who has the
necessary training.

5) Zones, Gas Group, Category and Temperature
Classification

The BExBG15D and BExBG10D beacons have been certified
EEx d IIC T4 (Tamb. 50 to +55C) and EEx d IIC T4 (Tamb.
50 to +40C). This means that the units can be installed in
locations with the following conditions:-

Area Classification:

Zone 1 Explosive gas air mixture likely to occur in
normal operation.
Zone 2 Explosive gas air mixture not likely to occur,
and if it does, it will only exist for a short time.

Gas Groupings:

Group IIA Propane
Group IIB Ethylene
Group IIC Hydrogen and Acetylene

Equipment Category: 2G

Temperature Classification:

T1 400
o
C
T2 300
o
C
T3 200
o
C
T4 135
o
C

T5 100
o
C Amb. +40C

Ambient Temperature Range:

-50C to +55C
(T5 = +40C)
0344
II 2G Epsilon x:
Gas Group and
Category:
CE Marking
Notified Body No.
90
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
www.e-2-s.com Fax: +44 (0)208 740 4200

6) Beacon Location and Mounting

The location of the beacons should be made with due regard
to the area over which the warning signal must be visible.
They should only be fixed to services that can carry the
weight of the unit.

SAFETY WARNING: The BExBG15D and BExBG10D 15
and 10 joule beacons must be mounted with their flashdome
in a position between upright and 90 as shown.

The beacons should be securely bolted to a suitable surface
using the 7mm diameter boltholes in the stainless steel U
shaped mounting bracket (see figure 1). The angle can then
be adjusted as required but the mounting restrictions must be
observed (see above). This can be achieved by loosening the
two large bracket screws in the side of the unit, which allow
adjustment in steps of 18. On completion of the installation
the two large bracket adjustment screws on the side of the
unit must be fully tightened to ensure that the unit cannot
move in service.

SAFETY WARNING: The flashdome guard must not be
removed from the unit at any time.

7) Access to the Flameproof Enclosure

In order to connect the electrical supply cables to the beacon
it is necessary to remove the flameproof cover to gain access
to the flameproof chamber. To achieve this remove the four
M6 hexagon socket head screws (see figure 2) and withdraw
the flameproof cover taking extreme care not to damage the
flameproof joints in the process.

Note the four M6 screws are Class A4-80 stainless steel
and only screws of this category can be used on these
beacons. It is therefore important that these screws and their
spring washers are kept in a safe place during installation.

On completion of the cable wiring installation the flameproof
joints should be inspected to ensure that they are clean and
that they have not been damaged during installation. Also
check that the earth bonding wire between the two casting
sections is secure and the O ring seal is in place. When
replacing the flameproof cover casting ensure that it is square
with the flameproof chamber casting before inserting.
Carefully push the cover in place allowing time for the air to
be expelled. Only after the cover is fully in place should the
four M6 Stainless Steel A4-80 cover bolts and their spring
washer be inserted and tightened down. If the cover jams
while it is being inserted, carefully remove it and try again.
Never use the cover bolts to force the cover into position.

8) Power Supply Selection

It is important that a suitable power supply is used to run the
beacons. The power supply selected must have the
necessary capacity to provide the input current to all of the
beacons connected to the system.

The following table shows the input current taken by the
various units:-

Unit Type Nominal I/P Input Max.
Voltage Current I/P
Volts

BExBG15D 24V DC 860mA 30V
BExBG15D 230V AC 170mA 253V

BExBG10D 12V DC 1.45A 15V

The input current will vary according to the voltage input
level. The current levels shown above are for nominal input
voltage. The 12V, 24V and 48V DC units have a converter
circuit and therefore the input current level will decrease
slightly as the input voltage in increased and will increase
slightly as the input voltage is reduced.

The above table also shows the maximum voltages at which
the beacons can be operated.

9) Cable Selection

When selecting the cable size consideration must be given to
the input current that each unit draws (see table above), the
number of beacons on the line and the length of the cable
runs. The cable size selected must have the necessary
Flashdome
Guard
Flameproof
Chamber
Flameproof
Cover
S/S Bracket Figure 1
4 off M6 Cover Screws
External Earth
Terminal
Figure 2
90
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
www.e-2-s.com Fax: +44 (0)208 740 4200

capacity to provide the input current to all of the beacons
connected to the line.

SAFETY WARNING: If the BExBG15D and BExBG10D
beacons are used at high ambient temperatures, i.e. over
+40C, then the cable entry temperature may exceed +70C
and therefore suitable heat resisting cables must be used,
with a rated service temperature of at least 95C.

10) Earthing

Both AC and DC beacon units must be connected to a good
quality earth. The units are provided with internal and
external earthing terminals which are both located on the
terminal chamber section of the unit (see figures 2 and 3).

When using the external earth terminal a cable crimp lug
must be used. The cable lug should be located between the
two M5 stainless steel flat washers. The M5 stainless steel
spring washer must be fixed between the outer flat washer
and the M5 stainless steel nut to ensure that the cable lug is
secured against loosening and twisting.

The internal earth bonding wire ensures that a good quality
earth is maintained between the flameproof chamber casting
and the flameproof cover casting.

11) Cable Glands

The BExBG15D and BExBG10D beacons have dual cable
gland entries which have an M20 x1.5 entry thread as
standard. Only cable glands approved for Ex d applications
can be used, which must be suitable for the type of cable
being used and also meet the requirements of the Ex d
flameproof installation standard BS EN 60079-14 : 1997.

SAFETY WARNING: If the BExBG15D and BExBG10D
beacons are used at high ambient temperatures, i.e. over
+40C, then the cable entry temperature may exceed +70C
and therefore suitable heat resisting cable glands must be
used, with a rated service temperature of at least 95C.

If a high IP (Ingress Protection) rating is required then a
suitable sealing washer must be fitted under the cable gland.

When only one cable entry is used the other one must be
closed with an Ex d flameproof blanking plug, which must be
suitably approved for the installation requirements.

12) Cable Connections

The cable connections are made into the terminal blocks on
the electronic pcb assembly located in the flameproof
enclosure. See section 7 of this manual for access to the
flameproof enclosure. A four-way terminal block is provided
on both AC and DC beacons. Therefore there are two live
terminals and two neutral terminals for the input and output
wiring on AC units. On the DC units there are two +ve
terminals and two -ve terminals for the input and output
wiring.

Wires having a cross sectional area of up to 2.5mm can be
connected to each terminal way. If an input and output wire is
required a 2.5mm wire can be connected to each terminal
way. When connecting wires to the terminals great care
should be taken to dress the wires so that when the cover is
inserted into the chamber the wires do not exert excess
pressure on the terminal blocks. This is particularly important
when using cables with large cross sectional areas such as
2.5mm.

13) Synchronised Operation

All BExBG15D and BExBG10D beacons that are connected
to the same supply line will have a synchronised flash rate at
one flash every second. To ensure that the units will be
synchronised check that the pin header is not fitted, i.e. the
two header pins are not shorted together (see Figure 4).

14) Flip-Flop Operation

Two beacons can be mounted close to each other to form a
flip-flop operation, where the beacons will flash alternately.
To achieve this mode of operation, fit a pin header to the flip-
flop header pins on the electronics board, i.e. the two header
pins are shorted together, (see figure 4) on one of the two
beacons. The first flash on the beacon that has the header
fitted will be delayed by second. The two beacons will then
flash alternately every a second.

2 off M20
Cable Entries
Internal Earth Terminal
Figure 3
Internal Bonding
Wire Terminal
BExBG15D and BExBG10D Beacon Cover Internal
Figure 4
Supply
Terminals
BExBG15D and BExBG10DD 15 and 10 Joule Beacons
Flip / Flop
Terminal
Header
_______________________________________________________________________________________________________________________________
www.e-2-s.com Fax: +44 (0)208 740 4200

15) End of Line Monitoring (DC Units)

On the BExBG15D and BExBG10D DC beacons, dc reverse
line monitoring can be used if required. All DC beacons have
a blocking diode fitted in their supply input lines. An end of
line monitoring diode or an end of line monitoring resistor can
be connected across the +ve and ve terminals. If an end of
line resistor is used it must have a minimum resistance value
of 3k3 ohms and a minimum wattage of 0.5 watts or a
minimum resistance value of 500 ohms and a minimum
wattage of 2 watts.

ANEXOS
9
1.6 Sirena de emergencia

SOUNDERS Up to 118 dB(A)
EExd(e), Weatherproof
DB3 Range
Introduction
This range of light weight all GRP, ameproof sounders is
intended for use in potentially explosive gas and dust
atmospheres and has been designed with high ingress
protection to cope with the harsh environmental conditions
found offshore and onshore in the oil, gas and
petrochemical industries.
The amepaths, are and the body, are manufactured
completely from a UV stable glass reinforced polyester.
Stainless steel screws and sinter are incorporated thus
ensuring a corrosion free product. A tapered amepath is
used to overcome the problems of assembly of parallel
spigot amepaths.
An optional Exe terminal chamber is available.
An uncertied version is available for use in non-explosive
atmospheres.
H Zone 1, Zone 2 and non-Ex use.
H EExde IIC T5.
H ATEX approved, Ex II 2GD.
H Optional Exe terminal chamber.
H BASEEFA certied.
H UL Listed for USA and Canada
Hazardous locations:
Class I, Div 2, Groups A-D.
Class II, Div 2, Groups F & G
Class I, Zones 1 & 2, AExd IIC T4.
Ordinary locations: Audible-Signal Device.
H GOST R & K certied.
H Chinese (CQST) certied.
H Australian (SAA) certied.
H Brazilian (Inmetro) certied.
H IP66 and IP67.
H *Certied temperature 55C to +70C.
H All GRP corrosion free amepaths.
H Up to 118dBA output.
H Integral volume control.
H 27 tones, user selectable.
H Tones comply with UK00A/PFEER guidelines.
H Two tones may be switched via the external voltage
supply now available in AC and DC versions.
H Tones may be programmed to customer specication.
H d.c. version accepts any voltage between12V d.c. and
48V d.c.
H End of line resistor option.
H Sounder/Beacon Combination Unit available.
*Depending on version.
Sounder/Beacon
Combination Unit
ATEX
MEDC Ltd, Colliery Road, MEDC International, 5829 West Sam Houston Parkway, MEDC Norway, Auglaendsmyraa 6,
Pinxton, Nottingham NG16 6JF, UK. North, Suite 1005, Houston, Texas 77041, USA. 4016, Stavanger, Norge.
Tel: +44 (0)1773 864100 Tel: +1 (713) 937 9772 Tel: +47 913 92 289
Fax: +44 (0)1773 582800 Fax: +1 (713) 937 9773 Fax: +47 914 46 030
Sales Enq. Fax: +44 (0)1773 582830 Sales Orders Fax: +44 (0)1773 582832
E-Mail: sales@medc.com Web: www.medc.com
6DS094/Q
GOST
N
o
w

V
N
I
I
P
O

A
p
p
r
o
v
e
d
Ordering Requirements
The following code is designed to help in selection of the correct unit. Build up the reference number by inserting the code for each
component into the appropriate box. For standard products, available ex-stock, contact sales ofce for details.
Terminals: 4 x 2.5mm
2
(a.c.), 6 x 2.5mm
2
(d.c.).
Earth Continuity: Included on EExde version.
Mounting: Stainless steel bracket with ratchet facility.
Labels: Duty and tag labels optional.
Cable Entries: Up to 2 x 20mm EExd 2 x 20mm EExe.
Up to 2 x
1
/2" NPT UL.
Note: ATEX/UL Dual Listed version up to 2x
1
/2"
NPT or 2xM20 via adapter (tted).
Tone Selection: 27 user selectable tones.
Sounder/Beacon Unit: The DB3 may be combined with an MEDC beacon
to create a combined audio/visual alarm.
Contact MEDC for price and specication
Two Stage Unit DB3P: Switchable between two tones:
D.C. (i) Reversing the polarity of the supply, or
(ii) by a 3 wire common +ve system, switching
between the two ve lines.
A.C. (iii) Closing/opening connection between 2 terminals
e.g. by using a volt free relay contact at the panel.
2 tones must be specied at time of order.
3/4 Tone Unit: Remote 3 or 4 tone available contact sales ofce
for details.
Specication
Certication: CENELEC EN50014, 18, 19.
BASEEFA Cert. No. BAS00ATEX2097X, EExd IIC.
BASEEFA Cert. No. BAS00ATEX2098X, EExde IIC.
Zones 1 and 2.
UL Listed for USA and Canada
Hazardous locations:
Class I, Div 2, Groups A-D.
Class II, Div 2, Groups F & G.
Class I Zones 1 & 2, AExd IIC T4.
Listing No: E203310.
Ordinary locations: Audible-Signal Device.
Listing No. S8116.
Refer to UL data sheet at rear of catalogue for complete information.
GOST R Certication: 1Exd IIC T4 & 1Exde IIC T4.
Russian Fire Alarm (VNIIPO) Approved.
GOST K Certication: Exd IIC T4.
Chinese (CQST) Certication: Exd IIC T4.
Brazilian (Inmetro) Certication: BR-Ex d IIC T5/T4/T135C.
BR-Ex de IIC T5/T4/T135C.
Material: Body & horn in anti-static, UV stable, glass reinforced polyester.
Swivel bracket & captive cover screws in stainless steel.
Finish: Body and horn, natural black or epoxy paint coated to clients
colour requirements.
Sound Output: Long Flare: 115dB(A) 3dB(A) (tone dependent).
Short Flare: 108dB(A) 3dB(A) (tone dependent).
Volume Control:
*Nominal Output (dBA) Input Current (mA)
93 50
105 100
108 150
111 200
112 250
114 300
115 350
*Output measured with 24V input voltage. Tone set to 970Hz continuous.
Weight: 6.0kg approx. dependent on model (+0.5kg for EExe).
Certied
Temperature:
Ingress Protection: IP66 and IP67.
Fire Retardancy: GRP is re retardant to ISO 1210.
Voltage: Up to 48V d.c. Up to 254V a.c.
Current
Consumption:
All the above specications, dimensions, weights and tolerances are nominal (typical) and MEDC reserve the right to vary
all data without prior notice. No liability is accepted for any consequence of use, consult sales ofce for clarication.
10/08
Unit Type Certication Voltage Labels Entries Options Colour
Type Details
DB3 Standard unit
DB3P Two stage
*DB3L Low temp. standard unit
*DB3LP Low temp. two stage
Colour Code
Natural Black N
Red R
Special S*
*Please specify
Voltage Code
12V - 48V d.c. 048
110V a.c. 110
120V a.c. 120
220V a.c. 220
230V a.c. 230
240V a.c. 240
254V a.c. 254
Label Code
Duty D*
Tag T*
None N
*Please specify
wording
Type Code
Uncertied W
EExd D
EExde E
UL Listed *UL
UL (Ordinary Locations) UW
ATEX/UL Dual Listed AU
GOST R Exd DG
GOST R Exde EG
GOST K Exd DK
Chinese (CQST) Q
Inmetro Exd DM
Inmetro Exde EM
Entries Code
1 x 20mm (EExd) 1B
2 x 20mm (EExd/EExde) 2B
1 x
1
/2" NPT (UL only) 1C
2 x
1
/2" NPT (UL only) 2C
Features Code
None N
End of line resistor E*
Special tone S
*State value.
V I
12V d.c. 760mA
24V d.c. 380mA
48V d.c. 190mA
110V a.c 135mA
120V a.c. 124mA
220V a.c. 68mA
230V a.c. 65mA
240V a.c. 62mA
254V a.c. 59mA
*Available unpainted only.
EExd EExde UL GOST R&K Exd GOST R Exde Chinese Exd
DB3 & DB3P -20C to -20C to -55C to -20C to -20C to -20C to
+70C +45C +70C +50C +40C +55C
DB3L & DB3LP -55C to -55C to n/a -55C to -55C to n/a
+55C +70C +55C +55C
*Not all options are available UL listed.

Sistema Fire and Gas Yokogawa

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sistema Fire and Gas Yokogawa

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Sistema de deteccin de fuego y gas para un tanque en

una planta regasificadora

Model PIRECL is a diffusion-

UD10 Universal Display Unit, the

Wire Resistance in Ohms/

MAGNETIC REED SWITCH

250 TO 500 OHMS

Multispectrum IR Flame Detector

is a multispectrum infrared (IR)

Increased Safety Model Flameproof Model

You might also like